Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS) Dynamic Positioning System: Operator Manual

Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)
Dynamic Positioning System

Operator Manual
Release 7.0
301027/C
December 2006
Document history
Document number: 301027
This version describes the operation of the K-Pos DP at basis
Rev. A October 2006
software release 7.0.1.
Rev. B November 2006 Minor errors corrected.
Rev. C December 2006 Text Entity corrected.
The reader
This operator manual is intended as a reference manual for the system operator. This manual is based on
the assumption that the system operator is an experienced DP operator with good understanding of basic
DP principles and general DP operation. If this is not the case, then the operator should first attend the
appropriate Kongsberg Maritime training courses.
Note
The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg Maritime AS. No
part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, and the information
contained within it is not to be communicated to a third party, without the prior written consent of
Kongsberg Maritime AS.
Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is correct and fairly
stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.
Warning
The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for which it was
designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel.
The user must be familiar with the contents of the appropriate manuals before attempting to operate
or work on the equipment.
Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation,
use or maintenance of the equipment.
Comments
To assist us in making improvements to the product and to this manual, we welcome comments and
constructive criticism.
e-mail: km.documentation@kongsberg.com
Kongsberg Maritime AS
P.O.Box 483 Telephone: +47 32 28 50 00
N-3601 Kongsberg, Telefax: +47 32 28 50 10
Norway Service: +47 815 35 355
www.kongsberg.com
Operator Manual
Table of contents
Glossary..................................................................................................................13
1 K-POS DP SYSTEM THEORY ............................................. 19
1.1 The K-Pos DP system.............................................................................................19
1.2 Basic forces and motions........................................................................................19
1.3 K-Pos DP system principles ...................................................................................21
1.3.1 The Extended Kalman Filter ........................................................................ 21
1.3.3 The Controller ............................................................................................ 24
1.3.3.2 High Precision and Relaxed Control ........................................................ 24
1.3.3.3 Green control......................................................................................... 25
1.3.5 Thruster allocation ...................................................................................... 27
2 USER INTERFACE ............................................................ 29
2.1 Operator station ......................................................................................................29
2.2 Operator panel ........................................................................................................30
2.2.1 Push buttons ............................................................................................... 31
2.2.1.1 Modes ................................................................................................... 31
2.2.1.2 Controls ................................................................................................ 32
2.2.1.3 Views .................................................................................................... 32
2.2.1.4 Thrusters ............................................................................................... 32
2.2.1.5 Sensors.................................................................................................. 32
2.2.1.6 Command.............................................................................................. 32
2.2.1.7 Alarms .................................................................................................. 32
2.2.2 Input .......................................................................................................... 32
2.2.3 Trackball.................................................................................................... 33
2.2.4 Joystick...................................................................................................... 34
2.2.5 Heading wheel............................................................................................ 34
2.3 Display layout.........................................................................................................35
2.3.1 Title bar ..................................................................................................... 36
2.3.2 Menu bar.................................................................................................... 36
2.3.2.1 Active and unavailable commands .......................................................... 37
2.3.3 Message line............................................................................................... 37
2.3.4 Performance area ........................................................................................ 38
2.3.5 Working areas............................................................................................. 38
2.3.6 Status line .................................................................................................. 38
2.3.7 Status bar ................................................................................................... 38
2.3.7.1 Overview of labels on the status bar ........................................................ 38
2.3.8 Dialog boxes .............................................................................................. 40
2.3.9 Entering numeric values .............................................................................. 42
2.3.9.1 Enabling the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box................................ 42
2.3.9.2 Using the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box .................................... 44
301027/C 3
2.3.9.3 Overview of the keys in the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box........... 45
2.3.10 Input validation of entered values................................................................. 45
2.4 Display views .........................................................................................................46
2.4.1 Orientation of the OS and effect on display views ......................................... 46
2.4.2 Tooltip/hotspot cursor and change of cursor image ........................................ 46
2.4.3 Available views .......................................................................................... 47
2.4.4 Selecting a display view .............................................................................. 48
2.4.5 View control dialog boxes ........................................................................... 49
2.4.6 Zooming .................................................................................................... 50
2.4.7 Preselecting views ...................................................................................... 50
2.5 Main menus ............................................................................................................51
2.5.1 Menu bar.................................................................................................... 52
2.5.2 System menu .............................................................................................. 52
2.5.3 View menu ................................................................................................. 53
2.5.4 Sensors menu ............................................................................................. 54
2.5.5 Thruster menu ............................................................................................ 54
2.5.6 Joystick menu............................................................................................. 55
2.5.7 AutoPos menu ............................................................................................ 55
2.5.8 Help menu.................................................................................................. 56
3 SYSTEM SETTINGS .......................................................... 57
3.1 Changing user.........................................................................................................57
3.2 Printing the display picture.....................................................................................58
3.3 Panel Light Configuration dialog box ....................................................................58
3.3.1 Dimming level............................................................................................ 58
3.3.2 Lamp test ................................................................................................... 59
3.4 Display Units dialog box ........................................................................................60
3.4.1 Selecting the set of display units to use......................................................... 60
3.4.2 Editing Display Units.................................................................................. 61
3.4.3 Additional information ................................................................................ 62
3.4.4 Vessel and sea current speed ........................................................................ 62
3.4.5 Wind, waves and sea current direction.......................................................... 63
3.4.6 Resetting the display units ........................................................................... 63
3.5 System date and time..............................................................................................63
3.5.1 Date and time ............................................................................................. 63
3.5.2 Time zone .................................................................................................. 64
3.6 Set palette (display colours) ...................................................................................64
3.6.1 Changing the display palette on Operator Stations that are not set to have
an independent palette selection................................................................... 64
3.6.2 Changing the display palette on a single Operator Station .............................. 65
3.7 Alarm Limits dialog box ........................................................................................65
3.7.1 Position page .............................................................................................. 65
3.7.2 VRS page................................................................................................... 67
4 301027/C
Operator Manual
3.8 Controller mode and gain level selection ...............................................................68

3.8.1 Gain Level for High Precision and Relaxed Controller Mode......................... 71
3.8.2 Display presentation of Controller Mode ...................................................... 71
3.8.2.1 High Precision and Relaxed .................................................................... 71
3.8.2.2 Green .................................................................................................... 72
3.9 Quick model update................................................................................................73
3.9.1 Quick Model dialog box.............................................................................. 74
3.10 Rotation center for automatic control.....................................................................75
3.10.1 Additional information ................................................................................ 77
4 JOYSTICK ....................................................................... 78
4.1 Calibrating the joystick ..........................................................................................78
4.1.1 Calibration procedure.................................................................................. 79
4.2 Joystick settings......................................................................................................79
4.3 Rotation center for joystick manoeuvring ..............................................................82
4.3.1 Rotation Center dialog box .......................................................................... 84
5 MESSAGE SYSTEM ........................................................... 86
5.1 System diagnostics .................................................................................................86
5.2 Operational checks .................................................................................................86
5.2.1 Audible and visual indications ..................................................................... 87
5.3 Message priority .....................................................................................................87
5.4 Presentation of messages........................................................................................88
5.4.1 Defining the time span for the Historic Event Page........................................ 91
5.5 Alarm states ............................................................................................................92
5.6 Acknowledging messages ......................................................................................93
5.6.1 Silence button............................................................................................. 94
5.7 Alarm lamps ...........................................................................................................94
5.7.1 Indications of errors related to the ALARMS button group ............................. 95
5.8 Messages on the printer ..........................................................................................96
5.8.1 Event Printer dialog box.............................................................................. 96
5.9 Message explanations.............................................................................................97
5.9.1 Contents..................................................................................................... 97
5.9.2 Search........................................................................................................ 98
5.9.3 Displayed explanation ................................................................................. 99
5.9.3.1 Back link ............................................................................................. 100
5.9.4 Menu bar.................................................................................................. 100
5.9.5 Printing message explanations ................................................................... 101
5.10 Operator advice messages ....................................................................................102
6 STARTING OPERATIONS ............................................... 104
6.1 System start-up/shut-down and OS stop/restart ...................................................104
6.1.1 Stop/Restart dialog box ............................................................................. 104
6.1.2 Restart the OS using the Windows Security dialog box................................ 106
301027/C 5
6.2 Logon Configuration dialog box ..........................................................................106

6.3 Command transfer ................................................................................................107
6.3.1 Taking command ...................................................................................... 108
6.3.2 Giving command ...................................................................................... 108
6.4 Command Control dialog box ..............................................................................109
6.4.1 Command groups.......................................................................................110
6.4.1.1 Thr_Propulsion .....................................................................................110
6.4.1.2 Thr_Propulsion(Sim).............................................................................110
6.4.2 DP-OS page ..............................................................................................110
6.4.3 Overview page ..........................................................................................111
6.4.4 Give page..................................................................................................112
6.4.5 Command Groups......................................................................................113
6.4.6 Controls and indicators...............................................................................113
6.4.7 Taking or giving command of propulsion control .........................................115
6.5 Connecting to a controller PS group .................................................................... 116
7 CONTROLLER PROCESS STATIONS ................................ 117
7.1 Resetting controller process stations .................................................................... 117
7.1.1 Resetting the controller PS in a single-computer system ...............................117
7.1.2 Resetting one controller PS in a dual or triple redundant system....................117
7.1.3 Resetting all controller PSs in a dual or triple redundant system ....................117
7.2 Redundant systems ............................................................................................... 118
7.2.1 Error objects..............................................................................................119
7.2.2 Dual redundant system ...............................................................................119
7.2.2.1 Automatic switch-over to the Offline PS ................................................ 120
7.2.2.2 Resetting after an automatic switch-over................................................ 120
7.2.3 Triple redundant system ............................................................................ 121
7.2.4 Redundant Stations dialog box................................................................... 122
8 SENSORS ...................................................................... 126
8.1 Gyrocompasses.....................................................................................................126
8.1.1 Sensors dialog box - Gyro page ................................................................. 126
8.1.2 Gyro Deviation dialog box ........................................................................ 127
8.1.2.1 Additional information ......................................................................... 129
8.1.3 Gyro status lamp....................................................................................... 129
8.1.4 Displayed heading information .................................................................. 129
8.1.5 Rejection of heading measurements ........................................................... 129
8.1.6 Faulty gyrocompasses ............................................................................... 130
8.1.7 Heading dropout ....................................................................................... 131
8.2 Wind sensors.........................................................................................................131
8.2.1 Sensors dialog box - Wind page ................................................................. 132
8.2.2 Wind status lamp ...................................................................................... 133
8.2.3 Displayed wind information ...................................................................... 134
8.2.4 Faulty wind sensors .................................................................................. 134
6 301027/C
Operator Manual
8.2.5 Rejection of faulty wind data ..................................................................... 135

8.2.6 Operating without wind sensor input .......................................................... 135
8.3 Vertical reference sensors (VRS) .........................................................................136
8.3.1 Sensors dialog box - VRS page.................................................................. 136
8.3.2 VRS status lamp ....................................................................................... 137
8.3.3 Displayed VRS information....................................................................... 138
8.3.4 Faulty VRS .............................................................................................. 138
8.4 Speed sensors .......................................................................................................138
8.4.1 Sensors dialog box - Speed page ................................................................ 139
8.4.2 Displayed speed information ..................................................................... 141
8.5 Draught sensors ....................................................................................................141
8.5.1 Sensors dialog box - Draught page ............................................................. 141
8.6 Rate Of Turn sensors ............................................................................................143
8.6.1 Sensors dialog box - Rate Of Turn page...................................................... 143
9 POSITION INFORMATION ............................................. 145
9.1 Handling position information .............................................................................145
9.2 Position Presentation dialog box ..........................................................................146
9.2.1 Additional information .............................................................................. 149
9.3 Datum Details dialog box.....................................................................................149
9.4 Local N/E Properties dialog box ..........................................................................150
9.5 UTM Properties dialog box ..................................................................................151
9.6 State plane zone....................................................................................................152
9.7 Methods for enabling position-reference systems................................................153
9.8 Panel buttons ........................................................................................................153
9.9 Reference System Settings dialog box .................................................................153
9.10 Reference System dialog box ...............................................................................157
9.10.1 Enable page.............................................................................................. 157
9.10.2 Weight page ............................................................................................. 158
9.10.3 Validation page ......................................................................................... 159
9.11 Reference System Properties dialog box..............................................................161
9.11.2 UTM Properties........................................................................................ 162
9.11.3 Quality Filter Actions................................................................................ 163
9.12 Coordinate systems...............................................................................................164
9.12.1 Global and local position-reference systems ............................................... 164
9.12.2 System datum ........................................................................................... 165
9.12.3 The reference origin.................................................................................. 165
9.13 Tests on position measurements ...........................................................................166
9.13.1 Standard deviation of position measurements.............................................. 166
9.13.2 Freeze test ................................................................................................ 166
9.13.3 Variance, weight and the Variance test........................................................ 167
301027/C 7
9.13.4 Prediction test........................................................................................... 167

9.13.5 Divergence test ......................................................................................... 168
9.13.6 Median test............................................................................................... 169
9.14 Procedures for enabling position-reference systems ............................................172
9.14.1 Enabling the first position-reference system................................................ 172
9.14.2 Enabling other position-reference systems .................................................. 172
9.15 Changing the reference origin ..............................................................................173
9.16 Position dropout ...................................................................................................174
10 MAIN MODES AND OPERATING PROCEDURES ............... 176
10.1 Standby mode .......................................................................................................176
10.1.1 Returning to Standby mode/manual levers .................................................. 176
10.2 Joystick mode .......................................................................................................177
10.2.1 From Standby mode to Joystick mode ........................................................ 177
10.2.2 Joystick control of position and heading ..................................................... 178
10.2.3 Position and heading information............................................................... 178
10.2.4 Joystick electrical failure ........................................................................... 179
10.2.5 Mixed joystick/auto modes........................................................................ 179
10.2.6 Joystick mode with automatic heading control ............................................ 179
10.2.6.1 Selecting automatic heading control ...................................................... 180
10.2.6.2 Returning to joystick heading control .................................................... 180
10.2.7 Joystick mode with automatic position control in both surge and sway........... 180
10.2.7.1 Selecting automatic position control ...................................................... 181
10.2.7.2 Returning to joystick position control .................................................... 181
10.2.8 Joystick mode with automatic stabilisation ................................................. 181
10.2.8.1 Selecting automatic stabilisation ........................................................... 182
10.2.8.2 Returning to joystick control ................................................................ 182
10.3 Auto Position mode ..............................................................................................182
10.3.1 From Joystick mode to Auto Position mode................................................ 183
11 CHANGING THE POSITION SETPOINT ........................... 185
11.1 Stopping a change of position ..............................................................................185
11.2 Marking a new position setpoint on the Posplot view..........................................185
11.3 Position R/B dialog box (range/bearing)..............................................................186
11.4 Position Inc dialog box (incremental) ..................................................................186
11.5 Position dialog box ...............................................................................................187
11.5.1 Inc page ................................................................................................... 187
11.5.2 R/B page .................................................................................................. 188
11.5.3 Abs page .................................................................................................. 189
11.5.4 Speed page ............................................................................................... 190
11.6 Speed Setpoint dialog box ....................................................................................191
8 301027/C
Operator Manual
11.7 Acceleration/Retardation Settings dialog box ......................................................192

12 CHANGING THE HEADING SETPOINT ............................ 195
12.1 Stopping a change of heading ..............................................................................195
12.2 Marking a new heading setpoint on the Posplot view..........................................195
12.3 Heading Wheel and its associated buttons ...........................................................196
12.4 Heading dialog box ..............................................................................................197
12.4.1 Heading page............................................................................................ 197
12.4.2 Rate Of Turn page..................................................................................... 199
12.5 Acceleration/retardation factors in the yaw axis ..................................................200
13 THRUSTERS .................................................................. 201
13.1 Enabling thrusters.................................................................................................201
13.1.1 Thruster Enable dialog box........................................................................ 201
13.2 Automatic thruster start (for IAS deliveries)........................................................203
13.2.1 Automatic Thruster Start dialog box........................................................... 203
13.3 Thruster Allocation dialog box.............................................................................204
13.4 Allocation Settings dialog box .............................................................................208
13.5 Rudder/Nozzle control .........................................................................................209
13.6 Thruster biasing ....................................................................................................209
13.7 Thruster Biasing dialog box .................................................................................210
13.7.1 Manual selection of thruster biasing ........................................................... 210
13.7.2 Automatically changing bias available ........................................................211
13.7.3 Turn factor ............................................................................................... 216
13.7.4 Angle factor ............................................................................................. 216
13.7.5 Inwards .................................................................................................... 217
13.8 Thruster Combinator Control Settings dialog box ...............................................219
13.9 Thruster Run-in dialog box ..................................................................................220
14 POWER SYSTEM ............................................................ 221
14.1 Power monitoring .................................................................................................221
14.2 Power load monitoring and blackout prevention .................................................221
15 SYSTEM STATUS INFORMATION ................................... 224
15.1 Remote diagnostics...............................................................................................224
15.1.1 pcAnywhere Waiting... dialog box ............................................................. 226
15.2 Printing system status data ...................................................................................226
15.3 Displaying software information..........................................................................229
15.4 Interface to CyberSea ...........................................................................................231
16 SYSTEM STATUS MONITORING ..................................... 233
16.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................233
301027/C 9
16.2 System architecture ..............................................................................................233

16.2.1 Operator stations....................................................................................... 234
16.2.2 Process stations ........................................................................................ 234
16.2.2.1 Redundancy......................................................................................... 234
16.2.2.2 WinPS................................................................................................. 235
16.2.2.3 PS names and numbers ......................................................................... 235
16.2.3 IO system................................................................................................. 235
16.2.4 Monitoring functions................................................................................. 236
16.3 Equipment ............................................................................................................237
16.3.1 PS page .................................................................................................... 237
16.3.2 PS Redundancy page................................................................................. 239
16.3.3 OS/HS page.............................................................................................. 241
16.3.4 Event Printer page .................................................................................... 242
16.3.5 Net Status................................................................................................. 243
16.3.6 Print Image............................................................................................... 244
16.4 Station Explorer....................................................................................................245
16.4.1 PS tree structure........................................................................................ 247
16.4.2 Alarm status indicators.............................................................................. 247
16.4.3 Hotspots................................................................................................... 247
16.4.4 Acknowledging PS system alarms.............................................................. 248
16.5 IO Manager...........................................................................................................249
16.5.1 IO Configurator ........................................................................................ 250
16.6 RBUS IO Image ...................................................................................................250
16.6.1 Overview level ......................................................................................... 251
16.6.2 Detailed level ........................................................................................... 252
16.7 IO Terminal Block................................................................................................252
16.7.1 Shortcut menu .......................................................................................... 255
16.7.2 Signal Conditioning elements .................................................................... 256
16.8 IO Point Browser..................................................................................................257
16.8.1 IO Point Browser dialog box ..................................................................... 258
16.8.2 Shortcut menu .......................................................................................... 259
16.9 Properties — DpPs Serial port .............................................................................261
16.9.1 SerPort page ............................................................................................. 262
16.9.2 Int status page........................................................................................... 263
16.10 Resetting a disabled serial line .............................................................................264
17 BUILT-IN TRAINER ....................................................... 266
17.1 Trainer functions ..................................................................................................266
17.2 Using the trainer ...................................................................................................266
17.3 Setting the start position for the next session .......................................................268
17.4 Leaving the trainer................................................................................................268
18 DP ONLINE CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS .......................... 269
18.1 DP online consequence analysis...........................................................................269
10 301027/C
Operator Manual
18.2 Selecting the DP class ..........................................................................................270

18.3 Consequence analysis status messages.................................................................270
18.4 Consequence analysis alarm messages.................................................................270
19 DISPLAY VIEWS............................................................ 272
19.1 Deviation view .....................................................................................................272
19.1.1 Position and heading ................................................................................. 272
19.1.2 Position and heading deviation .................................................................. 273
19.1.3 View controls ........................................................................................... 276
19.2 Diesels view .........................................................................................................276
19.3 General view.........................................................................................................279
19.3.1 Position, heading and speed....................................................................... 279
19.3.2 Position and heading deviation .................................................................. 280
19.3.3 View controls ........................................................................................... 281
19.4 Joystick view ........................................................................................................281
19.5 LTW view .............................................................................................................285
19.5.1 View controls ........................................................................................... 289
19.6 Numeric view .......................................................................................................291
19.6.1 View controls ........................................................................................... 292
19.7 Performance area ..................................................................................................293
19.8 Posplot view .........................................................................................................298
19.8.1 View controls ........................................................................................... 304
19.8.1.1 Mode page........................................................................................... 304
19.8.1.2 Show page........................................................................................... 305
19.8.1.3 Chart page ........................................................................................... 306
19.8.1.4 Grid page ............................................................................................ 306
19.8.1.5 Range page.......................................................................................... 307
19.8.1.6 Trace page ........................................................................................... 308
19.8.2 EBL function............................................................................................ 309
19.8.3 Panning function....................................................................................... 310
19.9 Power view ...........................................................................................................312
19.9.1 View controls ........................................................................................... 314
19.10 Power Consumption view ....................................................................................316
19.11 Refsys view ..........................................................................................................317
19.11.1 View controls ........................................................................................... 322
19.11.1.1 Mode page........................................................................................... 323
19.11.1.2 Grid page ............................................................................................ 324
19.11.1.3 Range page.......................................................................................... 325
19.12 Refsys Status view................................................................................................325
19.13 Rotation Centers view ..........................................................................................326
19.14 Sensors view.........................................................................................................327
19.14.1 View controls ........................................................................................... 330
19.15 Thruster views ......................................................................................................332
301027/C 11
19.15.1 Thruster main view ................................................................................... 333

19.15.2 Tunnel thruster view ................................................................................. 336
19.15.3 Azimuth thruster view............................................................................... 339
19.15.4 Propeller/rudder view................................................................................ 341
19.15.5 Subview controls ...................................................................................... 343
19.15.6 Setpoint/feedback view ............................................................................. 345
19.15.7 Forces view .............................................................................................. 346
19.16 Trends view ..........................................................................................................349
19.16.1 View controls ........................................................................................... 352
12 301027/C
Operator Manual
Glossary
Abbreviations
ARP Alternative Rotation Point
AP Autopilot (a device for automatic heading control)
BIST Built-In Self Test
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
cPos Kongsberg Compact Dynamic Positioning
CCW Counter Clockwise
CG Centre of Gravity
COG Course Over Ground
CW Clockwise
DGPS Differential GPS
DP Dynamic Positioning
DPC DP Controller
DPM Dynamic Positioning and Position Mooring
DQI Differential Quality Indicator
EBL Electronic Bearing Line
GPS Global Positioning System
HDOP Horizontal Dilution Of Precision
HPR Hydroacoustic Position Reference
IAS Integrated Automation System
I/O Input/Output
IMO International Maritime Organisation
KM Kongsberg Maritime
LTW Light-weight Taut Wire
MOB MOBile transponder
OS Operator Station
OT Operator Terminal
PM Position Mooring
PMS Power Management System
PS Process Station
RIO Remote Input - Output
rms root mean square
ROT Rate Of Turn
ROV Remotely Operated Vehicle
301027/C 13
RPM Revolutions Per Minute

UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
VRS Vertical Reference Sensor
WGS World Geodetic System
WOP Wheel Over Point
WP WayPoint
WT Wing Terminal
14 301027/C
Operator Manual
General terms
Apparent wind See Relative wind.
Bearing The horizontal direction of one terrestrial point from another,
expressed as the angular distance from a reference direction,
clockwise through 360º.
Blackout A method of preventing a power failure due to overloading of the
prevention supply generators.
Cartesian A coordinate system where the axes are mutually-perpendicular
coordinate straight lines.
system
Command A group of functions that reflect the way the system will operate
group for a specific process area, for example, Propulsion and Propulsion
Simulation.
Controller A group of one or more controller process stations.
group
Course The horizontal direction in which a vessel is steered or is intended
to be steered, expressed as angular distance from north, usually
from 000º at north, clockwise through 360º. Strictly, this term
applies to direction through the water, not the direction intended
to be made good over the ground. Differs from Heading.
Crab angle The angle between the vessel heading and the track.
Cross-track The distance from the vessel’s present position to the closest point
error on the track.
Datum Mathematical description of the shape of the earth (represented by
flattening and semi-major axis as well as the origin and orientation
of the coordinate systems used to map the earth).
Dead reckoning The process of determining the position of a vessel at any instant
by applying to the last well-determined position the run that has
since been made, based on the recent history of speed and heading
measurements.
Destination The immediate geographic point of interest to which a vessel
is navigating. It may be the next waypoint along a route of
waypoints or the final destination of a voyage.
Feedback Signals returned from the process (vessel) and used as input
signals to the Vessel Model.
Gyrocompass A compass having one or more gyroscopes as the directive
element, and which is north-seeking. Its operation depends on four
natural phenomena: gyroscopic inertia, gyroscopic precession,
the earth’s rotation and gravity.
Heading The horizontal direction in which a vessel actually points or
heads at any instant, expressed in angular units from a reference
direction, normally true north, usually from 0005 at the reference
direction clockwise through 360º. Differs from Course.
301027/C 15
International Formally called IMCO, the IMO is the specialised agency of the
Maritime United Nations responsible for maritime safety and efficiency
Organisation of navigation.
Kalman filter The Kalman filter is a set of mathematical equations that provides
an efficient computational (recursive) solution of the least-squares
method. The filter is very powerful in several aspects; it supports
estimations of past, present and even future states, and it can also
do so, even when the precise nature of the modelled system is
unknown.
Leg The straight line between two waypoints.
Log An instrument for measuring the speed or distance or both
travelled by a vessel.
Median value A number dividing the higher half of a sample or population from
the lower half, i.e. the middle number.
Navigation leg The leg of a voyage on which the vessel is currently travelling.
Process Station One Central Processing Unit (CPU) plus I/O interfaces, possibly
shared with other CPUs in redundant configurations. A physical
PS may be single, part of a dual-redundant-physical PS or part
of a triple-redundant-physical PS. The PS utilises RCU, SBC or
PC hardware.
Reference origin The reference point of the first position-reference system that is
selected and accepted for use with the system. The origin in the
internal coordinate system.
Relative bearing The bearing of an object relative to the vessel’s heading.
Relative wind The speed and relative direction from which the wind appears to
blow with reference to the moving vessel.
Route A planned course of travel, usually composed of more than one
navigation leg.
Standard The square root of the Variance.
Deviation
Surge Vessel movement in the fore-and-aft direction.
Sway Vessel movement in the transverse direction.
Thruster In this document, this is used as a general term for any element of
the vessel’s propulsion system, such as an azimuth thruster, tunnel
thruster, main propulsion or rudder.
Track The intended or desired horizontal direction of travel with respect
to the earth.
Transponder In this document, this is the physical reference of a
position-reference system. For example: for an HPR system this
means any deployed transponder; for an Artemis system, the
Fixed Antenna unit/beacon; for a Taut Wire system, the depressor
weight.
True bearing Bearing relative to true north.
16 301027/C
Operator Manual
Unavailable Describes a status indication or entry field that is shown but

appears dimmed. An unavailable entry field cannot be changed.
Variance A measure of the expected deviation from the mean. The square
root of the variance is the standard deviation.
Vessel Reference A mathematical model of the vessel which makes it possible to
Model simulate vessel movements and behaviour in the horizontal plane
(surge, sway and yaw).
Waypoint A defined position or reference point on a track.
Wheel-over The point where a vessel is commanded to change heading before
point a waypoint.
Yaw Vessel rotation about the vertical axis (change of heading).
301027/C 17
18 301027/C
K-Pos DP system theory
1 K-POS DP SYSTEM THEORY

This chapter contains the following sections:
1.1 The K-Pos DP system ................................................19
1.2 Basic forces and motions ...........................................19
1.3 K-Pos DP system principles.......................................21
1.1 The K-Pos DP system

Kongsberg K-Pos DP system is a computerised DP control
system for automatic position and heading control of a vessel.
To control the vessel’s heading, the K-Pos DP system uses
data from one or more gyrocompasses, while at least one
position-reference system (for example, DGPS or hydroacoustics)
enables the K-Pos DP system to position the vessel.
Setpoints for heading and position are specified by the operator
and are then processed by the K-Pos DP system to provide
thrust control signals to the vessel’s thruster and main propeller
systems. The K-Pos DP system always allocates optimum thrust
to whichever propulsion units are in use.
Deviations from the desired heading or position are automatically
detected and appropriate adjustments are made by the system.
The K-Pos DP system also provides a manual joystick control
which may be used for manual control alone or for combined
manual/auto control.
Without a position-reference system, the K-Pos DP system can
provide automatic stabilization and control of the vessel heading
using the gyrocompass as the heading reference.
The K-Pos DP system includes control strategies that will reduce
fuel consumption and greenhouse gases.
1.2 Basic forces and motions

A seagoing vessel is subjected to forces from wind, waves and
current, as well as from forces and moments generated by the
vessel’s propulsion system.
The term “forces” in the following sections includes both
forces and yawing moments, unless otherwise stated. The
vessel’s responses to these forces, i.e. its changes in position,
heading and speed, are measured by position-reference systems,
gyrocompasses and vertical reference sensors. Reference
systems readings are corrected for roll and pitch using readings
from the vertical reference sensors. Wind speed and direction are
measured by the wind sensors.
301027/C 19
The K-Pos DP control system calculates the forces that the

thrusters must produce in order to control the vessel’s motion
in three degrees of freedom - surge, sway and yaw - in the
horizontal plane.
Figure 1 Forces and motions
The vessel also moves in three vertical degrees of freedom:

pitch, roll and heave.
Figure 2 Pitch, roll and heave
Pitch Roll Heave

(CD3292) (+ = bow up) (+ = starboard down) (+ = down)
The pitch and roll motions are not controlled by the K-Pos DP
system. However, in order to allow the position-reference system
to correct for these motions, the system must have information
about them. This information is received from vertical reference
sensors.
The K-Pos DP system does not control or require information
about the heave motion, but the motion can be measured and
displayed.
20 301027/C
1.3 K-Pos DP system principles

A simplified block diagram of the K-Pos DP system is shown in
Figure 3, and described in the sections that follow.
Figure 3 K-Pos DP system block diagram
The K-Pos DP system relies on a mathematical vessel model

which includes hydrodynamic characteristics such as current
drag coefficients and virtual mass data. This model, called the
Mathematical Vessel Model, describes how the vessel responds
to an applied force, e.g. from wind or thrusters.
1.3.1 The Extended Kalman Filter

The Extended Kalman Filter estimates the vessel’s heading,
position and velocity in each of the three degrees of freedom
- surge, sway and yaw. It also incorporates algorithms for
estimating the effect of sea current and waves.
301027/C 21
The Extended Kalman Filter uses a mathematical model of the

vessel. A mathematical model itself is never a 100% accurate
representation of the real vessel. However, by using the Extended
Kalman filtering technique, the model is continuously corrected.
The vessel’s heading and position are measured using the
gyrocompasses and position-reference systems, and are used as
input data to the K-Pos DP system. These measurements are
compared with the predicted or estimated data produced by the
mathematical model, and the differences are then used to update
the model.
Figure 4 Simplified block diagram showing the extended

Kalman Filter
The Extended Kalman Filter provides the following advantages:

• Optimum self-adaptive noise filtering of heading and position
measurements according to noise level and measurement-
update rate.
• Optimum combination of data from the different
position-reference systems. The system calculates a variance
for each position-reference system in use, and places different
weighting on their measurements according to each system’s
individual quality.
22 301027/C
• In the absence of position measurements, the model provides

a “dead-reckoning” mode. This means that the system is
able to perform positioning for some time without position
measurement updates from any position-reference systems.
In the Extended Kalman Filter, the Mathematical Vessel Model’s
reliability and the noise level of the position measurement are the
basis for deciding how much to trust each measurement. As time
elapses the model uncertainty will decrease by learning from
measured vessel response.
The process is adaptive. If, for example, only one
position-reference system is active and it has a low update rate,
the model uncertainty will increase in the periods between
measurements, and the vessel model will therefore be heavily
updated with each measurement.
Offshore trials have verified that the K-Pos DP system principles
give:
• Improved suppression of noise in position measurement with
a better station-keeping performance.
• Reduced power consumption and wear and tear on the
thrusters due to the improved suppression.
• A robust handling of combined high and low update rate
position sensors, such as DGPS and traditional Long
Base-Line hydroacoustic positioning.
An Extended Kalman Filter is also used for the heading
information based on measurement from the actual gyrocompass
in use.
Additional advantages can be obtained by use of:
• Speed measurements
Speed measurements can be used as an addition to position
measurements to improve the vessel speed control, and to
make calibration of position measurements faster when sailing
at high speed.
A combination of speed measurement and a position-reference
system will be better able to handle drop out of position
measurements during sailing.
The speed measurement interface can be DGPS or Doppler
Log.
• ROT measurements
ROT (Rate Of Turn) measurements from ROT sensors can
be used to improve the heading control of the vessel. This is
useful when very accurate heading control is required during
high-speed sailing, or when the vessel has a hull shape that
makes it difficult to control the heading.
301027/C 23
1.3.3 The Controller

The controller calculates the resulting force to be produced by the
thrusters/propellers in order for the vessel to remain on station.
In station-keeping operations, the K-Pos DP Controller can
be working in several of the following modes, all with special
characteristics:
• High Precision control
• Relaxed control
• Green control
High Precision control provides high accuracy station-keeping
in any weather condition at the expense of power consumption
and exposure to wear and tear of machinery and thrusters.
Relaxed control uses the thrusters more smoothly, at the expense
of station-keeping accuracy. However, this type of control cannot
guarantee that the vessel will stay within its operational area, and
is only applicable for calm weather conditions.
Green control uses a different control technology called
non-linear Model Predictive Control, which is optimised for
precise area keeping with minimum power consumption. Green
control is applicable in all weather conditions.
The transition between K-Pos DP controller modes is bumpless.
1.3.3.2 High Precision and Relaxed Control

The controller consists of the following parts:
24 301027/C
• Excursion Feedback
The deviation between the operator-specified position/heading
setpoints and the actual position/heading data, and similar
deviations with respect to the vessel’s velocity/heading rate,
drive the excursion feedback. The differences are multiplied
by gain factors giving a force setpoint (restoring setpoint and
damping setpoint) required to bring the vessel back to its
setpoint values while also slowing down its movements.
The main difference between High Precision control and
Relaxed control is the restoring characteristics of the two
controller types as indicated in Figure 5.
Figure 5 High precision and Relaxed control
Thrust
High precision
Relaxed
(CD3320) Position deviation

• Wind Feed-Forward
In order to counteract the wind forces as quickly as possible,
the feed-forward concept is used. This means that the K-Pos
DP system will not allow the vessel to drift away from the
required position, but counteracts the wind-induced forces
as soon as they are detected.
• Current Feedback
The excursion feedback and wind feed-forward are not
sufficient to bring the vessel back to the desired setpoints due
to unmeasured external forces (such as waves and current).
The system estimates these forces over time, and calculates
the force setpoint required to counteract them.
1.3.3.3 Green control

In the Green control mode, the system maintains the vessel
within an allowed area with minimum use of power.
The controller design consists of two main parts, each giving
its contribution to the control:
301027/C 25
• The Environment Compensator is designed to compensate for

the averaged environmental forces, which will maintain the
required position under averaged conditions.
• The Model Predictive Controller (MPC) uses a prediction
(Position Predictor) of the vessel movement as input for the
control. When the operational boundaries are predicted to be
exceeded, the controller reacts to ensure that the vessel stays
within the operational area (see Figure 6).
Figure 6 Vessel under Green control in the operational area
The very smooth control actions reduce wear and tear on

mechanical parts of the power and thruster system and reduce
fuel consumption and greenhouse gases.
A simplified block diagram of the MPC Green control is shown
in Figure 7.
Due to its nature, the MPC will not instantaneously react to
sudden changes in external forces, such as wind gusts, unless the
Position Predictor detects that actions must be taken immediately.
Unnecessary sudden use of thrust is therefore avoided.
The Position Predictor includes the mathematical model of
the vessel used in the Extended Kalman Filter of the DP. The
position and heading of the vessel are predicted over a period
of 1 to 2 minutes.
The non-linear Model Predictive Controller is an online
optimisation function, finding the best compromise between
using thrust and predicted crossing of operational boundaries.
26 301027/C
Figure 7 Green control structure
1.3.5 Thruster allocation

The K-Pos DP system’s controller continuously calculates the
actual force requirements in the alongships and athwartships
directions (the force setpoint), and the required rotational
moment (the turning moment setpoint).
The Thruster Allocation distributes these setpoints as
pitch/rpm/force/load and azimuth control signals to each
thruster/propeller, thus obtaining the force and moment required
for the position and heading control.
The setpoint is distributed in such a way as to obtain the
force and turning moment required for position and heading
control, while also ensuring optimum thruster/propeller use with
minimum power consumption and minimum wear and tear on the
propulsion equipment.
301027/C 27
If it is not possible to maintain both the turning moment and

the force setpoint due to insufficient available thrust, priority is
normally set to obtain the turning moment setpoint (heading).
If a thruster/propeller is out of service or deselected, the
“lost” thrust is automatically redistributed to the remaining
thrusters/propellers.
The magnitude of thrust allocated is reduced if the available
power is too low to meet the thrust demand. The allocated thrust
will however still be correct with respect to the direction of thrust.
Heading (or position) priority is also kept in such a situation.
Power optimal thruster allocation is the primary barrier for
preventing blackouts and requires the same information as that
required for Power Load Monitoring and Blackout Prevention
(see Power load monitoring and blackout prevention on
page 221).
28 301027/C
User interface
2 USER INTERFACE
2.1 Operator station..........................................................29
2.2 Operator panel............................................................30
2.3 Display layout ............................................................35
2.4 Display views.............................................................46
2.5 Main menus................................................................51
2.1 Operator station

The K-Pos DP operator station includes a high-resolution colour
flat screen for monitoring and operation of the system, and an
operator panel with push buttons, lamps and joystick controls.
Figure 8 The K-Pos DP operator station
301027/C 29
The power switch and adjustment controls for the display are
placed on the right hand side of the screen. The use of the power
switch and adjustment controls is described in the Hardware
Module Description for the screen.
2.2 Operator panel

The operator panel provides:
• Dedicated buttons (most of these have status lamps)
• Keypad
• Trackball
• 3-axis joystick
• Heading wheel and buttons
Figure 9 K-Pos DP operator panel
30 301027/C
User interface
2.2.1 Push buttons

Several push buttons with status lamps are provided on the
operator panel for activation of main modes, position-reference
systems, thrusters and functions. The accompanying status lamps
indicate activation of a particular function, mode or system.
Other frequently-used functions, such as selection of display
views and dialog boxes, may also have dedicated push buttons on
the operator panel.
The buttons are grouped according to their main function. For
safety reasons, some of the buttons must be pressed twice within
four seconds to invoke action. These buttons are indicated by a
white line along the lower edge.
Figure 10 Examples of buttons: double press (TAKE button

for taking command) and single press (ACK button for
acknowledging messages)
Note that the appearance of push buttons may vary from vessel
to vessel.
2.2.1.1 Modes
The MODES button group contains buttons for selecting the main
operational modes. Status lamps indicate the current mode.
Three additional buttons allow you to select individual axes
for automatic control. These are referred to as the SURGE,
SWAY and YAW buttons throughout this manual.
Figure 11 shows the button arrangement for an OS where the
operator looks in the alongships direction whilst looking at the
screen.
Figure 11 Surge, sway and yaw buttons on an OS that is

orientated in the alongships direction
Figure 12 shows the button arrangement for an OS where the

operator looks in the athwartships direction whilst looking at
the screen.
301027/C 31
Figure 12 Sway, surge and yaw buttons on an OS that is

orientated in the athwartships direction
2.2.1.2 Controls
The CONTROLS button group contains buttons for accessing
system functions and dialog boxes.
2.2.1.3 Views
The VIEWS button group contains buttons for selecting the view
to be displayed in the main working area of the screen.
2.2.1.4 Thrusters
The THRUSTERS button group contains buttons for enabling
thrusters.
2.2.1.5 Sensors
The SENSORS button group contains buttons for enabling
position-reference systems and for initiating dialog boxes related
to other system sensors.
2.2.1.6 Command
The COMMAND button group contains buttons for transferring
command to one Operator Station or operator terminal from
another.
2.2.1.7 Alarms
The ALARMS button group contains indicators and buttons
to display and acknowledge alarms and events. The
SILENCE button, shown to the left, is used to silence the audible
signal without acknowledging the Emergency or Alarm message
that caused it.
For more information about messages and the ALARMS button

group, see Message system on page 86.
2.2.2 Input
The INPUT keypad provides keys that are used to enter values or
text into dialog boxes.
32 301027/C
User interface
This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode.

Numeric mode is the default. Press the button for one second to
toggle. A short beep will confirm the change. The lamp is lit
green when the panel is in alphanumeric mode (letters) and not
lit when in numeric mode (numbers).
When the panel is in numeric mode and any of the numeric keys
are pressed, the corresponding number is entered.
When the panel is in alphanumeric mode and any of the numeric
keys from 2 through 9 is pressed once, the first letter on that key is
entered. Press the key twice to enter the second letter, three times
to enter the third letter and four times to enter the fourth letter.
In alphanumeric mode this button toggles between non-capital
and capital letters. Non-capital letters is the default. Press the
button for one second to toggle.
Pressing this button deletes one character to the left.
This is the ENTER key. Pressing this key applies the value or text
you have written to the system (i.e. corresponds with clicking
the OK button on a dialog box)
PAGE UP Same functions as on a standard keyboard.

PAGE DOWN
HOME
ESC
2.2.3 Trackball
The TRACKBALL is used to position the cursor on the screen.
The left button is used to click on screen buttons, choose from
menus and select displayed symbols.
The right button is used to display a shortcut menu.
The middle button is not used.
301027/C 33
2.2.4 Joystick
In Joystick mode, the operator controls the positioning of the
vessel using the three-axis joystick (integrated joystick and rotate
controller).
To move the vessel in the surge and sway axes (alongships and
athwartships directions), tilt the joystick. The direction in which
the joystick is tilted determines the direction of applied thruster
force, and the angle of tilt determines the amount of applied
thruster force.
To turn the vessel (the yaw axis), rotate the joystick. The
direction in which the joystick is rotated determines the direction
of the rotational moment demand, and the angle through which
the joystick is rotated determines the amount of applied rotational
moment.
2.2.5 Heading wheel

The Heading Wheel comprises one heading wheel and seven
buttons. Three of these buttons are located in front. The other
four forms a circle close to the heading wheel.
The functions that are available depend on the present mode.

HEADING (DECREASE/ACTIVATE/INCREASE)
To perform a change of heading using the heading wheel, one
of these three associated buttons must be pressed. The heading
setpoint can be changed by turning the heading wheel or by using
the DECREASE or INCREASE buttons.
HEADING WHEEL
This is used for setting a new heading.
RATE OF TURN/TURN RADIUS
For adjusting the Rate Of Turn (ROT) or Turn Radius.
34 301027/C
User interface
DISTANCE TO TURN
For adjusting the Distance To Turn.
2.3 Display layout

The display interface uses standard Microsoft Windows operating
features such as menus and dialog boxes.
The display is divided into a number of predefined areas as

shown in the following figure. In addition to these, dialog boxes
are displayed whenever operator interaction is required.
301027/C 35
2.3.1 Title bar

The title bar identifies the K-Pos DP operator station and shows
the current date and time.
When this operator station has command, the Controller PS
group and Command group field has yellow background colour.
In our example the Controller PS group is Main (to which the
operator station in question is connected) and the Command
group is Propulsion (which the system controls).
When the Trainer is used, the text SIMULATING is displayed
flashing.
2.3.2 Menu bar

The menu bar provides command menus allowing access to the
available dialog boxes.
36 301027/C
User interface
Figure 13 Menu bar (example)
2.3.2.1 Active and unavailable commands

Because some commands are relevant to several modes, these
commands appear on more than one menu. For example, Heading
appears on both the Joystick and AutoPos menu.
Some commands that are present on more than one menu are
only available in the present mode menu. Unavailable commands
have a dimmed appearance.
Figure 14 Commands that are present on more than one menu

(example)
2.3.3 Message line

The message line shows the most recent emergency, alarm
or warning message that has not yet been acknowledged.
Right-clicking the message text opens the System Messages
Help with the relevant message explanation displayed. See
Presentation of messages on page 88.
301027/C 37
2.3.4 Performance area

The performance area shows important performance information
to allow immediate assessment of the situation. The content of
this view change automatically according to the selected main
mode.
Several parts of the performance area are click-sensitive.
When the cursor is moved over an indicator that is defined as
click-sensitive, it changes to a pointing hand. At the same time a
hotspot cursor text in a yellow frame (the tooltip) is displayed for
a few seconds. This text explains the use of the click-sensitive
object.
2.3.5 Working areas

The working areas shows operator-selectable display views.
2.3.6 Status line

The status line displays general help messages and advice for the
operator. For example, when moving the cursor over an open
menu, information about the menu commands is displayed in
the status line.
2.3.7 Status bar

The status bar provides general system status information
by means of indicators, some of which are click-sensitive.
When the cursor is moved over an indicator that is defined as
click-sensitive, it changes to a pointing hand. If you then click
the left trackball button, a dialog box related to that indicator
is opened.
Figure 15 Status bar (example)
2.3.7.1 Overview of labels on the status bar

MainMode
The present operational mode.
PosMode
The automatic position control mode: PRESENT or NEW SETP
(new setpoint).
HdgMode
The automatic heading control mode: PRESENT, SYS SEL
(system selected) or NEW SETP (new setpoint).
38 301027/C
User interface
AllocMode
The present thruster allocation mode, for example VARIABLE
(see Thruster Allocation dialog box on page 204).
RotationCenter
Shows the present Rotation Center (see Rotation center for
automatic control on page 75 or Rotation center for joystick
manoeuvring on page 82).
Thr
An indication of the status of the thrusters:
• Grey — No thrusters are enabled.
• Green — At least one thruster is enabled.
Refs
An indication of the status of the position-reference systems:
• Grey — No position-reference systems are enabled.
• Yellow — At least one position-reference system is enabled,
but there is no acceptable position information.
• Green — At least one position-reference system is enabled
and the position information from at least one of them is
accepted.
Sens
This is one of the click-sensitive areas. If you press the left
trackball button while the cursor has the shape of an open hand,
the Sensors dialog box is opened.
Joystick
Symbols describing the present joystick settings are grouped
above this label.
Joystick Thrust level
Full or Reduced (see Joystick settings on page 79).
Joystick Precision level
High Speed, General or Low Speed (see Joystick settings on
page 79).
AutoPos
Symbols concerning automatic control are grouped above this
label.
Axis Control and Axis Damping Control
These are graphic indications of the axes that are under automatic
control or damping control.
The descriptions of the surge and sway axes apply to a system
with the vessel diagram displayed “bow up” (see Orientation of
the OS and effect on display views on page 46).
The surge axis is under automatic or damping control.
301027/C 39
The sway axis is under automatic or damping control
The yaw axis is under automatic or damping control

The axis control symbol is rotated according to the orientation
of the Operator Station (see Orientation of the OS and effect on
display views on page 46). Note that the mutual angle difference
between the surge and sway axes is preserved.
Gain
Shows the present controller gain level. There are different
symbols for the available combinations of controller mode and
gain level. See Display presentation of Controller Mode on
page 71.
Quick Model
Shows whether the Quick Model Update function is on (yellow)
or off (grey) (see Quick model update on page 73).
DP Consequence Class
Shows the currently selected DP Class for the DP Online
Consequence Analysis function:
• Grey — Off
• 2 — Class 2
• 3 — Class 3
2.3.8 Dialog boxes

You can enter data into the system using dialog boxes. These
are displayed using panel buttons, selecting menu commands or
by clicking on graphical symbols in the views or icons on the
status bar.
Dialog boxes appear in the display area but you can move them
as required.
To locate information about individual dialog boxes, use the
Index at the end of this manual.
40 301027/C
User interface
When data has been modified on a dialog box, the message

(Changed) is added to the title bar text.
Data entered on a dialog box is not used by the system until you
confirm the input by clicking the Apply or OK button:
• If you click the OK button, the changes that you have made
are applied and the dialog box is removed from the display. If
any data errors are found, no changes are made and the dialog
box remains open.
• If you click the Cancel button, no changes are made and the
dialog box is removed from the display.
• If you click the Apply button, the changes that you have made
are applied and the dialog box remains displayed.
When you are not allowed to make changes to the data on a
dialog box, both the OK and Apply buttons will be unavailable
(displayed dimmed). This can occur, for example, when the
Operator Station is not in command or the system is not in an
appropriate mode.
301027/C 41
Some dialog boxes have several pages which you access by

clicking on the page tab. For this type of dialog box, both the
Apply and OK buttons apply the changes that you have made
on all pages of the dialog box.
Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without action. If
a dialog box can be accessed by pressing a panel button, pressing
this panel button while the dialog box is displayed closes the
dialog box without action.
2.3.9 Entering numeric values

Numeric values can be entered into text boxes in dialog boxes,
you can achieve this in several different ways, depending on the
types of numeric input field used and the functionality available
on the Operator Station.
There are two types of input fields used for entering numeric
values:
Text box
This is a rectangular box in which you can type a numerical value.
If the box already contains a numerical value, you can select that
default value to be used or delete it and type in a new value.
Spin box
This is a text box equipped with two additional up and down
arrows (on the right-hand side) that can be clicked to decrease or
increase the numerical value by a fixed increment. A numerical
value can also be typed directly in the box.
On an operator panel equipped with a numeric keypad, this

keypad represents the easiest way to enter numeric values.
However, the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box may be
used. This will be displayed on the screen when enabled, and is
especially suited to Operator Stations having:
• No numeric keypad on the operator panel
• Touch sensitive screens
2.3.9.1 Enabling the Enter a New Numeric Value

dialog box
The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box must be enabled
before use.
To enable the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box:
1 Select View→Num Entry Dlg.
42 301027/C
User interface
• The Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog Use dialog box is

displayed.
2 Select the Enable Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog check box

and click the OK button.
• The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box is enabled.
To test the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box:
1 In the Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog Use dialog box, ensure
that Enable Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog is selected.
2 Place the cursor in the Enter a numeric value text box and
click the left trackball button or, if you have a touch-sensitive
screen, tap the text box using your index finger.
• The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box is displayed.
301027/C 43
3 Enter a new numeric value in the Enter a numeric value: text

box using the numeric keys on the Enter a New Numeric
Value dialog box and then click the OK button (on the Enter
a New Numeric Value dialog box).
4 Click the OK button on the Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog
Use dialog box.
• The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box is tested and
ready for use.
2.3.9.2 Using the Enter a New Numeric Value

dialog box
To use the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box:
1 Having opened a dialog box containing text boxes for
numeric entry, place the cursor in a text box and click the
left trackball button.
• The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box is displayed
adjacent to the text box.
2 Use the keys on this dialog box to enter a new numeric

value in the text box.
3 Click the OK button on the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog
box to use the new numeric value in the relevant text box.
Note
This new numeric value will first be applied to the system when
you click the OK or Apply button on the dialog box where the
relevant text box is located.
44 301027/C
User interface
2.3.9.3 Overview of the keys in the Enter a New

Numeric Value dialog box
Deletes the digit to the left of the cursor.
Deletes the digit to the right of the cursor.
Deletes the entire number.
Moves the cursor to the far left on the text box.
Moves the cursor one digit to the left.
Moves the cursor to the far right on the text box.
Moves the cursor one digit to the right.
The numeric keys 0 to 9, decimal point key and sign key.
2.3.10 Input validation of entered values

When you enter a numerical value, it is validated by the system.
The value must be within the selected display format limits for
this data type (for example, a heading value must be between 0
and 360 degrees). If you enter an illegal value, and then click the
OK or Apply button, an Illegal value dialog box is displayed.
Click the OK button on this dialog box. The illegal value will
remain highlighted in the text box until it is corrected.
If the dialog box has more than one page, and you enter an illegal
value on one of the pages, the validation will be performed when
you click the OK or Apply button, even though another page is
displayed. The dialog box is automatically displayed with the
page containing the illegal value on top.
301027/C 45
If more than one validation error occurs, all errors are listed in
one message box. In the dialog box, however, only the first error
will be highlighted.
2.4 Display views

Display views presents the operator with information about the
operation.
2.4.1 Orientation of the OS and effect on

display views
Several of the display views show information relative to a
diagram of the vessel; for example, thrusters are shown on the
Thrusters view in their relative positions on the vessel diagram.
The orientation of the vessel diagram is configured to suit the
orientation of the Operator Station, so that it is easier to interpret
what is seen on the screen. There are four possible orientations
which are generally used in the following situations:
• The operator is facing forward in the vessel when looking
at the display screen. The vessel diagram is displayed “bow
up” on the display.
• The operator is facing to starboard in the vessel when looking
at the display screen. The vessel diagram is displayed “bow
left” on the display.
• The operator is facing aft in the vessel when looking at the
display screen. The vessel diagram is displayed “bow down”
on the display.
• The operator is facing to port in the vessel when looking at the
display screen. The vessel diagram is displayed “bow right”
on the display.
In this manual, the example display views show the vessel
diagram “bow up”. For other orientations, the displayed
information in each view is the same, but it may be arranged
differently.
2.4.2 Tooltip/hotspot cursor and change

of cursor image
In many of the display views, the ordinary cursor changes to
a pointing hand (the hotspot cursor) when it is moved over
an area defined as click-sensitive. Typical examples of such
click-sensitive areas are:
• Push buttons for zooming in and out.
• Numerical fields showing other related numerical values when
clicked.
• Graphical fields showing a specific dialog box when clicked.
46 301027/C
User interface
• Change of position setpoint.

• Opening another view related to the specific component you
click.
• Opening the control dialog box for a specific plot, etc.
At the same time as the cursor image changes when it is moved
over a click-sensitive object, a hotspot cursor text in a yellow
frame (the tooltip) is displayed for a few seconds. This text
explains the use of the click-sensitive object. The tooltip and
hotspot cursor are on by default, but can be toggled on/off by
using the Show ToolTip and the Use HotSpot Cursors commands
on the View menu.
2.4.3 Available views

You will find information about the standard display views in the
following sections (in alphabetic order):
• Deviation view on page 272
Shows a combination of graphical and numerical performance
data, particularly related to position and heading deviation.
• Diesels view on page 276
Provides a simplified mimic display of the vessel’s diesel
engines and fuel-rack system as seen from the K-Pos DP
system.
• General view on page 279
Shows a combination of graphical and numerical performance
data.
• Joystick view on page 281
Shows the thrust setpoint and response during Joystick mode.
• LTW view on page 285
Shows the performance of a Light-Weight Taut Wire (LTW)
position-reference system.
• Numeric view on page 291
Shows performance data in numerical form.
• Performance area on page 293
Shows important performance information to allow immediate
assessment of the situation.
• Posplot view on page 298
Shows the vessel’s position and heading.
• Power view on page 312
Shows a mimic display of the vessel’s electrical power system.
301027/C 47
• Power Consumption view on page 316

Shows available power for each main bus in numerical form,
and also consumed power for each main bus both in numerical
and graphical form.
• Refsys view on page 317
Shows the individual and consequent performance of the
active position-reference systems.
• Refsys Status view on page 325
Shows the status for each position-reference system or
transponder.
• Rotation Centers view on page 326
Shows the position of all the rotation centers available when
the vessel is under automatic control.
• Sensors view on page 327
Shows the performance and state of some subset of the vessel’s
sensors, such as gyrocompasses, wind sensors and VRS.
• Thruster views on page 332
A main view and sub views for each thruster show how the
system is using the available thrusters to provide the required
thrust setpoint. The Setp/feedb view shows setpoint and
feedback data for all the thrusters.
• Trends view on page 349
Shows dynamic displays (trend plots) and numerical values
for trended curves of the history over a specified period of
selected information.
2.4.4 Selecting a display view

You can select a view to be displayed in three ways:
1 To select a view to be displayed in the right part of
the working area, press the appropriate button in the
VIEWS button group on the operator panel (The standard
configuration is that display views appear in the right part
of the working area. The system on your vessel may be
configured in such a way that views appear to the left).
2 To select a view to be displayed in the any part (left or right)
of the working area, place the cursor in the required area and
click the right trackball button.
48 301027/C
User interface
• A shortcut menu is displayed listing the views that are

available.
The small arrow to the right of a menu entry indicates that a

submenu of related views is available.
• The Analysis sub menu contains the Capability and
Motion Prediction views.
• The Utility sub menu contains the Trends and Rotation
Centers views.
• The Performance sub menu contains the General,
Numeric and Deviation views.
3 Select the required view from the shortcut menu.
To display a preselected set of views in the performance, working
and monitoring areas, press the appropriate function key on the
keypad (see Preselecting views on page 50).
2.4.5 View control dialog boxes

Many of the views have control dialog boxes for selecting the
displayed information and controlling features of the view. These
dialog boxes are accessed via the shortcut menu for the view.
To display the control dialog box for a view:
1 Place the cursor anywhere in the view and click the right
trackball button.
• The shortcut menu is displayed.
2 Select View Control on this shortcut menu.
• The control dialog box for the view is displayed.
301027/C 49
• If the view does not have an associated control dialog

box, then View Control is not available on the shortcut
menu.
2.4.6 Zooming
To zoom a view that is displayed in the working or monitoring
areas, click Zoom In on the shortcut menu. The view is enlarged
by approximately 60%, centered on the cursor position when the
shortcut menu was displayed.
A zoomed view can be panned or zoomed again. Place the cursor
in the required area and click the right trackball button. The
following shortcut menu is displayed:
Clicking Zoom Reset returns the view to its original scale.

Clicking Zoom In zooms the view again, centred on the cursor
position when this menu was displayed.
Clicking Center Here pans the view so that it is centred on the
cursor position when this menu was displayed.
If available, clicking View Control displays the control dialog
box for the view.
2.4.7 Preselecting views

You can preselect sets of views to be displayed in the two parts
of the working area and link them to numbers on the View→Use
Preselected menu. When you then click one of these numbers, the
preselected set of views is displayed.
50 301027/C
User interface
The Preselect dialog box allows you to inspect recorded

view-selections and record new view-selections.
To display this dialog box, select View→Preselect.
Inspect recorded view-selections:

You can inspect the set of display views currently linked to a
number on the menu by clicking the associated button. The
display view titles are then shown in the layout on the dialog box.
To display the set on the screen, click the Set Display Area button.
Record NEW view-selection:
While the Preselect dialog box is displayed, select the required
views in the display areas, and the required level of zooming for
each view, and then click the appropriate numbered button on the
dialog box. When you click the Close button, these views are
linked to the selected function key.
These numbered buttons can also be preconfigured to be
either operator programmable or not. All numbered buttons
which are not operator programmable appear dimmed on the
Preselect dialog box. The views displayed when a corresponding
number on the View→Use Preselected menu is clicked, are all
preconfigured.
2.5 Main menus

The menus of the K-Pos DP system are described in the sections
that follow.
301027/C 51
The content of the menus is configurable, and may vary from

vessel to vessel. For details on each menu/dialog box, see page
references given.
2.5.1 Menu bar

Figure 16 displays an example menu bar. To view the commands
available on a menu, click the menu.
Figure 16 Menu bar (example)
2.5.2 System menu

To display the System menu, click System on the menu bar.
Trainer... See Built-in trainer on
page 266
CyberSea... See Interface to
CyberSea on page 231
Backup Control... See K-Pos Backup
System Operator Manual
Connect... See Connecting to a
controller PS group on
page 116
Equipment... See Equipment on
page 237
Redundant Stations... See Redundant
systems on page 118
Set Date/Time... See System date and
time on page 63
Set Timezone... See System date and
time on page 63
Event Printer... See Messages on the
printer on page 96
Print Status... See Printing system
status data on page 226
Screen Capture Printer... See Printing the display
picture on page 58
52 301027/C
User interface
Remote Diagnostics... See Remote

diagnostics on page 224
Reset Controller PS... See Resetting controller
process stations on
page 117
Stop/Restart... See System
start-up/shut-down
and OS stop/restart on
page 104
Change User... See Changing user on
page 57
OS Configuration Mode, PS Configuration Mode, OS Configuration

and OS Test/Status are not part of the normal operating procedures
for the K-Pos DP system and are therefore not described in
this operator manual. They are implemented to facilitate
installation and service work performed by trained personnel
from Kongsberg Maritime.
Note
The Set Date/Time function is only available to the “Chief” user.
See Changing user on page 57.
2.5.3 View menu

To display the View, click View on the menu bar.
Set Palette See Set palette (display
colours) on page 64
Panel See Panel Light
Configuration dialog
box on page 58
Show ToolTip See Display views on
page 46
Use HotSpot Cursors See Display views on
page 46
Num Entry Dlg... See Entering numeric
values on page 42
Preselect... See Preselecting
views on page 50
Use Preselected See Preselecting
views on page 50
Display Units... See Display Units dialog
box on page 60
Position Presentation... See Position
Presentation dialog
box on page 146
Reset Display Units... See Resetting the display
units on page 63
301027/C 53
2.5.4 Sensors menu

To display the Sensors menu, click Sensors on the menu bar.
Gyro... See Gyrocompasses on
page 126
Gyro Deviation... See Gyro Deviation
dialog box on page 127
Wind... See Wind sensors on
page 131
VRS... See Vertical reference
sensors (VRS) on
page 136
Speed... See Speed sensors on
page 138
Draught... See Draught sensors on
page 141
Rate Of Turn... See Rate Of Turn
sensors on page 143
Alarm Limits... See Alarm Limits dialog
box on page 65
Reference System Settings... See Reference System
Settings dialog box on
page 153
Reference System... See Reference System
Reference System See Reference System
Properties... Properties dialog box on
page 161
The system installed has either the Reference System
Settings dialog box or the Reference System dialog
box, depending on configuration.
2.5.5 Thruster menu

To display the Thruster menu, click Thruster on the menu bar.
Enable... See Enabling
thrusters on page 201
Automatic Start... See Automatic
thruster start (for IAS
deliveries) on page 203
Allocation Mode See Thruster Allocation
Allocation Settings See Allocation Settings
Biasing... See Thruster biasing on
page 209
Run-in... See Thruster Run-in
54 301027/C
User interface
2.5.6 Joystick menu

To display the Joystick menu, click Joystick on the menu bar.
Settings... See Joystick settings on
page 79
Rotation Center... See Rotation center for
joystick manoeuvring on
page 82
Heading... See Heading dialog
box on page 197
Rate Of Turn... See Rate Of Turn page on
page 199
Acceleration... See
Acceleration/Retardation
page 192
Calibrate... See Calibrating the
joystick on page 78
Gain... See Controller mode and
gain level selection on
page 68
box on page 65
Note
The Calibrate function is only available to the “Chief” user. See
Changing user on page 57.
2.5.7 AutoPos menu

To display the AutoPos menu, click AutoPos on the menu bar.
Position... See Changing the
position setpoint on
page 185
Position Inc... See Position Inc dialog
box (incremental) on
page 186
Position R/B... See Position R/B dialog
box (range/bearing) on
page 186
Speed... See Speed Setpoint
Acceleration... See
Acceleration/Retardation
page 192
301027/C 55
Heading... See Changing the

heading setpoint on
page 195
Rate Of Turn... See Rate Of Turn page on
page 199
Gain... See Controller mode and
gain level selection on
page 68
box on page 65
Quick Model... See Quick model
update on page 73
DP Class... See Selecting the DP
class on page 270
Rotation Center... See Rotation center for
automatic control on
page 75
DPCap Settings... See DP Capability
and Motion Prediction
Analysis Operator
Manual
2.5.8 Help menu

To display the Help menu, click Help on the menu bar.
Messages... See Message system on
page 86
About... See Displaying software
information on page 229
56 301027/C
System settings
3 SYSTEM SETTINGS
3.1 Changing user ............................................................57
3.2 Printing the display picture ........................................58
3.3 Panel Light Configuration dialog box........................58
3.4 Display Units dialog box ...........................................60
3.5 System date and time .................................................63
3.6 Set palette (display colours).......................................64
3.7 Alarm Limits dialog box ............................................65
3.8 Controller mode and gain level selection...................68
3.9 Quick model update ...................................................73
3.10 Rotation center for automatic control ........................75
3.1 Changing user

There are three types of user defined for the K-Pos DP system:
• Operator
When the K-Pos DP system is started, the user is set to
Operator. This is the normal user of the K-Pos DP system.
• Chief
The “Chief” can operate the system in the same way as
the “Operator”, but in addition can perform the following
functions:
– Set the system date and time (see System date and time on
page 63)
– Calibrate the joystick (see Calibrating the joystick on
page 78)
• System
This user is reserved for installation and service work
performed by trained personnel from Kongsberg Maritime.
The Change User dialog box allows you to change the user.
To display this dialog box, select System→Change User.
Select the required user in the New user list box and click the
Change user button.
301027/C 57
The “Chief” user is also required to enter a correct Password

(supplied by Kongsberg Maritime).
3.2 Printing the display picture

To print a hard copy of the current display picture, press the
HARDCOPY button. The whole screen picture is printed on a
general-purpose printer connected to an Operator Station.
The standard Microsoft Windows Print Setup dialog box is used
to define which printer is to be used.
To display this dialog box, select System→Screen Capture Printer.
You can use this dialog box to select the printer and to define
the printer set-up.
3.3 Panel Light Configuration dialog box
3.3.1 Dimming level

You can set the required light intensity for the indicator (status)
lamps on the operator panel, and for the background lamps in
the buttons themselves.
To change the dimming level:
1 Select View→Panel→Light Configuration.
58 301027/C
System settings
• The Panel Light Configuration box is displayed.
2 From the list boxes, select the required light intensity for the
indicator lamps and the background lamps for the available
Palettes. Available light intensities are Bright, Normal,
Dimmed, Very Dimmed and Off.
3 Click the OK button.
The * symbol shows which display palette is currently in use.
You can perform a lamp test by clicking the Lamp Test button.
3.3.2 Lamp test

You can test the panel status lamps, alarm lamps and the audible
signal at any time.
To perform the lamp test:
1 Select View→Panel→Lamp Test, or click the Lamp Test
button on the Panel Lamp Configuration dialog box.
• The Panel Lamp Test dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Start Lamp Test button.

• The message The Lamp Test has started is displayed (on
the dialog box).
• All the panel button status lamps should be lit.
• All the lamps in the ALARMS button group should be lit.
• The audible signal should sound.
301027/C 59
• The text on the Start Lamp Test button changes to End

Lamp Test.
3 Press SILENCE to stop the audible signal sounding.
4 Press, in turn, each button that has a status lamp.
• Each status lamp should extinguish when its associated
button is pressed.
5 To stop the test, click the End Lamp Test button.
6 Click the Close button to remove the Panel Lamp Test dialog
box.
3.4 Display Units dialog box

You can specify the display units to be used for the display and
entry of values. You can also select which set of display units
to use.
Procedures for setting the display format and the required datum
for position information are described in Position Presentation
dialog box on page 146.
3.4.1 Selecting the set of display units to

use
To specify the display units to be used:
1 Select View→Display Units.
• The Display Units dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the required set of display units. You can choose

between Metric Units, Imperial Units or, depending on
configuration, one or more User Definable sets.
3 Click the OK button (or the Apply button if you have
selected a User Definable set, and want to edit some of the
values in this display unit set).
You can now proceed to select the required types of display units
you want to edit.
60 301027/C
System settings
Note
Only User Definable display units sets can be edited.
3.4.2 Editing Display Units

To edit display units:
1 Click the Details button on the Display Units dialog box.
• The extended version of the Display Units dialog box is
displayed.
2 Using the scroll bar to the right, find the display units type
you want to edit and select it. It is possible to sort the unit
list alphabetically by clicking the column heading. Click
once for ascending order, twice for descending order and
three times to have the default order (no alphabetical sorting)
displayed.
3 Click in the Display Format column for the selected display
units type.
• A list box containing all the display formats for this value
is displayed.
• The presently selected display format is indicated with
white text on blue background.
4 Select the wanted display format from the options shown

in the list box by clicking it.
• The list box is closed.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 if you want to edit the display format for
several types of display units.
301027/C 61

• The display formats are applied.
3.4.3 Additional information

Whether the Display Units dialog box is shown as a compact
version or as an extended version, depends on the version in
which it was shown the last time the dialog box was closed (i.e. it
always opens in the same version as it was in when last closed).
The extended version of the Display Units dialog box is resizable.
To adjust the height, place the cursor directly on top of the upper
(or lower) edge of the dialog box. The cursor then changes
appearance to a two-headed arrow symbol. You can now drag the
edge of the dialog box (downwards or upwards) until it displays
the desired number of display units types in the set.
Similarly you can resize the width of the dialog box. In addition
you can adjust the width of the Type, Display Format and Unit
columns by placing the cursor on top of one of the column
delimiters. The cursor then changes appearance to a two-headed
arrow symbol. You can now drag to change the width of the
columns.
3.4.4 Vessel and sea current speed

For vessel and sea current speed there are two display formats for
knots, either knots (1 decimal point accuracy) or knots (accurate)
(2 decimal points accuracy).
There are also two display formats for meter/second:
• For vessel speed, either meter/sec (2 decimal points accuracy)
or meter/sec (accurate) (3 decimal points accuracy).
• For sea current speed, either meter/sec (1 decimal point
accuracy) or meter/sec (accurate) (2 decimal points accuracy).
62 301027/C
System settings
3.4.5 Wind, waves and sea current

direction
For wind, waves and sea current, it is possible to specify whether
the displayed directions are to be interpreted as “comes from”
or “goes to”.
When Goes To is selected, the displayed directions in dialog
boxes and views are shown with “s.” in front of the unit. The
“s” means “setting” (goes to).
On display views such as the Posplot view, the arrows indicating
wind and current directions point towards the plot when Comes
From is selected, and outwards when Goes To is selected.
3.4.6 Resetting the display units

To reset the display units settings to the factory (original) settings:
1 Select View→Reset Display Units.
• The Reset Display Units dialog box, that tells you what the
display units set will be reset to, is displayed.
2 Click the Yes button if you want to reset all the display units
settings to factory (original) settings, otherwise click the
No button.
3.5 System date and time

You can change the date and time of the system clock, and
the time zone. The time that you set at any Operator Station
is applied to all the available Operator Stations and controller
process stations.
3.5.1 Date and time

Note
Setting the system date and time can only be performed by the
“Chief” user. See Changing user on page 57.
The Set System Date/Time dialog box allows you to change the
date and time of the system clock.
To display this dialog box, select System→Set Date/Time.
301027/C 63
Use this dialog box to set the correct date and time. You can
either enter the time and date values directly into the text boxes
or you can use the up/down arrow to select time and date values.
3.5.2 Time zone

The Set Timezone dialog box allow you to change the time zone
and enable daylight saving changes.
To display this dialog box, select System→Set Timezone.
Use this dialog box to set the required time zone from the
selection in the drop-down list box. Select the check box if
you want the system to automatically adjust the clock for
daylight-saving changes.
3.6 Set palette (display colours)

Four sets of display colours (palettes) are available for day or
night use. The palette selection from the Operator Station in
command can be applied at all Operator Stations in the system,
or the palette selection can be set individually at each Operator
Station.
3.6.1 Changing the display palette on

Operator Stations that are not set to have
an independent palette selection
You can change the display palette simultaneously at Operator
Stations that are not set to have an independent palette selection.
Perform the following procedure at the Operator Station that is
in command:
64 301027/C
System settings
1 Ensure that independent palette selection is not selected at

the Operator Station that is in command:
a Select View→Set Palette.
• A sub menu is displayed.
b If Independent is selected on this sub menu, click
Independent to deselect it.
2 Select View→Set Palette and choose the required palette;
Bright Day, Day, Dusk Day or Night.
• The palette selection is applied to the Operator Stations
that are not set to have an independent palette selection.
3.6.2 Changing the display palette on a

single Operator Station
You can change the display palette at a single Operator Station.
Perform the following procedure at the Operator Station that is to
have an independent display palette:
1 Ensure that independent palette selection is selected at the
Operator Station.
a Select View→Set Palette.
• A sub menu is displayed.
b If Independent is not selected on this sub menu, click
Independent to select it.
2 Select View→Set Palette, and choose the required palette;
Bright Day, Day, Dusk Day or Night.
• The palette selection is applied to the Operator Station.
3.7 Alarm Limits dialog box

In the Alarm Limits dialog box, alarm and warning limits can be
set for position deviation, heading deviation and roll, pitch and
heave motion.
The Alarm Limits dialog box can be selected from the Sensors,
Joystick and AutoPos menus. The alarm limits entered will apply
independent of the present mode and from which menu the dialog
box has been selected.
3.7.1 Position page

The Position page allows you to set alarm and warning limits for
position and heading deviation.
Depending on the selected main mode, use one of the following
methods to display this page:
• Select Joystick→Alarm Limits.
• Select AutoPos→Alarm Limits.
301027/C 65
To change the limits, either enter new values directly in the

text boxes, or use the up and down arrow buttons to increase
or decrease the current values.
To activate the limits, select the Position (Heading) - Active
check box. You can activate either the alarm limit only, or
both the warning and alarm limits. You cannot activate only a
warning limit. If you click the Warning - Active check box, the
corresponding alarm limit is also activated.
Note
Warning limits can never be set larger than the corresponding
Alarm limits.
Position
Warning and alarm limits can be set for position deviation. When
the vessel’s actual position differs from the position setpoint by
more than the warning limit, a warning message is displayed.
When the vessel’s actual position differs from the position
setpoint by more than the alarm limit, an audible signal sounds
and an alarm message is displayed.
When active, the position limits are displayed as solid circles in
the Performance area (see Performance area on page 293), on
the General view (see General view on page 279), the Deviation
view (see Deviation view on page 272), and the Posplot view (see
Posplot view on page 298). When inactive, the position limits are
shown as dashed circles on the General and Deviation views.
Note
In all modes, the position limits are inhibited until a requested
change in position is completed.
Heading
Warning and alarm limits can be set for heading deviation. When
the vessel’s actual heading differs from the heading setpoint by
66 301027/C
System settings
more than the warning limit, a warning message is displayed.

When the vessel’s actual heading differs from the heading
setpoint by more than the alarm limit, an audible signal sounds
and an alarm message is displayed.
The limits are active only when the yaw axis is under automatic
control.
When active, the heading limits are shown as solid lines in the
Performance area (see Performance area on page 293), on the
General view (see General view on page 279), the Deviation
view (see Deviation view on page 272), and the Posplot view
(see Posplot view on page 298). When inactive, the heading
limits are shown as dashed lines on the General view and the
Deviation view.
Note
In all modes, the heading limits are inhibited until a requested
change in heading is completed.
3.7.2 VRS page

The VRS page allows you to set alarm limits for pitch, roll and
heave motion.
To display this page, select Sensors→Alarm Limits.
Pitch, Roll, Heave

The system monitors the pitch and roll motions of the vessel as
measured by the Vertical Reference Sensors (VRS). If heave
measurements are also available from the VRS, the system also
monitors this motion. You can specify maximum alarm limits for
each motion. If an alarm limit is exceeded, an audible signal
sounds and an alarm message is displayed.
301027/C 67
To change the limits, either enter new values directly in the

text boxes, or use the up and down arrow buttons to increase
or decrease the current values.
To activate the limits, select the Active check boxes.
3.8 Controller mode and gain level selection

Depending on the main mode selected, use one of the following
methods to display the Gain dialog box:
• Select Joystick→Gain.
• Select AutoPos→Gain.
Alternatively, press the CONTROL SETUP button.
The content of this dialog box will vary according to system

configuration. The dialog box in the system installed on your
vessel may display only some of the items shown in this example.
Controller Mode
The option buttons allow you to select from High Precision,
Relaxed and Green controller modes.
The In Use check boxes indicate which controller mode is
currently in use by the system.
High Precision
This is the default controller mode. It is also the controller mode
setting if controller mode selection is not available in the K-Pos
68 301027/C
System settings
DP system installed on your vessel. Gain level and customised

gain settings (if available) apply for this controller mode.
Relaxed
This controller mode is available in Auto Position and Mixed
Joystick system modes.
Select the radius by clicking the arrows or typing in a value in the
Outer Radius text box. Gain level and customised gain settings
(if available) apply for this controller mode.
If it is not possible to use Relaxed controller mode when it is
selected, the High Precision controller mode will be used.
With Relaxed controller mode, the position gains are modified to
vary within the Relaxed control circle. This means that the force
setpoint used to bring the vessel back to the position setpoint is
very low when close to the center of the control circle. It then
increases up to the normal values when close to the border of the
area defined by the radius (the gain varies exponentially within
the area, see High precision and Relaxed control on page 25).
Note
The radius for Relaxed controller mode is not a position limit, it
is only the area within which the controller gains are very low. If
the vessel drifts outside this area, the gains will increase. How
far outside the vessel drifts depends on the Gain Level settings
(the high-medium-low predefined controller gain or customised
controller gain in surge, sway and yaw axes).
When leaving Auto Position or Mixed Joystick system mode with

Relaxed control active, Relaxed control is temporarily disabled.
This is indicated by:
• The Relaxed In Use check box being cleared.
• The Gain indicator on the status bar becoming solid black
(see Labels on the status bar indicating controller mode and
gain level on page 72).
• The shaded circle on the Posplot view disappearing (see
Posplot of Relaxed controller mode on page 72).
Green
This controller mode is available in Auto Position system mode.
Select the Outer Radius and Inner Radius by clicking the arrows
or typing in a value in the text box.
If it is not possible to use Green when it is selected, the High
Precision controller mode will be used.
The Inner Radius and Outer Radius define the working area
and the operational area, respectively (see Figure 6 in The
Controller on page 24). When the inner radius is predicted to be
301027/C 69
exceeded, additional thrust is added in a smoother way than if the

outer radius is predicted to be exceeded.
Note
When changing position and/or heading in Green controller
mode, the controller mode used is automatically temporarily
switched to High Precision controller mode. During a heading
change the position carrot is set to the present vessel position.
This prevents unnecessary vessel movement. The controller
mode will switch back to Green controller mode once position
(PosMode) and heading mode (HdgMode) has the state
“Present”. These modes are indicated on the status bar, see
Status bar on page 38.
If system selected heading is chosen (see Heading page on
page 197), the Green controller mode will not be in use.
Gain Level (High Precision/Relaxed)

Gain Level is applicable for High Precision and Relaxed controller
modes.
High/Medium/Low
Select the required controller gain level using the
High/Medium/Low option buttons. If available, the gain factors
in use for each of the three gain levels are shown in parentheses.
The values in parentheses may vary depending on vessel
configuration.
Customised
This setting is optional. Select this option button when you
want to perform customised settings of the gain level. Selecting
Customised will make the High/Medium/Low option buttons
unavailable (they will appear dimmed).
After you have selected Customised you can input the
Customisation setting for gain factors in the Surge, Sway and Yaw
axes by clicking the arrows or typing in a new gain factor in the
corresponding text box. The currently selected gain factors in
the Surge, Sway and Yaw axes are shown graphically above the
numerical values.
Speed Constraints (Green)
Speed Constraints are used in Green controller mode to limit the
vessel speed. You can select Speed Constraints for the Surge
and/or Sway axes. Speed constraints should be used while
operating within a large area.
70 301027/C
System settings
3.8.1 Gain Level for High Precision and

Relaxed Controller Mode
There are three predefined controller gain levels available; high,
medium and low. The selected gain level applies to any of the
surge, sway and yaw axes when they are under automatic control
and High Precision or Relaxed controller mode is used (see High
Precision and Relaxed Control on page 24).
If configured, customised setting of the controller gain level can
be performed, with individual gain factor settings for the surge,
sway and yaw axes.
Different gain factors for each of the three standard gain levels
are defined to suit the characteristics of the vessel. The deviations
in position, speed, heading and rotation rate are multiplied by the
selected gain factor to obtain the required force setpoint.
The most suitable gain level depends on the vessel characteristics,
the weather conditions and the required positioning accuracy.
Operational experience plays a large part in determining the
optimum gain level, but the following general points should
also be noted:
• High gain provides the quickest vessel response, the most
accurate manoeuvering, and the smallest positioning window.
• Medium gain provides a slower vessel response than high
gain.
• Low gain provides the slowest vessel response and the largest
positioning window.
For all three predefined controller gain levels, and also for
the customised gain levels, the gain factors are reduced when
the position deviation is close to zero. Under ideal conditions
(optimum Vessel Model and constant environmental forces),
there will be little difference between the effect of the various
gain levels since the position deviation will be minimal.
Under less than ideal conditions there can be some variation in
the vessel position, and you should set the gain level to control
the speed and extent of the variation according to the general
comments given above.
3.8.2 Display presentation of Controller

Mode
For a detailed description of the Posplot view see Posplot view on
page 298.
3.8.2.1 High Precision and Relaxed

When the controller mode is High Precision or Relaxed, the Gain
indicator on the status bar is according to Table 1.
301027/C 71
Table 1 Labels on the status bar indicating controller mode

and gain level
Low Medium High Customised

High
Precision
Relaxed
When the controller mode is Relaxed, the Relaxed control radius

is indicated by a shaded circle on the Posplot view, with the
position setpoint as center, see Figure 17.
Figure 17 Posplot of Relaxed controller mode
3.8.2.2 Green
When the controller mode is Green, the background of AUTO
POS (MainMode) and the Gain indicator on the status bar are
both shaded green (see Figure 18). The height of the Gain bar
graph on the status bar depends on the Inner Radius (the radius of
the working area).
Figure 18 Main mode and Gain indicator for Green controller

mode
The predicted trajectory for the vessel is displayed as a line

pointing from the rotation center. This is the “Green Prediction”.
To show/hide the “Green Prediction” in the Posplot view, see
Show page on page 305.
72 301027/C
System settings
The Green outer and inner control radii are indicated on the
Posplot view, with the position setpoint as center, see Figure 19.
The inner radius is indicated by a green, shaded circle.
Figure 19 Green control limits displayed in the Posplot view
3.9 Quick model update

All the forces acting on the vessel that are not measured directly,
such as waves and sea current, together with any errors in
the measured forces, are calculated over a period of time by
the Vessel Model, and the appropriate thrust is applied to
counteract them (see K-Pos DP system principles on page 21 for
a description of the Vessel Model.) These unknown forces are
presented for the operator as being entirely due to sea current as
this is usually the main component.
Under normal sea conditions, the major components of the
“current” force change only slowly, and the best positioning
performance is achieved by calculating them over a long period
of time.
During some operations, significant and rapid changes in
“current” forces can occur.
For example:
• When manoeuvering in channels, rivers, harbours or around
breakwaters, or in areas with loop current, there may be
sudden changes in the current.
301027/C 73
• When relatively large forces are not measured accurately, such

as the pipe tension in a pipe-laying operation, there may be
sudden errors in the measured forces.
Such sudden changes in the “current” forces would normally
result in a position offset which would then be slowly corrected.
When selected by the operator, the Quick Model Update function
prepares the system for sudden changes in the “current” by
adjusting the mathematical model accordingly and in this way
ensures more accurate positioning.
The reaction rate can be specified separately for each axis.
A timer is included so that the Quick Model Update function is
automatically switched off after a specified period.
3.9.1 Quick Model dialog box

To display the Quick Model dialog box, select AutoPos→Quick
Model.
Enable
Enable or disable the Quick Model Update function.
Duration
The duration of the function, after which it will be automatically
switched off.
Time left
The timer starts when you select Enable and then click the OK
or Apply button. The Time left field shows the time remaining
before the function will be automatically disabled.
Error gain modification factors
A gain modification factor can be specified for each axis. The
factor is specified as a percentage of the normal reaction to
deviation in that axis caused by “current” forces. A larger factor
74 301027/C
System settings
results in a larger reaction and thereby a shorter integration time

for the “current” forces.
3.10 Rotation center for automatic control

The rotation center is used when both the vessel heading and
position are under automatic control. Up to 20 rotation centers
can be predefined for the vessel in fixed positions relative to the
midships position on the vessel. The coordinates of the required
rotation center can also be entered manually. The rotation center
can be located anywhere, even outside the vessel itself.
A suitable configuration of thrusters must be enabled. For
example, if you want the vessel to rotate about the aft part of the
vessel, there must be at least one thruster enabled forward of
the vessel center.
If thrusters are disabled so that the selected rotation center no
longer can be applied, the rotation center in use will automatically
be changed.
The Rotation Center dialog box allows you to define the rotation
center to be used when the vessel heading and position are under
automatic control.
To display this dialog box, select AutoPos→Rotation Center.
301027/C 75
Note
When the vessel’s rotation center is set to a location other than
Midships and the speed setpoint is zero, it will not be possible to
perform a change of heading. This is because a heading change
with a rotation center other than Midships implies a change of
position which requires a speed setpoint that is not zero.
Select Rotation Center

Select a rotation center by clicking the appropriate option button.
When a predefined rotation center is selected, its coordinates are
displayed in the Ahead and Stbd boxes.
If Other is selected, the drop-down list box, from which you can
select among predefined rotation centers, becomes available, and
the dialog box is enlarged to show a Preview display.
When a rotation center is selected in the drop-down list box, its

coordinates are displayed in the Ahead/Astern and Stbd/Port
boxes and in the Preview display. All coordinates are measured
relative to the midships position.
If User Defined is selected in the drop-down list box, the
coordinates of the required rotation center can be entered directly
in the Ahead/Astern and Stbd/Port boxes.
In Use
The In Use boxes show the coordinates of the currently-active
rotation center in the Ahead/Astern and Stbd/Port axes.
76 301027/C
System settings
Preview
A red circle on the Preview display shows the position of the
currently-active rotation center (In Use). A green circle shows the
position of the proposed rotation center (Select Rotation Center).

The available rotation centers are displayed on the Rotation
Centers view (see Rotation Centers view on page 326). The
intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines on the Preview
on the Rotation Center dialog box marks the midships position
on the vessel.
When automatic position control is active, the rotation center can
only be changed when the position and heading modes (shown in
the status bar) are PRESENT.
On the Posplot view, the position of the currently-active rotation
center is shown as a small circle. Also, the title and coordinates
of the rotation center relative to Midships are displayed in the top
left corner of the Posplot view as shown below.
If you click on the RotCnt information, the selected (but presently

not used) rotation center is displayed in another colour for a
few seconds.
301027/C 77
4 JOYSTICK
4.1 Calibrating the joystick ..............................................78
4.2 Joystick settings .........................................................79
4.3 Rotation center for joystick manoeuvring..................82
4.1 Calibrating the joystick

Note
Calibrating the joystick can only be performed by the “Chief”
user (see Changing user on page 57), and only when the system
is in Standby mode.
Calibration of the joystick ensures that a certain deflection of the

joystick corresponds to a specific thrust, depending on Joystick
Settings.
It is necessary to calibrate the joystick when:
• New hardware has been installed or parts of the hardware (for
example the joystick) have been changed.
• New software has been installed or software has been
reinstalled from a CD.
The Joystick Calibrate dialog box contains a description of how
to calibrate the joystick.
To display this dialog box, select Joystick→Calibrate.
78 301027/C
Joystick
4.1.1 Calibration procedure

To calibrate the joystick:
1 Ensure that the system is in Standby mode.
2 Select Joystick→Calibrate.
• The Joystick Calibrate dialog box is displayed.
• A figure indicating the joystick axes is displayed on the
dialog box.
3 Set the joystick in ZERO position and click the In Zero
Position button.
• A red mark appears on the zero position on the figure.
4 Move the joystick for MIN/MAX in the three axes to register
joystick swing.
• Black lines appear on the figure to indicate joystick swing
in all three axes.
5 To change the joystick deadband, click the Deadband button.
• The Deadband dialog box is displayed.
6 Enter the required deadband in all three axes by typing in

values or by clicking the up/down arrows and then click the
OK button.
7 Click the OK button on the Joystick Calibration dialog box
to complete the calibration.
• A dialog box, stating that the new calibration values will
be saved, is displayed.
• The joystick is calibrated.
4.2 Joystick settings

The Joystick Settings dialog box allows you to adjust the
following settings:
• Joystick thrust
• Joystick precision
301027/C 79
• Environmental compensation
• Current update
To display this dialog, select Joystick→Settings or press the
JOYSTICK SETUP button.
Thrust
These option buttons allow you to select either Full or Reduced
thrust.
Full
The maximum force available from all thrusters can be used.
This increases the vessel’s response to movement of the joystick
compared to the Reduced option.
Reduced
The maximum applied thruster force for axes that are under
joystick control is limited to about 50% of the available force
from all thrusters.
The joystick thrust setting can also be changed by pressing the
JOY. FULL THRUST button. The status for the joystick thrust
setting will be dynamically updated on the Joystick Settings
dialog box to reflect this change.
Precision
The applied thruster force for axes that are under joystick
control can be scaled in various ways. This scaling gives a
different response to movement of the joystick, depending on
the configuration and operational requirements of the vessel.
Figure 20 displays thrust as a function of joystick deflection in
the cases of Full and Reduced thrust, with High speed, General
or Low speed precision.
80 301027/C
Joystick
Figure 20 Joystick response characteristics
The option buttons allow you to select from High speed, General
or Low speed precision.
High speed
For precise high-speed manoeuvring. At small movements of the
joystick the change in thruster force is large, but decreases with
increasing movements.
General
Linear relationship between movement of the joystick and force
exerted by the thrusters. The Precision is automatically changed
from High speed to General when changing from high speed to
low speed manoeuvring (for example from Autopilot mode to
Joystick mode).
Low speed
For precise low-speed manoeuvring. Progressive relationship
between movement of the joystick and force exerted by the
thrusters. At small movements of the joystick the change in
thruster force is low, but increases with increasing movements.
Exponent
This shows the exponent used in the calculation of thrust for the
currently selected Precision option. This is for information only.
Envir. Comp.
The check boxes allow you to combine joystick control with
environmental compensation separately for each of the Surge,
Sway and Yaw axes. The system then automatically compensates
for the wind forces acting on the vessel by providing the thrusters
with the necessary extra thrust in the appropriate direction.
301027/C 81
When position-reference system measurements are available, the

system will calculate the unknown forces, including sea current
and wave forces, which are acting on the vessel (collectively
referred to as “current”) and perform automatic compensation
for these forces.
Environmental compensation is always performed when selected,
but the compensation due to “current” forces is zero if no
position-reference system has been accepted or if Current Upd.
is not selected.
Current Upd.
Current Update is by default enabled. You must clear the required
Surge/Sway/Yaw check boxes if you do not want the system to
compensate for the calculated “current” forces for axes under
joystick control.
Compensating for “current” forces when under joystick control
normally increases the system performance when entering
automatic control. However, there can be situations where the
calculated “current” is no longer valid for the new operational
condition. A typical example would be when entering automatic
control after a period using thrusters to hold the vessel against
a quay.
4.3 Rotation center for joystick manoeuvring

When the vessel is in Joystick or mixed joystick/auto mode, it is
possible to specify that the vessel should rotate about the fore or
aft part of the vessel instead of Midships which is the default.
This feature can be useful when leaving or approaching another
vessel or a fixed structure such as a quay.
Note
In Joystick mode the vessel will not rotate accurately around the
selected rotation center. This is because position control is not
used in Joystick mode.
For example, when manoeuvring alongside a quay which lies

to starboard, you may want to move the stern of the vessel in
towards the quay without the bow moving out, while at the same
time applying a small thrust to starboard. This would be difficult
when using Midships as the rotation center. By selecting the fore
part of the vessel as the rotation center, you can easily use the
joystick both to rotate the vessel counter-clockwise about the
bow and to move the vessel to starboard (see Figure 21).
82 301027/C
Joystick
Figure 21 Vessel movement with Fore rotation center selected
Only rotation centers that are intended for use during joystick
manoeuvring can be activated in Joystick mode.
A suitable configuration of thrusters must be enabled. For
example, if you want the vessel to rotate about the aft part of the
vessel, there must be at least one thruster enabled forward of
the vessel center.
In Joystick mode you can specify a rotation center for use in
automatic mode, but the selection will not be effective until an
automatic mode is selected.
If thrusters are disabled so that the selected rotation center no
longer can be applied, the rotation center in use will automatically
be changed.
In mixed Joystick mode the system will, if possible, use the Fore,
Midships or Aft rotation center, but the position setpoint will be
at the operator-specified rotation center. The position controller
may then force the vessel to rotate around the operator-specified
rotation center. We will clarify this with an example.
Assume that the vessel is in Auto Position mode with an
operator-specified rotation center different from Fore, Midships
or Aft. The operator then disables automatic yaw control and uses
the joystick to command the vessel to rotate counter-clockwise.
The joystick control in yaw will try to rotate the vessel around
Midships, but the position control will work in such a way as to
keep the vessel at its position setpoint. The vessel may then be
forced to rotate around the position setpoint as shown in Figure
22.
301027/C 83
Figure 22 A vessel rotating around its position setpoint
4.3.1 Rotation Center dialog box

The Rotation Center dialog box allows you to define the required
manual rotation center.
To display this dialog box, select Joystick→Rotation Center.
Select Rotation Center

Fore
Rotate about the fore part of the vessel.
84 301027/C
Joystick
Midships
Rotate about the Midships of the vessel.
Aft
Rotate about the aft part of the vessel.
In Use
The In Use boxes show the coordinates of the currently-active
rotation center in the Ahead/Astern and Stbd/Port axes.
Additional information
On the Posplot view, the position of the currently-active rotation
center is shown as a small circle. Also, the title and coordinates
of the rotation center relative to Midships are displayed in the top
left corner of the Posplot view as shown below.
If you click on the RotCnt information, the selected (but presently

not used) rotation center is shown for a few seconds.
301027/C 85
5 MESSAGE SYSTEM
5.1 System diagnostics.....................................................86
5.2 Operational checks.....................................................86
5.3 Message priority.........................................................87
5.4 Presentation of messages ...........................................88
5.5 Alarm states ...............................................................92
5.6 Acknowledging messages ..........................................93
5.7 Alarm lamps...............................................................94
5.8 Messages on the printer .............................................96
5.9 Message explanations ................................................97
5.10 Operator advice messages........................................102
5.1 System diagnostics

The following methods are used for fault detection:
• Built-In System Test (BIST) that performs a comprehensive
system test at power-on.
• Built-In Test Equipment (BITE) that continually checks for
internal system faults when the system is running.
• Additional self-checking facilities for system components
such as I/O cards, hardware voters, etc.
• Supervision of the controller process station fan and
temperature.
• Comparison of data with preset maximum and minimum
limits.
• Consistency checking of input (e.g. input from triangular
potentiometer).
• Supervision of the serial lines (e.g. Timeout, baud rate,
framing error, checksum and format).
Any faults are reported.
5.2 Operational checks

The following checks are continuously carried out during system
operation:
• Detection of possible degraded performance of the K-Pos DP
system (e.g. thruster not ready, insufficient thrust, demand
reduced by blackout prevention, position out of limits, etc.).
• Logical checking of information (e.g. taut wire; difference
between measured and expected wire length exceeds limit).
• Comparison of data with preset maximum and minimum
limits.
• Comparison of received data with expected values calculated
by the mathematical model.
86 301027/C
Message system
• Comparison of thruster setpoint and feedback signals.

Discrepancies exceeding preset limits are handled as a fault.
• Consistency checking between similar sensors, both with
respect to interface and sensor failures.
In dual and triple-redundant systems, comparison checks are
also done for the position/heading setpoints and estimates,
reference-system origin, used position-reference systems, target
transponders and other sensors.
Detected faults, discrepancies and advice are reported to the
operator, enabling the appropriate operational actions to be taken
and, if necessary, initiation of relevant repair procedures.
5.2.1 Audible and visual indications

All messages are presented as text in dedicated display areas.
Audible signals and flashing panel lights are used for alarm
messages. The operator can select a view showing all current
messages in the system at any time. Audible signals may be
silenced without acknowledgement of the message.
5.3 Message priority

There are four categories of messages, depending on their
severity:
• Emergency messages
Emergency messages are generated in response to critical
system faults such as over-temperature or power supply
failure.
All Emergency messages must be critically examined to
determine their cause and effect.
• Alarm messages
Alarm messages are generated when conditions are detected
that critically affect the capability or performance of the
system (such as a system fault or a defined alarm limit
exceeded).
All Alarm messages must be critically examined to determine
their cause and effect.
• Warning messages
Warning messages inform you of the occurrence of conditions
in the system that, if ignored, could result in unwanted system
response or eventual failure (such as incorrect operator
actions, intermittent position-reference data or a defined
warning limit exceeded).
301027/C 87
• Information messages
Information messages inform you of conditions that are
noteworthy, but that have no serious effect on the performance
of the system.
Emergency and Alarm messages are accompanied by an audible
signal which continues until you acknowledge the message.
There are no audible signals associated with Warning or
Information messages.
Emergency, Alarm and Warning messages are accompanied by
the relevant lamp flashing in the ALARMS button group until
you acknowledge the message.
If the system tests do not report the same message within a
timeout period (usually 20 seconds), the message becomes
inactive. Inactive Warning and Alarm messages must be
acknowledged before they are removed from the Message Line
and the Dynamic Alarm Page. They will remain displayed with
the state Void in the Dynamic Event and Historic Event Pages.
Explanations can be obtained for any of the messages generated
by the controller process stations, see Message explanations on
page 97.
5.4 Presentation of messages

System messages are colour coded in the following ways:
• Emergency messages are displayed on magenta background.
• Alarm messages are displayed on red background.
• Warning messages are displayed on yellow background.
• Information messages are displayed on grey background.
The messages are presented in two different displays: the
Message Line and the Event List window. The presentation of
events is subjected to filtering. Only those events that match all
attributes specified in the filter are included in the presentation.
System-defined filters are provided which cannot be changed
by the operator.
• The Message Line always shows the most recent Emergency,
Alarm or Warning message that has not yet been acknowledged
Figure 23 Example Message Line
• The Event List window contains a list of all the current system
messages. By pressing the ALARM VIEW button, you can
display the Event List window.
88 301027/C
Message system
Figure 24 Example Event List window
(First column)
If you have not yet acknowledged a message, an asterisk (*) is
displayed and the background colour is displayed flashing (see
Acknowledging messages on page 93 for more information).
A vertical bar (|) is displayed in place an asterisk for an
unacknowledged message that is in a command group over which
the operator station does not have control.
Orig
Identifies the originator (source) of the message:
• DP-OS# – Operator station
• DpMain – Controller PS group
• Equipment – Equipment monitoring system
Member
Members of the originator of the message (not relevant when the
originator is an Operator Station or a controller PS group with
only one member).
If the message is from a controller PS group with more than
one process station, this column identifies the members of the
group. It may contain up to three characters, depending on the
redundancy level. For example, for a triple-redundant system:
ABC The message was reported by all three process
stations and is still active.
C The message was reported only by process station
C and is still active.
-B The message was reported by process stations A
and B. The message from process station A is now
inactive.
--- The message was reported by all three process stations
and is now inactive (but is not yet acknowledged).
Name
Identifies the source of process events and system events.
Time
Time and date when the message was first reported.
301027/C 89
Prior
Message priority: Emergency, Alarm, Warning or Info
(Information).
State
The state of the Event: High, HighHigh, HighScale, Low,
LowLow, LowScale (here all these are commonly referred to as
Active), Normal or Void (see also Alarm states on page 92).
• Active — Indicates that the alarm condition is present.
• Normal — Indicates that the alarm condition is no longer
present.
• Void — Used in the Dynamic Event Page and the Historic
Event Page. Indicates that the message is removed from the
Dynamic Alarm Page.
Text
Message text.
Additional information
Up to three blocks of additional data may be included in the
message. The meaning of this additional data varies for each
message. See Message explanations on page 97.
(Event pages)
You can choose among the following Event pages:
Dynamic Alarm Page
The Dynamic Alarm Page shows a list of the most recent
messages. The Dynamic Alarm Page has a limited length; as
the list is filled up, the oldest messages are pushed out while the
most recent ones are added to the top of the list. Messages where
the underlying condition is no longer present are displayed with
the state Normal.
Messages can be acknowledged on the Dynamic Alarm Page.
Acknowledged messages where the underlying condition is no
longer present are removed from the Dynamic Alarm Page.
Use the Dynamic Alarm Page to get a survey of the current alarm
situation.
Historic Event Page
The Historic Event Page provides a log of all messages that occur.
Within the limits of the event database, you can define the time
span to be covered by the Historic Event Page. While a message
can appear only once on the Dynamic Alarm page, it appears as
many times on the historic page as there are changes in its state.
Use the Historic Event Page whenever you need to analyse the
evolution of events. If the list extends beyond the window area
of the display, you can use the up/down arrows in the tool bar.
Dynamic Event Page
90 301027/C
Message system
The Dynamic Event Page shows a list of the most recent

messages. The Dynamic Event Page has a limited length; as the
list is filled up, the oldest messages are pushed out while the most
recent ones are added to the top of the list. While a message can
appear only once on the Dynamic Alarm page, it appears as many
times on the Dynamic Event Page as there are changes in its
state. Acknowledged messages where the underlying condition is
no longer present remain displayed with the state Void.
Use the Dynamic Event Page to get a survey of the current event
situation.
Note
Messages cannot be acknowledged on the Historic Event Page
and on the Dynamic Event Page.
5.4.1 Defining the time span for the

Historic Event Page
The Date And Time dialog box allows you to define the time span
for the events displayed on the Historic Event Page.
To display this dialog box, click the button in the tool bar of
the Event List window.
Most recent time

The time span is defined relative to a specified date and time.
The “most recent time” is the reference. This group box contains
controls for setting the most recent time.
Now
Clicking this button sets the most recent time to the current time.
Calendar, Hour, Min:, Sec:
301027/C 91
You can specify a date and time by using the calendar, and
entering the required time in the Hour, Min: and Sec: text boxes.
And time span backwards
The time span is defined in days, hours, minutes and seconds
backwards in time. Type in the required values in the Days:,
Hours:, Min: and Sec: text boxes.
5.5 Alarm states

Digital alarms are either “Active” (the underlying condition is
present) or “Inactive” (the underlying condition is no longer
present).
Inactive digital alarms are presented with the status “Normal” on
all three pages of the Event List window. Inactive, acknowledged
digital alarms are presented with the status “Void” on the
Dynamic Event Page and the Historic Event Page. Active digital
alarms are presented with the status High on all three pages of
the Event List window.
For alarms on analog terminals, however, the Active state is
further refined by means of alarm limits. Figure 25 shows the
relation between the alarm limits and the validity of alarms states.
Figure 25 Alarm states

High process values
HighScale
HighScale Limit
HighHigh Active
HighHigh Limit
High
Alarm limits
High Limit
Normal/Void Inactive
Low Limit
Low
LowLow Limit
LowLow Active
LowScale Limit
LowScale
Low process values

Explanation of the arrow symbol
The alarm state is valid from and including this limit.
CD3248 The alarm state is valid to, but not including this limit.
An analog alarm is in the Normal/Void state when the terminal

value is within the High and Low alarm limits. This means that
the alarm is Inactive.
92 301027/C
Message system
The alarm becomes Active when the terminal value crosses the
High/Low limits.
Any change in the alarm state is indicated in the Status cell for
that message in the Event List window.
5.6 Acknowledging messages

You can acknowledge either all visible messages or individual
messages selected on the Event List window (see Figure 24 on
page 89).
When a message has been acknowledged, and the message is
reported as inactive by all the controller process stations, it is
removed from the message list. If this results in “gaps” in the list
displayed in the Event List window, you can remove these “gaps”
by selecting Refresh on the Event List shortcut menu (see Figure
26), by clicking the refresh button on the toolbar, or by closing
and reopening the Event List window.
You can acknowledge messages in the following ways:
• Press the ACK button.
• Click the button in the tool bar of the Event List window.
• Place the cursor in the Event List window or the Message
Line, click the right trackball button to display the following
shortcut menu, and then select Ack.
Figure 26 Event List shortcut menu
To acknowledge the message displayed in the Message Line,

press the ACK button or select Ack as described above.
To acknowledge all visible current messages:
1 Press the ALARM VIEW panel button.
• The Dynamic Alarm Page of the Event List window is
displayed.
2 Click the right trackball button to display the shortcut menu,
and then click Select All.
301027/C 93
• The font of the message texts change to bold.

3 Press the ACK button or select Ack as described above.
• All visible messages are acknowledged.
To acknowledge a selection of messages:
1 Press the ALARM VIEW button.
• The Event List window is displayed.
2 Select a group of consecutive messages by dragging the
cursor over the asterisks in the left column.
• The font of the message texts change to bold.
3 Press the ACK button or select Ack as described above.
• The messages are acknowledged.
5.6.1 Silence button

You can press the SILENCE button at any time to silence the
audible signal (without acknowledging the Emergency or Alarm
message that caused it). The audible signal will sound again if
another Emergency or Alarm message is reported.
An audible signal can normally be silenced from any of the
Operator Stations in question. However, system alarms can only
be silenced from the originating Operator Station. For example,
when an Operator Station becomes “not communicational”
several other Operator Stations may detect the situation and
notify it by means of an audible signal. The audible signal must
be silenced on every OS that notifies the situation.
5.7 Alarm lamps

There are three alarm lamps:
• POWER
This lamp is lit green as long as the power supply to the
operator panel is OK.
94 301027/C
Message system
• FAULT
This lamp is lit red when the contact between the operator
panel and the Operator Station computer is lost, else it is off.
Note
This lamp does not indicate failures in the controller process
station(s). If the Operator Station loses contact with the
controller process station, a message is displayed in a
message dialog box.
Figure 27 PUIF Network message monitoring dialog box
• ALARM
This lamp flashes in response to a software-generated
Emergency, Alarm or Warning message from the Operator
Station computer; for example, heading or position deviation
beyond limits or sensor error. These messages are generated
by the controller process station and do not indicate
failures in the Operator Station. A flashing lamp indicates
unacknowledged messages. A continuously lit lamp indicates
that all messages are acknowledged. The lamp will extinguish
three seconds after the last Emergency, Alarm or Warning
status has been removed.
5.7.1 Indications of errors related to the

ALARMS button group
Errors that are related to the ALARMS button group (and
subsequently the indication of system events) are indicated in
the following ways:
• If the ALARMS button group stops functioning so that the
lamps and audible signal do not work, a dialog box with the
message Operator panel error — No audible and visual Alarms
Indicators is displayed. The dialog box is alternately displayed
(for three seconds) and hidden (for seven seconds). The dialog
box will not be shown during the first minute after the K-Pos
DP system has been run up.
• If the ALARMS button group loses its power, the lamps in the
ALARMS group become unlit, and a buzzer starts to sound.
• If the ALARMS button group has power, but does not get
contact with the OS computer within four minutes after the
K-Pos DP system has been run up, a buzzer will start to sound
and the FAULT and ALARM lamps will become lit.
301027/C 95
• If the ALARMS button group loses contact with the OS

computer, a buzzer will start to sound and the FAULT and
ALARM lamps will become lit.
5.8 Messages on the printer

When an Emergency, Alarm or Warning message is first reported
by the system, becomes inactive or is acknowledged, it is printed
out on the event printer connected to the Operator Station. The
print-out frequency depends on the installed printer solution (for
example: immediately, one message at a time, when a batch of
messages fills out a whole page, or on request).
The format of the printed messages is the same as for the
Message Line and the Event List window (see Presentation of
messages on page 88), except that each message is preceded by a
sequence number. Each new message is given a new sequence
number. Whenever a message changes state, it is printed again
with the same sequence number.
5.8.1 Event Printer dialog box

When the Event Printer is configured as a page printer, the
Emergency, Alarm and Warning messages are not printed directly
but are saved in a buffer. The Event Printer dialog box allows
you to print out all the unprinted events in the buffer.
To display the Event Printer dialog box, select System→Event
Printer.
Printer name
The name of the event printer.
Printer type
The type of the event printer.
Unprinted events
The number of unprinted messages in the event printer buffer.
Flush
Click this button to print all of the unprinted events on the event
printer.
96 301027/C
Message system
Refresh
Click this button to update the information shown in the dialog
box.
5.9 Message explanations

Using the Help system, explanations can be obtained for any
of the messages generated by the controller process stations.
Explanations of Command, Equipment and Internal messages
are not available.
The Help system can be opened in the following ways:
• Whenever a message is displayed in the Alarm Line or Event
List window, point to the message and click the right trackball
button. A shortcut menu is displayed. Click Help on this
menu. The System Messages Help is opened with the relevant
message explanation displayed.
• On the Help menu, click Messages. The System messages
Help is displayed. This Help system allows you to select the
required message from a list of Contents. You can also Search
for the required message by searching for words or phrases
that are contained in the message or the message explanation.
It may occur that the Help selection is not available on the shortcut
menu which is displayed when you right-click the message in the
Alarm Line/Event List window. In this case the explanation can
still be obtained via the Contents list or the Search facility.
5.9.1 Contents
Select the required message from a list of Contents. To open/close
the list of messages in the Contents pane, click the +/- sign next
to the folder icons.
301027/C 97
Figure 28 System Events Online Help with Contents displayed
There are three sub-categories of message explanations:

• DP/PM System — Messages directly connected to DP/PM
operation
• IO Driver — Messages regarding IO drivers and the
communication with sensors and position-reference systems.
• Process Control System — Messages regarding the Process
Control Kernel (PCK)
To display the explanation for a particular message, click the
required message. See Displayed explanation on page 99.
To print the explanation of a particular message, select the name
of the message and then click the Print menu bar button.
To print explanations of all the messages that begin with a
particular character, select the required book icon and then click
the Print menu bar button.
5.9.2 Search
To search for a message, display the Search pane (by clicking the
Search page tab), type in words or phrases that are contained in
the message name or the message explanation and then click
the List Topics button. Topics that match the search criteria
are displayed in the Select topic: list box. Select the required
message and then click the Display button to display the message
explanation in the message explanation pane.
98 301027/C
Message system
5.9.3 Displayed explanation

The explanation of the selected message is displayed in the form
shown below.
Note
The Corrective actions in the message explanations provides only
general advice. You must evaluate the required action according
to the current operational situation.
301027/C 99
5.9.3.1 Back link

The Back link takes you to one of three lists of message
explanations (from any DP/PM message to DP/PM system
alarm messages, from any IO driver message to IO driver alarm
messages and from any process control system message to PCK
alarm messages).
(CD3330)
5.9.4 Menu bar

The following menu bar buttons may be of interest:
Show (Hide)
Shows (Hides) the navigation pane.
Locate
Displays the Contents pane with the title of the message shown in
the message pane, highlighted.
Back
Displays the previous message explanation in the history list.
Forward
Displays the next message explanation in the history list (only
available if you have previously clicked the Back button).
Print
Prints the currently-displayed message explanation. See also
Printing message explanations on page 101.
Options
Displays the Options menu:
Hide (Show) Tabs
Hides (Shows) the navigation pane.
100 301027/C
Message system
Locate
Displays the Contents pane with the title of the message shown in
the message pane, highlighted.
Back
Displays the previous message explanation in the history list.
Forward
Displays the next message explanation in the history list (only
available if you have previously selected Back).
Home
Displays the Help start page.
Stop
Stops an ongoing search.
Refresh
Updates the screen with any new information (not relevant for
this system).
Internet Options
Displays the standard Microsoft Internet Options dialog box.
Print
Prints the currently-displayed message explanation. See also
Printing message explanations below.
Search Highlights Off (On)
When Off is selected, the terms that was searched for is
highlighted in the message explanation. When On is selected,
the terms are not highlighted.
5.9.5 Printing message explanations

In the Contents pane, select the required message or book icon
and then click the Print menu bar button to display the Print
Topics dialog box. Select whether you want to print the selected
topic or print the selected topic and all of its sub-topics.
The standard MS Windows Print Setup dialog box is displayed.
301027/C 101
This dialog box can be used to select the printer and to define
the printer set-up. This is a general-purpose printer connected
to an Operator Station or to the network (not the event printer
connected to the controller process station).
5.10 Operator advice messages

As and when applicable, operator advice messages are
superimposed across the center of the colour display in a pop-up
window.
These messages are displayed if a button is pressed when the
operator station is not in command of the system or an attempt is
made to select a function that is not allowed in the current system
mode or with the currently displayed dialog box.
There are three categories of operator advice messages, each
indicated by an icon:
Alarm (Stop)
Warning
Information
A typical example of each type of operator advice message is

shown in Figure 29.
102 301027/C
Message system
Figure 29 Operator advice message examples
301027/C 103
6 STARTING OPERATIONS
6.1 System start-up/shut-down and OS
stop/restart................................................................104
6.2 Logon Configuration dialog box ..............................106
6.3 Command transfer....................................................107
6.4 Command Control dialog box..................................109
6.5 Connecting to a controller PS group ........................ 116
6.1 System start-up/shut-down and OS

stop/restart
The K-Pos DP controller cabinet and Operator Stations are
usually left with the power on and with the system in Standby
mode.
Placement and naming of switches used in system start-up and
shut-down procedures will vary depending on the hardware
installed.
If the system has been shut down, use the procedure in the
Maintenance Information document for your vessel to restart
the system.
6.1.1 Stop/Restart dialog box

With the Stop/Restart dialog box, you can perform the following
tasks at your Operator Station:
• Stop the OS software and leave the Windows session running.
• Restart the OS software with the Windows session running.
• Shutdown the Windows session (and thus also stop the OS
software).
• Reboot the Windows session (and thus also stop and restart
the OS software).
Reboot the Operator Station if the system is not performing as
required, for example:
• Display views are not updated (i.e. numerical values, heading
and position do not change).
• The Operator Station does not respond to operator input.
If it is impossible to move the cursor, or the System menu for
some other reason is unavailable, use the procedure described
in Restart the OS using the Windows Security dialog box on
page 106 to restart the Operator Station.
Any of these options should be performed on one Operator
Station at a time to facilitate operation and monitoring of the
K-Pos DP system from other Operator Stations.
104 301027/C
Starting operations
Caution
Some of the options you can perform on this dialog box
are not part of the normal operating procedures for the
K-Pos DP system. They are implemented to facilitate
service and installation work performed by trained
personnel from Kongsberg Maritime.
To display the Stop/Restart dialog box, select

System→Stop/Restart.
OS Software
Stop
Stop the OS software and leave the Windows session running.
Restart
Restart the OS software with the Windows session running.
Windows
Shutdown
Stop the OS software, shut down the Windows session and
prepare the computer to be turned off.
Reboot (with OS Restart)
Stop the OS software, reboot the Windows session and restart
the OS software.
Note
Avoid restarting the Operator Station by switching the power off
and on. It may be damaging to the Windows file system.
301027/C 105
6.1.2 Restart the OS using the Windows

Security dialog box
1 Press Ctrl+Alt+Del (simultaneously) on the alphanumeric
keyboard.
• The Windows Security dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Shut Down button.
• The Shut Down Windows dialog box is displayed.
3 Select Shut down in the What do you want the computer to
do? drop-down-list box.
5 Turn the power off.
For details about how to turn the power on/off, refer to the
Maintenance Information document in the Maintenance
Manual for your vessel.
6 Wait.
7 Turn the power on.
6.2 Logon Configuration dialog box

The Logon Configuration dialog box enables you to perform the
following tasks on your Operator Station:
• Select between user logon and auto logon
• Select/change the shell to be used when logging on (typically
either Microsoft Windows or the OS software).
Caution
Use of this dialog box is not part of the normal operating
procedures for the K-Pos DP system. It is implemented
to facilitate service and installation work performed by
trained personnel from Kongsberg Maritime.
Depending on the shell used on your Operator Station, you can

display the Logon Configuration dialog box either by selecting
AutoStart under the K-Pos DP command on the Start menu (only
when using Microsoft Windows as shell), or when performing
autostart of the K-Pos DP system. During autostart, a countdown
dialog box is launched. Clicking the button on this countdown
dialog box within the countdown limit, displays the Logon
Configuration dialog box.
106 301027/C
Starting operations
User Logon
Select this option button if the user is required to log on manually
each time the system is started.
Logon Profile
Auto Logon
Select this option button if automatic logon is to be configured
and performed each time the system is started. This is the normal
logon configuration.
Shell
Drop-down list box where you can select which shell
configuration to use when logging on, either Microsoft Windows
or the OS software. The OS software is the normal shell
configuration.
Apply and Logoff
Clicking this button after having selected a new shell
configuration will quickly restart the system with the new shell
configuration.
6.3 Command transfer

Depending on the system configuration, more than one Operator
Station can be connected simultaneously to one controller process
station (PS) group as described in Connecting to a controller
PS group on page 116. For example, the Main controller PS
group (which in turn controls the vessel’s propulsion system),
can be controlled from a K-Pos DP Operator Station, an Operator
Station in integrated systems, or a remote operator terminal.
All the available information about the propulsion system is
available at all the connected Operator Stations, but only one
Operator Station can be in command at any time.
301027/C 107
All the Operator Stations have TAKE and GIVE buttons. On the
Operator Station that has command of the Main controller PS
group, the TAKE button is lit and Propulsion is displayed in the
title bar.
There are two methods for switching command between Operator
Stations that are connected to the same controller PS group:
• Take Command
• Give Command
The system command configuration determines whether or not
the “Take Command” method can be used. The “Take” and
“Give” actions apply only for the controller PS group to which
the Operator Station is connected.
In the following example procedures, both DP-OS1 and DP-OS2
are connected to the Main controller PS group, DP-OS1 currently
has command of this group, and command is to be transferred
to DP-OS2.
6.3.1 Taking command

Note
This procedure can be used only if allowed by the system
command configuration.
1 DP-OS1 is in command.
• The TAKE button status lamp on DP-OS1 is lit.
• No COMMAND button status lamps are lit on DP-OS2.
2 To take command at DP-OS2, press the TAKE button on
DP-OS2 twice within four seconds.
3 DP-OS2 is now in command.
6.3.2 Giving command

1 DP-OS1 is in command.
2 Press the GIVE button on DP-OS1.
• The TAKE button status lamps on all Operator Stations
that are connected to this controller PS group flash.
• An audible signal sounds at all Operator Stations where
the feature is configured.
3 If applicable, press the SILENCE button to stop the audible
signal from sounding.
108 301027/C
Starting operations
4 To accept command at DP-OS2, press the TAKE button on

DP-OS2 twice within four seconds.
5 DP-OS2 is now in command.
• The audible signal is silenced.
If the offered command transfer is not accepted within one
minute, then DP-OS1 remains in command.
If command has not already been taken by another Operator
Station, the offered command transfer can be cancelled during
the timeout period by pressing the TAKE button on DP-OS1.
6.4 Command Control dialog box

The Command Control dialog box shows the current command
control status and allows you take or give control of the K-Pos
DP system.
Note
As a general rule it is recommended to use the operator panel
buttons to take or give command control.
To display this dialog box, press the STATUS button.
This dialog box has three pages, one page with the name of the
Operator Station (in this example DP-OS1), Overview, and Give.
The DP-OS1 page is referred to as “the DP-OS page” and some
elements are present on all three pages.
The information available from the Command Control dialog
box is mainly intended for operation of systems with several
Operator Stations.
301027/C 109
The Command Control dialog box provides some opportunities

not available from panel buttons.
The Command Control dialog box is designed to correspond
to the equivalent dialog box in the K-Chief system where it
is more frequently used. This has been done to improve the
user interface, especially on vessels with Integrated Automation
Systems (IAS) on board.
6.4.1 Command groups

In IAS systems, the functionality is divided into Command
groups that reflect the way in which the system will be operated.
Each of these Command groups will usually represent a specific
process area, for example, Ballast, Power, Propulsion, Propulsion
Simulation etc.
All the available information about the command groups is
available at all the connected Operator Stations, but, for each
Command group, only one Operator Station can be in command
at any time.
For K-Pos DP purposes, Thr_Propulsion and Thr_Propulsion(Sim)
are the relevant Command groups, and “Take Command” and
“Give Command” are the two relevant command transfer actions.
6.4.1.1 Thr_Propulsion
The Operator Station that controls this Command group, controls
the vessel’s propulsion system. All Operator Stations can take
command of Thr_Propulsion.
6.4.1.2 Thr_Propulsion(Sim)
A simulation session can be performed on the Operator Station
that controls this Command group.
A training or simulation session can be performed on the Operator
Station that controls this Command group (provided that the
requirements stated in Trainer functions on page 266 are met).
6.4.2 DP-OS page

To display the DP-OS page, click the DP-OS page tab.
The example below shows the DP-OS page with DP-OS1 in
command of Thr_Propulsion.
110 301027/C
Starting operations
Command Group
All command groups are listed in this column. Only
Thr_Propulsion and Thr_Propulsion(Sim) are of interest for the
K-Pos DP system.
Status
Using the text In Command, this column displays the command
groups over which this Operator Station has control.
Modified
Displays the time the command control state of the command
groups was last changed by this Operator Station.
Privileges
Displays the Operator Station’s privileges for each command
group. Takeable is the only one of interest for the K-Pos DP
system. “Takeable” means that an Operator Station can take
command of the command group in question without acceptance
from the Operator Station that was originally in command.
6.4.3 Overview page

To display the Overview page, click the Overview page tab.
301027/C 111
Command Group
All Command groups are listed in this column.
In Command
Displays the Operator Station that is in command.
Modified
Displays the time when the command control state was last
changed by any Operator Station. This may be different from the
time displayed for the same command group on the DP-OS page
as it shows the time the command control state was last changed
by the Operator Station that you are at.
Command Locations
Displays the Operator Stations that can take command of each
command group. The asterisks (*) mean that the Operator Station
can take command without acceptance. This is usually the case
for Operator Stations in K-Pos DP systems.
6.4.4 Give page

To display the Give page, click the Give page tab.
112 301027/C
Starting operations
To OS Group:
Displays the Operator Station(s) to which command can be
transferred.
Give Command of:
Clicking an DP-OS in the To OS Group list, causes a list of all the
command groups over which the Operator Station you are at (here
DP-OS1) currently has command, to be displayed in this field.
6.4.5 Command Groups

For K-Pos DP operations only the Thr_Propulsion and
Thr_Propulsion(Sim) command groups are of interest. You select
a command group by clicking its identifier in the Command
Group list.
There is a folder icon for each command group. The folder icons
are colour coded and have their presentation changed to indicate
the current status of each command group.
• Red, closed folder — Uncontrolled, critical command group.
• White, closed folder — Uncontrolled command group.
• Grey, closed folder — Another Operator Station is in control
of the command group.
• Green, open folder — This Operator Station (here DP-OS1)
is in control of the command group.
6.4.6 Controls and indicators

The command transfer controls are divided in three groups,
TAKE, GIVE and STATUS. Each group contains a lamp, a text
field and a button.
Lamps
Text Fields
Buttons
For K-Pos DP systems, when the dialog box is open, pressing

STATUS on the operator panel closes the dialog box.
The following descriptions of controls and indicators uses
DP-OS1 as an example.
Lamps
TAKE
• Lit on DP-OS1 when DP-OS1 is in command.
• Not lit on DP-OS1 when another OS is in command.
• Flashes until DP-OS1 accepts when DP-OS1 is offered
command, or during the timeout period of one minute.
301027/C 113
• Flashes while DP-OS1 is giving command to another Operator

Station, until the other Operator Station accepts, or during the
timeout period of one minute.
GIVE
• Flashes while DP-OS1 is giving command to another Operator
Station, until the other Operator Stationaccepts, or during the
timeout period of one minute.
Text fields and buttons
The text fields display the command transfer action that will be
performed when the related button is clicked.
TAKE button and text field
The TAKE button is unavailable when DP-OS1 is in command or
when no command group is selected for command transfer.
The messages that may appear in the text field are as follows:
• Take...
Default on the Give page. Clicking the TAKE button displays
the DP-OS1 or Overview page, depending on which was last
used.
• Take
Appears above the TAKE button on the DP-OS page when an
uncontrolled command group or a command group currently
under command of another Operator Station is selected.
Clicking the TAKE button transfers the command to DP-OS1.
• Cancel Give...
Appears above the TAKE button when a Give request is
initiated. Clicking the TAKE button cancels the Give request.
• Accept Give...
Appears above the TAKE button when a Give request is
received. Clicking the TAKE button accepts a Give request
and transfers command to DP-OS1.
GIVE button and text field
The messages that may appear in the text field are as follows:
• Give...
Default on the DP-OS and Overview pages. Clicking the GIVE
button displays the Give page.
• Give selected...
Appears above the GIVE button on the DP-OS and Overview
pages when “Giveable” command groups are selected.
Clicking the GIVE button the displays the Give page.
114 301027/C
Starting operations
• Start Give Transfer

Appears above the GIVE button on the Give page when
“Giveable” command groups are selected. By clicking the
GIVE button you start a Give transfer of the selected command
groups.
• Reject Give
Appears above the GIVE button when a Give request is
received. Clicking the GIVE button rejects the Give request.
STATUS button and text field
For K-Pos DP systems, the message that may appear in the
text field is:
• Close
Default above the STATUS button on all three pages. Clicking
the STATUS button closes the dialog box.
6.4.7 Taking or giving command of

propulsion control
This procedure is used to transfer control of propulsion between
K-Pos DP Operator Stations.
To “Take” command of propulsion control at the K-Pos DP
Operator Station where it is required:
1 Press the STATUS button.
• The Command Control dialog box is displayed.
2 Check that the DP-OS page of the dialog box is being
displayed (if not, click the DP-OS page tab).
3 Highlight Thr_Propulsion and then click the TAKE button to
transfer propulsion control to the station you are at.
To “Give” command of propulsion control to another K-Pos DP
Operator Station:
1 Press the STATUS button.
• The Command Control dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Give page tab.
• The Give page is displayed.
3 Highlight the OS group you want to give command to (by
clicking on the group), highlight Thr_Propulsion, and then
click theGIVE button to start the transfer of propulsion
control.
• The TAKE button will start to flash at the station to which
propulsion control is to be transferred.
301027/C 115
4 To accept the transfer of propulsion control, press the

STATUS button to display the Command Control dialog box
(if it is not already open) and then click the TAKE button to
complete the transfer.
6.5 Connecting to a controller PS group

A “controller PS group” is a group of one or more K-Pos DP
controller process stations. The controller PS groups available
depend on your system configuration:
• Main — the main controller PS group
• MainSimulator — the controller PS group for training and
simulating sessions (optional)
An operator station can be connected to only one controller
PS group at a time. Your system configuration determines the
controller PS groups to which each operator station can connect.
Several operator stations can be connected simultaneously to a
controller PS group, but only one of these operator stations can
be in command. See Taking command on page 108.
If an operator station is not in command of a controller PS group,
you can connect that operator station to any available group at
any time. However, if the operator station has command of a
controller PS group, the system on these controllers must be in
Standby mode before you can connect the operator station to
a different group.
The Connect dialog box allows you to connect to a controller
PS group.
To display this dialog box, select System→Connect.
Select the required controller PS group.

For operating procedures related to the built-in simulator, refer to
the separate DP/PM Built-in Simulator Operator Manual.
116 301027/C
Controller process stations
7 CONTROLLER PROCESS STATIONS

7.1 Resetting controller process stations........................ 117
7.2 Redundant systems................................................... 118
7.1 Resetting controller process stations

You can reset a selected controller process stations (PS) for
example in the event of a software problem. To retrieve the
default settings, all controller PSs must be reset.
7.1.1 Resetting the controller PS in a

single-computer system
Before resetting the controller PS in a single-computer system,
you must ensure that the K-Pos DP system does not have control
of the vessel propulsion system.
To reset the controller PS, follow the procedure described in
Resetting all controller PSs in a dual or triple redundant system
below.
7.1.2 Resetting one controller PS in a dual

or triple redundant system
Before resetting a controller PS in a dual or triple-redundant
system using the Reset Controller PS dialog box, you should
ensure that another controller PS is operational and is selected as
the master computer (see Redundant systems on page 118).
To display this dialog box, select System→Reset Controller PS.
To reset a controller PS, select the Controller PS to be reset and

then click the OK or Apply button.
7.1.3 Resetting all controller PSs in a dual

or triple redundant system
If the vessel is not under control by the K-Pos DP system, you
can reset all K-Pos DP controller PSs simultaneously. During
DP operation the K-Pos DP controller PSs receive the same
input from sensors, position-reference systems and thrusters, and
perform the same calculations.
301027/C 117
The best way to ensure that errors are deleted from the K-Pos DP
controller PSs is therefore to reset all of them. To retrieve the
default settings, all K-Pos DP controller PSs must be reset.
1 Ensure that the K-Pos DP system does not have control of
the vessel propulsion system.
2 Ensure that the K-Pos DP system is in Standby mode.
3 Ensure that no thrusters are enabled.
4 Reset all K-Pos DP controller PSs simultaneously using the
Reset Controller PS dialog box (see 7.1.2).
• The Reset Controller PS message box is displayed
informing you that the vessel will be without control
from this system during the restart period.
5 Click the OK button to confirm.

• Until at least one K-Pos DP controller PS is running, a
dialog box containing the following message is displayed
on all Operator Stations:
No network response from the Controller PS
• When at least one K-Pos DP controller PS is running, a
message box is displayed on all Operator Stations:
The Controller PS is now responding
The K-Pos DP system is in Standby mode with default
settings.
The following message is displayed in the Event List
window for each controller PS:
Equip <yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss>Alarm <DpPUx>: Station is
operational
(x refers to controller PS A, B or C).
6 Select the master controller PS (see Redundant systems
below).
7.2 Redundant systems

In dual redundant systems, the controller cabinet contains two
controller process stations (PSs) that operate with a master/slave
relationship.
118 301027/C
In triple redundant systems, the controller cabinet contains three

controller PSs. The concept of majority voting is used to detect
and isolate faults in the sensors and in the K-Pos DP system itself.
7.2.1 Error objects

A system surveillance function keeps track of the extent to which
the controller PS and its associated IO equipment is technically
capable of fulfilling its intended purpose. The IO drivers and
different system health monitoring functions automatically
register “error objects”. Each error object is identified with a
unique name and is used to report the presence or absence of
errors. By communicating with other members of the redundancy
group, the system keeps track of which errors are shared between
all controller PSs in the group (common errors), which ones are
exclusive to one controller PS and which ones that make the PS
incapable of controlling the process.
No weights are assigned to errors. Neither is the number of errors
significant. What makes a PS “more capable” than another is
defined by the following list in the order of falling capability:
• OK — A PS without errors
• Common error — A PS with only common errors
• Degraded — A PS with separate errors
• Incapable — An incapable, but running PS
7.2.2 Dual redundant system

The PSs in a dual redundant system operate in parallel,
each receiving the same input from the operator, sensors,
position-reference systems and thrusters, and each performing
the same calculations. However, only the Online (Master) PS can
control the propulsion system. You can select which PS is to be
the Master, however, a switch is only possible to a PS which is of
equal or better capability than the current Master. In the event
of a deviation between the two PSs, you can update the Offline
PS with data from the Master PS. See Redundant Stations dialog
box on page 122.
Both control computers are continuously checked for both
hardware and software failures. If a failure is detected, a warning
or alarm is given.
Some advantages of redundancy are:
• No single-point failure
The system is designed to avoid total system failure if single
failure occurs.
301027/C 119
• Failure detection
The system will detect a failure, allowing corrective actions to
be taken.
• Fault isolation
If one system component fails, the other components will not
be affected.
7.2.2.1 Automatic switch-over to the Offline PS

If a failure is detected in the Master PS, a switch-over to the
Offline PS is activated automatically and an alarm message is
given:
Redundancy group "DpMain": B Master
This automatic switching is allowed only once. Before any
further auto-switching can take place, the operator must have
the fault rectified and then reset the error object to the normal
state (unlock).
7.2.2.2 Resetting after an automatic switch-over

1 Select System→Redundant Stations.
• The Redundant Stations dialog box is displayed (see
Redundant Stations dialog box on page 122).
In this dialog box Error Objects are used to report the
presence of failures that may lead to an auto-switch
from one PS to another. Yes is displayed in the Locked
column for locked error objects (errors that have lead to
an auto-switch).
2 Use Error Objects in the Redundant Stations dialog box to

find out which errors are present.
3 Have the errors rectified.
4 In the Redundant Stations dialog box, right-click in the Error
Objects area.
120 301027/C
• The following shortcut menu is displayed:
5 Select Unlock All.

The locked error objects are reset to the normal state
(unlocked).
7.2.3 Triple redundant system

In triple redundant systems, each PS uses the same data
from the operator, sensors, and position-reference systems to
calculate command signals to the propulsion system (they are
all Online). Fault detection and isolation are achieved by a
process of majority voting. Once the voting has taken place,
the failed (incorrect) computer will, if possible, correct itself
automatically, based on the values of the other computers. If the
failed computer cannot correct itself, the operator is informed
and the faulty computer should be replaced. Meanwhile, the two
other computers continue working and perform dual-redundancy
procedures in the same way as a dual system (see Dual redundant
system on page 119). The system will automatically reconfigure
itself to a triple-redundant system as soon as the failed computer
is replaced.
In triple redundant systems, all three PSs perform voting, but only
one of the PSs, the Master PS, communicates with the operator
stations, and outputs serial line information. You can select the
PS that is to be the Master, however, a switch is only possible to a
PS which is of equal or better capability than the current Master.
If the present Master PS should fail, another PS will immediately
take over the Master responsibility.
Advantages of triple redundancy are:
• Voting of sensor input signals
The voting is performed between tightly synchronised
computers to:
– Detect sensor errors such as compass drift and sensor
breakdown.
– Ensure that all three computers use the same data as a basis
for calculation of command signals.
• Software Implemented Fault Tolerance (SIFT)
The Triple Modular Redundancy (TMR) detects an error in
the processing elements and corrects the error by employing
voting algorithms. The system represents a Software
Implemented Fault Tolerance (SIFT) concept.
301027/C 121
• Voting on command (output) signals

– DP-31: The thruster commands from the three control
computers are compared by the “master” computer and the
median command is selected to be the final output.
– DP-32: The voting of the thruster commands is performed
in the thruster control field station.
• No single-point failure (see Dual redundant system on
page 119)
• Failure detection (see Dual redundant system on page 119)
• Fault isolation (see Dual redundant system on page 119)
7.2.4 Redundant Stations dialog box

To display the Redundant Stations dialog box, select
System→Redundant Stations.
PS Groups
Select the target controller PS group for all commands and
operational statuses of the dialog box from this list.
122 301027/C
Redundancy Status
Master
The current master PS is indicated in the appropriate check box.
The master PS is designated for specific tasks only done by a
single PS on behalf of the redundancy group.
You can click the Set button to set the corresponding PS as the
master.
Online
The current online PS is indicated in the appropriate check box.
The online PS controls the field output.
Capability
Displays the Capability status (i.e. to which extent the PS is
technically capable of fulfilling its intended purpose).
• OK
No errors
• Common Error
Errors that are common to all PSs in the controller PS group
• Degraded
Errors that are restricted to one of the PSs in the group
• Incapable
The PS is in a state where it should not be used as the master
or online PS
Mode
Running modes are defined to structure the start-up phase, before
a PS is ready to take control.
• Inactive
The PS is not communicating. It may be in the process of
initiating or loading, or not executing at all.
• Starting
The PS is communicating, but more preparation is needed.
In particular, it may be necessary to initiate IO devices and
detect their state.
• Learning
The PS is communicating and has been initiated, but is in the
process of retrieving information from other PSs, which are in
Running mode. This mode can also be entered from Running
mode in cases where normal operation has been interrupted
for a while.
• Running
The PS is communicating, and has finished all start-up
preparations.
301027/C 123
Redundancy Control
Redundancy type
Displays the Redundancy type for the selected controller PS
group. Single, Dual and Triple are the ones that are relevant for
K-Pos DP purposes.
PS fault tolerance
This is the number of PSs that can fail without losing control
of the system. For a single system this number is 0, for a fully
operational dual system it is 1, and for a fully operational triple
system it is 2.
Update Offline
In the event of deviation between the two PSs in a dual (or
degraded triple) system, click Update Offline to update the offline
PS.
Update Offline is unavailable for a fully operational triple
redundant system. If a failure is detected in PS A, B or C, the
system continues operating as a dual redundant system and the
Update Offline functionality becomes available.
If a failure is detected in PS A or B in a dual system (or in two
of the three PSs in a triple system), the Update Offline button
on the dialog box becomes unavailable. The system continues
operating as a single system.
A message about the status of the last “Update Offline” is
displayed below the Update offline button, for example:
Last update offline OK
Error Objects
Error objects are used to report the presence of failures that may
lead to an auto-switch from one PS to another.
If you right-click in the Error Objects area, the following shortcut
menu is displayed:
In Error
The PS(s) on which the failure is detected.
Locked
Yes is displayed for locked error objects (failures that presently
exist in the system and that may lead to an auto-switch). To
reset all error objects to the normal state, select Unlock all on
the shortcut menu.
124 301027/C
Overruled
It can be useful to be able to overrule the automatic detection
of failures, especially in cases of instability. This is done by
right-clicking the relevant error and selecting Permanent On (the
error is regarded as being permanently present) or Permanent
Off (the error is regarded as being permanently absent) on the
shortcut menu.
Description
A list of the possible failures.
The list is always shown in the dialog box, but only those failures
that are marked with Yes in the Locked column are present in
the system.
(Status field in the lower left corner)
The status field displays the current status of the selected
controller PS group (Ready, Requesting information..., Request
for configuration failed, Request for capability failed, Request for
state failed, Switching of Master failed and Error when changing
permanent settings).
PS Operation...
Not relevant during normal operation.
Refresh
Clicking this button updates the content of the dialog box with
the current operational status.
301027/C 125
8 SENSORS
8.1 Gyrocompasses ........................................................126
8.2 Wind sensors ............................................................131
8.3 Vertical reference sensors (VRS) .............................136
8.4 Speed sensors ...........................................................138
8.5 Draught sensors........................................................141
8.6 Rate Of Turn sensors................................................143
8.1 Gyrocompasses
At least one gyrocompass must be enabled at all times to provide
heading information to the system for automatic control of
heading.
Gyrocompasses are enabled and controlled using the Sensors
dialog box - Gyro page.
8.1.1 Sensors dialog box - Gyro page

To display the Gyro page, either:
• Select Sensors→Gyro,
or
• Press the GYRO button.
OK
The OK status for each gyrocompass is shown in the matching
OK check box. The status for all channels from the gyrocompass
126 301027/C
Sensors
must be OK for the check box to be selected. This check box

is for information only.
Enable
Each gyrocompass has an associated Enable check box. Selecting
this check box enables the signals from the gyrocompass. The
system will automatically disable a gyrocompass if it is not OK,
i.e. clear the Enable check box, and also make the check box
unavailable.
Preference
These option buttons allows you to specify which gyrocompass
is preferred for use by the system.
In Use
The gyrocompass that is currently used by the system to calculate
the vessel’s heading is indicated in the In Use check box. If
the gyrocompass is not OK or a failure is detected, the check
mark is cleared from the In Use check box, and the system will
automatically switch to another gyrocompass enabled for use.
Gyro Heading
The measured heading from the gyrocompass.
Added Correction
This text box allows you to specify a gyrocompass correction
to compensate for a possible offset of the ships gyrocompass
for example compared with a surveyor’s gyrocompass. The text
box is unavailable and appears dimmed when the corresponding
gyrocompass is enabled.
Note
To ensure consistent data for all users of a gyrocompass, it is
recommended to adjust the gyrocompass itself.
Used Heading
The measured heading from the gyrocompass with added
correction.
Note
The Gyro Deviation Calculation (see Gyro Deviation dialog box
below) uses the Used Heading values as input for the calculations.
8.1.2 Gyro Deviation dialog box

The data from each gyro can be monitored and evaluated using
Gyro Deviation Calculation. This function is based on the fact
that the vessel heading can be derived from the relative positions
between two GPS antennas. The error for each gyro is estimated
from the filtered difference between the GPS derived heading and
301027/C 127
the gyro data. Recommended minimum antenna separation is

10 m, and the accuracy of the computed heading increases with
distance between the antennas.
To display the Gyro Deviation dialog box, select Sensors→Gyro
Deviation.
Gyro Deviation Calculation

The Gyro Deviation Calculation uses the Used Heading values (see
Sensors dialog box - Gyro page) as input for the calculations.
Active
Select this check box to enable Gyro Deviation Calculation.
Filter Time
The default value is the recommended minimum value for your
vessel. The shorter the distance between the GPS antennas, the
longer the time required for data filtering.
Calculated Correction
Correction
For each gyro the difference between the computed heading and
the used heading from the gyro is displayed.
You can select to have the Calculated Correction value displayed
as a trend plot in the Sensors view (see Sensors view on page 327)
and in the Trends view (see Trends view on page 349) using the
view control dialog boxes for these views.
Std.Dev
The Standard Deviation for each estimate is displayed. If the
Correction is one degree or more, and the Std.Dev is significantly
smaller, you should correct the error on the gyro.
128 301027/C
Sensors
Based on
This displays the GPSs the Gyro Deviation Calculation is based on.
8.1.2.1 Additional information

When sailing at high speed, the used heading may deviate from
the computed heading due to lack of speed/latitude compensation.
After the vessel has stopped, the Correction value may still be
incorrect for some minutes.
Note
Before correcting for error on the gyro, you should let the
Correction value stabilise.
8.1.3 Gyro status lamp

The GYRO button has a status lamp which shows the status of
the gyrocompasses:
• On — At least one gyrocompass is enabled and accepted by
the system.
• Flashing — The measurements from one of the enabled
gyrocompasses are not accepted by the system.
• Off — No gyrocompasses are enabled.
8.1.4 Displayed heading information

You can examine the measured values from the gyrocompasses in
more detail on the Sensors view (see Sensors view on page 327).
8.1.5 Rejection of heading measurements

Normally, all the available gyrocompasses will be running
and enabled for use. The system then receives and compares
the signals from all the gyrocompasses, but uses only one of
them to calculate the vessel’s heading. You can specify which
gyrocompass is preferred for use by the system:
301027/C 129
• When two gyrocompasses are enabled, the system will use the
preferred gyrocompass. If the difference between the value
read from a gyrocompass and the model value exceeds a
predefined limit, an alarm is displayed; for example:
Gyro 1 prediction error
If this error is for the gyrocompass that is in use, the system
will change automatically to the other gyrocompass.
Note
In the event of a Gyro prediction error, you should always check
the values from the gyrocompasses on the Sensors view and
compare with an alternative source of heading information to
confirm which gyrocompass is faulty.
• When three gyrocompasses are enabled, the system will

normally use the preferred gyrocompass. If the difference
between the measurement from one of the gyrocompasses and
the median value exceeds a predefined limit, the measurements
from this gyrocompass are rejected and an alarm will be given.
If necessary, the system will change to another gyrocompass.
8.1.6 Faulty gyrocompasses

If measurements from a gyrocompass are not accepted by the
system, a message is given with information about the failure.
The message may define the faulty gyro directly; for example:
Gyro 1 not ready. Alternatively, it may indicate only that there
is a difference between the measurements from the available
gyrocompasses. In the latter case, you must try to find the faulty
compass by comparing the received measurements with an
alternative source of heading information.
In the following examples it is assumed that two gyrocompasses
are available, that both gyrocompasses are enabled and that Gyro
1 is in use:
• If there is a failure on Gyro 2 (the gyrocompass that is not in
use), disable the signals from Gyro 2 and rectify the fault.
• If a fault is detected on Gyro 1 (the gyrocompass that is in use),
the system will switch to Gyro 2 automatically if Gyro 2 is
enabled. Disable the signals from Gyro 1 and rectify the fault.
130 301027/C
Sensors
• If there is a failure on a gyrocompass and the system cannot

detect which compass is faulty; for example:
Compass difference
Do the following:
1 Check the values from the gyrocompasses on the
Sensors view and use an alternative compass or the Gyro
Deviation Calculation (see Gyro Deviation dialog box on
page 127) to find which gyrocompass is faulty.
2 Disable the faulty gyrocompass and rectify the fault.
When a faulty gyrocompass is repaired, you should enable it
again.
8.1.7 Heading dropout

If the vessel heading that is estimated by the Vessel Model differs
significantly from the measured vessel heading, the following
message is given:
Heading prediction error
If this continues for more than two seconds, the system will
assume that the information from the gyrocompasses is unreliable
and will stop updating the Vessel Model with the measured
heading. In this situation the following alarm will be given:
Heading dropout
The same alarm will occur if no gyrocompasses are enabled, or if
there is a total gyrocompass malfunction.
It is not possible to operate with automatic heading or position
control in a Heading dropout situation.
Go to Standby mode to reset the estimated heading from the
Vessel Model to the measured gyrocompass heading.
Check that the gyrocompasses are ready, whether the readings
are drifting or if other error messages indicate interface errors.
8.2 Wind sensors

At least one wind sensor should be enabled at all times to provide
the system with wind speed and direction information.
Normally, input from all the available wind sensors will be
enabled. The system then receives and compares the signals from
all the sensors, but uses only one of them to calculate the wind
force acting on the vessel.
Wind sensors are enabled and controlled using the Sensors dialog
box -Wind page.
301027/C 131
You can specify which wind sensor is preferred for use by

the system. If no errors are detected in the wind sensor
measurements, the system will always use the operator-preferred
sensor (for which Preference is selected in the Sensors dialog box
Wind page).
The raw measurements of wind speed and direction are filtered
internally (using a Kalman filter with both low and high
frequency parts), to estimate the most reasonable speed and
direction values to be used by the K-Pos DP system.
8.2.1 Sensors dialog box - Wind page

To display the Wind page, either:
• Select Sensors→Wind,
or
• Press the WIND button.
OK
The OK status for each wind sensor is shown in the corresponding
OK check box. The status for all channels from the wind sensor
must be OK for the check box to be selected. This check box
is for information only.
Enable
Each wind sensor has an associated Enable check box. Selecting
this check box enables the signals from the wind sensor.
Preference
Use these option buttons to select the operator-preferred wind
sensor to be used by the system.
132 301027/C
Sensors
In Use
Indicates the wind sensor currently used to calculate the wind
force acting on the vessel. If no errors are detected in the
Wind sensor measurements, the system will always use the
operator-preferred sensor (see Preference above).
Relative Speed
The displayed wind speed is the measured wind speed relative to
the vessel, not corrected for vessel motion.
Relative Dir.
The displayed wind direction is the measured direction relative
to the vessel heading, not corrected for vessel motion.
Manual
You can manually enter the values for wind speed and wind
direction which the system should use to calculate the wind force
acting on the vessel. To enter values, disable all sensors and click
the Apply button. The In Use check box for Manual input will be
selected, the True Speed and True Dir fields will appear white,
and you may enter values using the keyboard or the Numeric
Entry Keypad dialog box.
True Speed, True Dir
Display the true wind speed and direction. The present mode and
whether or not one or more sensor is enabled, determine which
values are displayed in these fields:
• In Standby mode with one or more wind sensor enabled, the
True Speed and True Dir fields display the same values as
Relative Speed and Relative Dir.
• In any mode other than Standby with one or more wind sensor
enabled, the True Speed and True Dir fields display the true
wind speed and direction values (filtered values).
• In any mode with no wind sensors enabled, the True Speed and
True Dir fields contain the manually-entered values for the
true wind speed and direction.
8.2.2 Wind status lamp

The WIND button has a status lamp which shows the status of
the wind sensors:
• On — At least one wind sensor is enabled and accepted by
the system.
• Flashing — The measurements from one of the enabled wind
sensors are not accepted by the system or an error situation
exists in at least one of the wind sensor channels if only a
single wind sensor has been enabled.
• Off — No wind sensors are enabled.
301027/C 133
8.2.3 Displayed wind information

You can examine the measured values from the wind sensors in
8.2.4 Faulty wind sensors

If measurements from a wind sensor are not accepted by the
system, a message is given with information about the failure.
The message may define the faulty sensor directly; for example:
Wind 1 not ready
Alternatively, it may indicate only that there is a difference
between the measurements from the available sensors. The
difference may be due to a faulty wind sensor. In the latter
situation, you must try to find the faulty sensor by comparing
the received measurements with an alternative source of wind
information.
In any case you should use an alternative source of wind
information to determine which wind sensor that provides the
wind measurements that is most representative for the wind
forces acting on the vessel.
In the following examples it is assumed that two wind sensors
are available, both sensors are enabled and Wind 1 is in use:
• If there is a failure on Wind 2 (the sensor that is not in use),
disable the signals from Wind 2 and rectify the fault.
• If a fault is detected on Wind 1 (the sensor that is in use),
the system will switch to Wind 2 automatically. Disable the
signals from Wind 1 and rectify the fault.
• If there is a failure on a wind sensor and the system cannot
detect which sensor is faulty; for example:
Wind speed difference
Do the following:
1 Check the values from the wind sensors on the Sensors
view and use an alternative source of wind information to
find which sensor is faulty.
2 Disable the faulty sensor and rectify the fault.
When a faulty wind sensor is repaired, you should enable it again.
Note
A wind measurement will be influenced by the location of the
sensor. Differences in measurements can arise naturally. It is
important to use the sensor that is most representative for the
wind forces acting on the vessel.
134 301027/C
Sensors
8.2.5 Rejection of faulty wind data

Faulty jumps in readings from a wind sensor would lead to an
unwanted increase in thrust setpoint. To avoid this, the system
performs the following test:
• A wind speed measurement is rejected by the system if the
wind speed is above a predefined limit (for example 15 m/s)
and increases by more than a predefined value (for example
10 m/s).
• A wind direction measurement is rejected by the system if the
wind speed is above a predefined limit (for example 10 m/s)
and the wind direction changes by more than a predefined
value (for example 60 degrees).
The wind sensor is rejected if more than a predefined number
(for example 15) of consecutive readings are rejected according
to the limits described in the previous paragraphs. The following
alarm is given:
Wind sensor rejected <current speed/direction>
In order to adapt quickly to dynamic change in wind, the input
data to the test is the difference between new measurements,
and low pass filtered speed data with a small time constant (5
seconds).
The filter is reset on three different conditions:
• Continuously reset in Standby mode (to avoid problems
entering/leaving the trainer).
• When sensor Enabled changes from OFF to ON.
• If there is a long time (5 minutes) since ready/OK from the
IO system.
Note
The wind sensor(s) will be rejected if speed is increasing with
more than 10 m/s in Trainer mode (and not in Standby mode). The
situation is resolved by disabling/enabling the rejected sensor.
8.2.6 Operating without wind sensor input

There can be situations where you want to temporarily stop
using the input from the wind sensors, such as during helicopter
operations or when operating close to another large structure
where there may be sudden disturbances of the measured wind. If
you disable all the wind sensors, the system continues to use the
wind speed and direction values that were measured just before
the most recent wind sensor was disabled.
301027/C 135
8.3 Vertical reference sensors (VRS)

At least one vertical reference sensor must be available to
provide the system with roll and pitch information. This
information is used to adjust the measurements received from
the position-reference systems for the vessel’s roll and pitch
motions. If the VRS is equipped with a heave sensor, the heave
information is used for monitoring purposes only.
If VRS information is lost, the system will be unable to
compensate the received position measurements for vessel
motion. The positioning capability of the system can then be
severely degraded.
Vertical reference sensors are enabled and controlled using the
Sensors dialog box - VRS page.
Normally, all the available VRSs will be enabled for use. The
system then receives and compares the signals from all the
VRSs, but uses only one of them. You can specify which VRS
is preferred for use by the system. If no errors are detected
in the VRS measurements, the system will always use the
operator-preferred sensor (for which Preference is selected on the
Sensors dialog box - VRS page).
8.3.1 Sensors dialog box - VRS page

To display the VRS page, either:
• Select Sensors→VRS,
or
• Press the VRS, GYRO or WIND button, depending on which is
available in the system installed, and then, if necessary, click
the VRS page tab.
136 301027/C
Sensors
OK
The OK status for each VRS is shown in the corresponding OK
check box. The status for all channels from the VRS must be
OK for the check box to be selected. This check box is for
information only.
Enable
Each VRS has an associated Enable check box. Selecting this
check box enables the signals from the VRS.
Preference
These option buttons allow you to specify which VRS is
preferred for use by the system.
In Use
The VRS that is currently used by the system is indicated in the
In Use check box.
Pitch
The measured pitch from the VRS.
Roll
The measured roll from the VRS.
Heave
The measured heave from the VRS.
8.3.2 VRS status lamp

The VRS button has a status lamp which shows the status of the
VRS:
• On — At least one VRS is enabled and accepted by the
system.
301027/C 137
• Flashing — The measurements from one of the enabled VRSs

are not accepted by the system or an error situation exists in
at least one of the VRS channels if only a single VRS has
been enabled.
• Off — No VRSs are enabled.
8.3.3 Displayed VRS information

You can examine the measured values from the VRS in more
detail on the Sensors view (see Sensors view on page 327).
8.3.4 Faulty VRS

If measurements from a VRS are not accepted by the system, or if
at least one of the channels for a VRS is faulty, a message is given
with information about the failure. The message may define the
faulty VRS directly; for example: VRS not ready. Alternatively,
it may indicate only that there is a difference between the
measurements from the available VRSs. In the latter situation,
you must try to find the faulty sensor by comparing the received
measurements with an alternative source of VRS information.
In the following examples it is assumed that two VRSs are
available, that both are enabled, and that VRS 1 is in use:
• If there is a failure on VRS 2 (the VRS that is not in use),
disable the signals from VRS 2 and rectify the fault.
• If a fault is detected on VRS 1 (the VRS that is in use),
the system will switch to VRS 2 automatically. Disable the
signals from VRS 1 and rectify the fault.
• If there is a failure on a VRS and the system cannot detect
which VRS is faulty; for example,
VRS pitch difference
Do the following:
1 Check the values from the VRSs on the Sensors view
and use alternative VRS information to find which VRS
is faulty.
2 Disable the faulty VRS and rectify the fault.
When a faulty VRS is repaired, you should enable it again.
8.4 Speed sensors

Speed measurements can be used as an addition to position
measurements to improve the vessel speed control.
The speed information is received from two sources, the Doppler
Log sensors and the GPS speed sensors. You can enable available
speed sensors or enter a manual alongships vessel speed value
using the Sensors dialog box - Speed page.
138 301027/C
Sensors
In high speed operations all enabled sensors will normally, unless

a sensor has failed, be used by the system. It is recommended
to also enable Manual speed input since the Manual value then
will be updated based on the In Use sensors. Should all sensors
be lost, you then have an initial Manual value that reflects the
real situation.
8.4.1 Sensors dialog box - Speed page

To display the Speed page, either:
• Select Sensors→Speed,
or
• Press one of the GYRO, WIND or VRS buttons, depending
on which is available in the system installed, and then click
the Speed page tab.
Doppler Log
Enable
Select this check box to enable the Doppler Log speed sensor.
You will not be able to select this check box if the Doppler Log is
not OK (the check box is shown dimmed).
In Use
The sensors that are currently used by the system is indicated in
the In Use check box. If a sensor fails, it will no longer be in use,
and this check box is cleared.
Along
Shows the measured alongships vessel speed.
301027/C 139
Athwart
Shows the measured athwartships vessel speed.
The Doppler Log speed is marked with G or W depending on
the type of speed output:
• G — Speed over ground
• W — Speed through water
GPS Speed
Enable
Select this check box to enable the GPS speed sensor. You will
not be able to select this check box if the measured GPS speed is
not OK (the check box is shown dimmed).
In Use
The sensor that is currently used by the system is indicated in the
In Use check box. If a sensor fails, it will no longer be in use,
and this check box is cleared.
Speed
Shows the measured vessel speed.
Course
Shows the measured vessel course.
Note
When a failure occurs in the GPS speed and/or course signals,
the Speed and Course boxes are shown empty.
Manual
Select this check box to enable Manual speed. In high speed
operations it is recommended to enable Manual when using
speed sensors to have an initial Manual value that reflects the
real situation.
In Use
If the manual value is currently used by the system, it is indicated
in the In Use check box. This check box is for information only.
Along
When no speed sensors are enabled, you can enter a value in
this field. This field is not available when one or more sensors
are enabled.
If you try to enter a value that is too high, a message informing
you about the legal range is displayed. You will have to change
the input value to continue.
Used Speed
Shows the vessel speed used by the system. This is an average,
filtered value of the combined measurements from the In Use
speed sensors or manual input.
140 301027/C
Sensors
Along
Shows the used alongships vessel speed.
Athwart
Shows the used athwartships vessel speed. This will be zero
when no speed sensors are enabled.
8.4.2 Displayed speed information

You can examine the measured values from the speed sensors in
8.5 Draught sensors

For optimum positioning performance, the system must have
accurate information regarding the vessel’s draught at all times.
The vessel draught can either be specified by the operator or
measured by a draught sensor.
The source of draught information is selected and controlled
using the Sensors dialog box - Draught page.
If the information from the draught sensors is correct and reliable,
then this should be used in preference to manually-entered or
fixed values.
8.5.1 Sensors dialog box - Draught page

To display the Draught page, either:
• Select Sensors→Draught,
or
• Press one of the GYRO, WIND or VRS buttons, depending
on which is available in the system installed, and then click
the Draught page tab.
301027/C 141
The content of this dialog box will vary according to system

configuration. The dialog box in the system installed on your
vessel may display only some of the items shown in this example.
Sensor
When Sensor is selected, you can specify the draught sensor
that is to be used. Each draught sensor has an associated Enable
check box. Selecting this check box enables the signals from this
draught sensor for use by the system. If more than one sensor is
enabled, the system uses the average of all the enabled sensors.
If Sensor is selected but no sensors are enabled, the Manual value
is used by the system.
Manual
When Manual is selected, the draught value entered under Fixed
Draught is used by the system. If you try to enter a value that
is too high or too low, the value is rejected by the system and
a message informing you about the legal range for draught is
displayed.
Operation
When Operation is selected, the predefined operational draught
value is used by the system.
Transit
When Transit is selected, the predefined transit draught value is
used by the system.
142 301027/C
Sensors
Used Draught
Shows the draught value that is currently used by the system.
This field is for information only.
8.6 Rate Of Turn sensors

Rate Of Turn (ROT) measurements can be used to improve the
heading control of the vessel. This is useful when a very accurate
heading control is required during high-speed sailing, or when
a vessel has a hull shape that makes it difficult to control the
heading. Measurements of the vessel’s Rate Of Turn are received
from the gyrocompasses, or a dedicated ROT sensor. The ROT
sensors should be enabled to allow this information to be used
by the K-Pos DP system.
ROT sensors are enabled and controlled using the Sensors dialog
box - Rate Of Turn page.
8.6.1 Sensors dialog box - Rate Of Turn

page
To display the Rate Of Turn page, either:
• Select Sensors→Rate Of Turn,
or
• Press one of the GYRO, WIND, or VRS buttons, depending on
which is available in the system installed, and then click the
Rate Of Turn page tab.
301027/C 143
OK
The OK status for each sensor is shown in the matching OK
check box. This check box is for information only.
Enable
Each sensor has an associated Enable check box. You enable
the sensor by selecting this box. The system will automatically
disable a sensor that is not OK. The Enable check box will be
cleared and will appear dimmed.
In Use
The sensor that is currently used by the system is indicated
in the In Use check box. If no errors are detected in the ROT
sensor measurements, the system will use all the OK and enabled
sensors.
Rate Of Turn
Shows the measured Rate Of Turn.
144 301027/C
Position information
9 POSITION INFORMATION
9.1 Handling position information .................................145
9.2 Position Presentation dialog box..............................146
9.3 Datum Details dialog box ........................................149
9.4 Local N/E Properties dialog box..............................150
9.5 UTM Properties dialog box .....................................151
9.6 State plane zone .......................................................152
9.7 Methods for enabling position-reference
systems.....................................................................153
9.8 Panel buttons............................................................153
9.9 Reference System Settings dialog box.....................153
9.10 Reference System dialog box...................................157
9.11 Reference System Properties dialog box .................161
9.12 Coordinate systems ..................................................164
9.13 Tests on position measurements...............................166
9.14 Procedures for enabling position-reference
systems.....................................................................172
9.15 Changing the reference origin..................................173
9.16 Position dropout .......................................................174
9.1 Handling position information

Two dialog boxes are used to set up the required conditions
for handling and conversion of position information from the
position-reference systems and to and from the display (see
Figure 30):
• The Position Presentation dialog box can be used to select
the datum and coordinate system for display of position
information. See Position Presentation dialog box on
page 146.
• The Reference System Properties dialog box can be used to
provide information about the input position data from each
reference system. See Reference System Properties dialog
box on page 161. The following characteristics can be
specified:
– Input datum.
– Offset of antenna or sensor head from the vessel’s Midships
position.
– Update period and accuracy.
Certain position-reference systems provide a UTM position
without the required format information which must then be
entered by the operator. See UTM Properties on page 162.
301027/C 145
Figure 30 Dialog boxes for handling position information
9.2 Position Presentation dialog box

The Position Presentation dialog box allows you to select the
display format for positions.
To display this dialog box, select View→Position Presentation.
146 301027/C
This dialog box changes appearance according to the selected

Co-ordinate system.
Datum
The available datums can be selected from the drop-down list.
If Local-datum is selected, the Details button must be clicked to
define all the required transformation parameters.
Details
Click this button to call up a dialog box which deals with
definition of datum transformation parameters. See Datum
Details dialog box on page 149.
Co-ordinate system
Select the coordinate system to be used for displaying position
information.
Local N/E
Displays positions in a local north/east coordinate system. The

positions are presented as North/East coordinates relative to the
301027/C 147
local origin point. If you select this option you can (if configured)
select between a system selected or operator-specified position of
origin (see Local N/E Properties dialog box on page 150).
The length unit to be used is specified by the Length Unit option.
UTM
Displays positions in the Universal Transverse Mercator

projection. Positions are represented by north and east distance
and UTM Zone (with compensation for false northing and
false easting if appropriate; see UTM Properties dialog box on
page 151). If you select this option, you must also select the
datum that is to be used for the conversion from the internal
coordinate system to these coordinates.
Geographic
Displays positions in a global geographic coordinate system.

Positions are presented as latitude and longitude in the format
specified by the Format option. If you select this option, you
must also select the datum that is to be used for the conversion
from the internal coordinate representation to these coordinates.
148 301027/C
US State Plane
Displays positions in the US State Plane coordinate system.

Positions are represented by north and east distance to the origin
of the State Plane Zone (see State plane zone on page 152). If
you select this option you must also select the datum that is to be
used for the conversion from the internal coordinate system to
these coordinates, typically NAD-27 or NAD-83.
Length Unit
The Length Unit part of the dialog box changes according to the
coordinate system selected. For Local N/E, UTM and US State
Plane presentations, the system allows you to select the length
unit to be used. For Geographic presentation, the system allows
you to select the display format for latitude and longitude.

The most appropriate display presentation for position
information depends on the operational situation. For example,
if you are using only a local position-reference system such as
HPR, then you will normally use a Local N/E presentation.
If UTM, Geographic or US State Plane presentation is selected
for position coordinates, a presentation datum for the displayed
positions must be selected because a global position must be
related to a specific datum if it is to be unambiguous.
Position-presentation in global coordinates may be inaccurate
when a local position-reference system is providing the reference
origin.
9.3 Datum Details dialog box

A datum describes the earth as an ellipsoid using two parameters:
Semimajor Axis and Flattening.
301027/C 149
The Datum Details dialog box contains the Semimajor Axis and
Flattening values and datum transformation parameters for
conversion from WGS84 to the selected datum.
To display this dialog box, click the Details button on the
Position Presentation dialog box.
For Local-datum all fields are editable, and you must define
all the required transformation parameters (see also Reference
System Properties dialog box on page 161).
Translation
The required translation from WGS84 to the selected datum.
Rotation
The required rotation from WGS84 to the selected datum.
Scale
The required scaling from WGS84 to the selected datum.
Semimajor Axis
The semi major axis of the earth ellipsoid for the selected datum.
Flattening
The inverse flattening of the earth ellipsoid for the selected
datum.
9.4 Local N/E Properties dialog box

To display the Local N/E Properties dialog box, ensure that the
Co-ordinate system - Local N/E option button on the Position
Presentation dialog box is selected and then click the Local N/E
Properties button.
150 301027/C
Use Reference System Origin

Allows you to select between a system selected or
operator-specified position of origin.
When this check box is selected, the position data of the reference
origin (see The reference origin on page 165) is subtracted from
the position information received by the system.
Datum and Position of Origin are unavailable when the check
box is selected.
Leave the check box cleared if you want to use an
operator-specified position of origin.
Datum
Select the required datum for position of origin (on this dialog
box only).
Position of Origin
Enter coordinates of the position of origin.
Select the format of the position of origin (in this dialog box
only), Geographic, UTM or US State Plane.

An operator-specified position of origin cannot differ from the
actual position by more than 20 km. If you try to enter a position
of origin that is too far from the actual position, a message box is
displayed informing you about the error.
9.5 UTM Properties dialog box

To display the UTM Properties dialog box, ensure that the
Co-ordinate system - UTM option button on the Position
Presentation dialog box is selected and then click the UTM
Properties button.
301027/C 151
False Easting
When UTM presentation is selected, to avoid the presentation
of negative coordinates, you can specify that a fixed offset of
500 000 m is to be added to the east/west component of a UTM
position before it is displayed.
False Northing
When UTM presentation is selected, you can specify that a
fixed offset of 10 000 000 m is to be added to the north/south
component of a UTM position before it is displayed (10 000 000
m is the approximate distance from the Equator to the North Pole
in a UTM grid). This avoids the display of negative coordinates
for positions in the southern hemisphere. False Northing is
normally only applicable on the southern hemisphere.
Zone options
Automatic zone calculation
Select this box to have the UTM zone calculated automatically
from the geodetic position measurements.
Zone
The required system UTM zone (not available if the UTM zone
is calculated automatically).
Zone offset
Allows you to apply a fixed offset to the received longitude
degrees when calculating the UTM zone of a position. You can
offset the system UTM zone up to ±3°.
9.6 State plane zone

If US State Plane is selected as the Co-ordinate system on the
Position Presentation dialog box, the State Plane Zone drop-down
list allows you to select the relevant state plane zone to be used.
152 301027/C
SPCS27 and SPCS83 are defined for NAD27 and NAD83

respectively. The proper datum should therefore also be set, i.e.
select NAD27 as datum when using SPCS27 and select NAD83
when using SPCS83.
9.7 Methods for enabling position-reference

systems
The K-Pos DP system provides the following methods for
enabling and disabling position-reference systems:
• Panel buttons
• One of the following, depending on system configuration:
– Reference System Settings dialog box
– Reference System dialog box
For information about all the options available from these
dialog boxes, see Reference System Settings dialog box on
page 153 and Reference System dialog box on page 157.
9.8 Panel buttons

The SENSORS button group contains buttons which enable or
disable each of the available position-reference systems. Each
button has a status lamp which shows the status of the reference
system:
• Off — Disabled
• Flashing — Enabled and calibrating, enabled and calibrated
but rejected by the DP, or not providing data
• On — Enabled and accepted (acceptable position
measurements are being received)
9.9 Reference System Settings dialog box

To display the Reference System Settings dialog box, select
Sensors→Reference System Settings.
301027/C 153
Position Properties
Select the required Datum for position presentation to be used
on this dialog box.
Select the format of the position of origin, either Geographic,
UTM or US State Plane.
Weight
You can change the position-reference systems relative weight.
Normal
Provides standard relative weight between the enabled
position-reference systems, i.e. all systems with equal estimated
variance have equal weights.
Reduced GPS
Reduces the influence from the measured GPS positions relative
to measurements from other position-reference systems.
Reduced GPS weight is especially important if you have an
oscillating GPS system, as often will be the case in equatorial
waters due to ionospheric degradation of GPS. In this way a
position-reference system with slow update rate, such as an LBL
system, will have greater influence on the model than a GPS
system with faster update rate.
154 301027/C
Example showing typical relative weights when using 2 GPSs

and 1 LBL with similar accuracy levels:
GPS-1 GPS-2 HPR
Normal 0.33 0.33 0.33
Reduced GPS 0.10 0.10 0.80
The relative weights used are shown on the Refsys view (see
Refsys view on page 317).
Acceptance Limits
The acceptance limit for the Prediction Test (see Prediction
test on page 167) and indirectly also the Median Test can be
changed.
Narrow
Narrow limit. Corresponds to a Minimum Prediction Error circle
with a small radius. The radius may still increase due to increased
noise in the position-reference system. Narrow is recommended
when operating in calm weather and with requirements for
accurate station-keeping. If all available (or the dominating)
position reference exhibit an erroneous drift in position, the
system(s) will also be rejected at an early stage before the vessel
is significantly affected by the wrong measurements.
Normal
Medium limit. The same Minimum Prediction Error limit as for
Narrow is used. There is an additional feedback mechanism
where the actual deviation from the model is used to increase
the Prediction Error limit up to a maximum of 2 to 3 times
the smallest radius. Normal should be applied in situations
where there is a chance that the DP model does not follow the
actual movement of the vessel. This is especially relevant when
operating in rough sea. It is also applicable for a vessel operating
with another vessel alongside. A negative side-effect of this
setting is that the DP system will, to a larger extent than with
the Narrow setting, tend to follow drifting position-reference
systems.
Wide
Wide limit. A Minimum Prediction Error circle with an increased
radius compared to the other two settings is used. The same
feedback mechanism as for Normal is used, and the maximum
value of the Prediction Error is also increased. Wide is suitable,
for example, for sailing in Mixed/Joystick mode at high speed.
Median Test
The settings of the Median Test (see Median test on page 169)
can be changed.
301027/C 155
Off
Turns off the median testing. This is indicated with the text OFF
in the Median Test field on the Refsys view, and by removal of
the median test limit circle from the plot on the Refsys view.
Warning
Turns on the median testing. When selected, a deviation warning
is given if the difference between the position data from a specific
position-reference system and the median of all online reference
systems exceeds a preset warning limit.
Warning can be preferable compared to Warning and Reject
(below) in some instances. For example, when operating with
two GPSs and one or two HPR systems, and the GPSs have
similar failures, Warning and Reject could lead to rejection of the
HPR by the median test.
Warning and Reject
Turns on the median testing. When selected, a reject warning is
given if the difference between the position data from a specific
systems exceeds a preset combined warning and reject limit. The
position-reference system is rejected.
The median test limit circle is shown on the plot on the Refsys
view, together with the limit value in the Median Test field.
Set System Mode and Origin
Reset
Click this button to reset the System Origin and to deselect all
position sources of the corresponding position-reference system.
ID
Select the position sources to use for the required
position-reference systems from the drop-down lists.
System Mode
The Accepted check boxes show which position-reference
systems and/or individual position sources are currently enabled
and accepted. The Monitor, Enable and Disable option buttons
are used for selecting position-reference systems and individual
position sources to monitor, enable and disable, respectively.
A reference system enabled for monitoring will not influence the
DP model (zero weight), and it will not be included as an active
reference system for the median test. Apart from this all other
reference system checking is active.
System Origin
The operator may choose to fix the reference origin of one
or more reference systems. A reference system with a fixed
reference origin will not be calibrated towards the model. Fixed
reference origins can be specified by typing in the coordinates
156 301027/C
and selecting Fix. This is useful when the reference origin is

known, for example the position of an HPR or LBL transponder
relative to a BOP or an Artemis Fix antenna.
Mobile
Position sources can be specified to be mobile by selecting the
corresponding check boxes.
9.10 Reference System dialog box

The Reference System dialog box has the following three tabbed
pages:
• Enable — used for selecting position-reference systems to
enable and monitor
• Weight — used for changing the position-reference systems’
relative weight
• Validation — used for selecting the acceptance limits for the
Prediction test and switching the Median test on/off
9.10.1 Enable page

To display the Enable page, select Sensors→Reference System.
Accepted
The check boxes show which position-reference systems are
currently accepted.
Monitor
Check boxes for selecting position-reference systems to monitor.
A reference system enabled for monitoring will not influence the
DP model (zero weight), and it will not be included as an active
301027/C 157
reference system for the median test. Apart from this all other
reference system checking is active.
Enable
Check boxes to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) each of
the available position-reference systems.
The Monitor and Enable check boxes for each position-reference
system are mutually exclusive. If the Monitor check box
of an enabled position-reference system is selected, this
position-reference system is disabled. If the Enable check box
of a monitored position-reference system is selected, Monitor is
deselected for this position-reference system.
9.10.2 Weight page

To display the Weight page, select Sensors→Reference System and
then, click the Weight page tab.
Normal
Provides standard relative weight between the enabled
position-reference systems, i.e. all systems with equal estimated
variance have equal weights.
Reduced GPS Weight
Reduces the influence from the measured GPS positions relative
to measurements from other position-reference systems.
Reduced GPS weight is especially important if you have an
oscillating GPS system, as often will be the case in equatorial
waters due to ionospheric degradation of GPS. In this way a
position-reference system with slow update rate, such as an LBL
system, will have greater influence on the model than a GPS
system with faster update rate.
158 301027/C
Example showing typical relative weights when using 2 GPSs

and 1 LBL with similar accuracy levels:
GPS-1 GPS-2 HPR
Normal 0.33 0.33 0.33
Reduced GPS 0.10 0.10 0.80
The relative weights used are shown on the Refsys view (see
9.10.3 Validation page

To display the Validation page, select Sensors→Reference
System and then, click the Validation page tab.
Acceptance Limits
The acceptance limit for the Prediction Test (see Prediction
test on page 167) and indirectly also the Median Test can be
changed.
Narrow
Narrow limit. Corresponds to a Minimum Prediction Error circle
with a small radius. The radius may still increase due to increased
noise in the position-reference system. Narrow is recommended
when operating in calm weather and with requirements for
accurate station-keeping. If all available (or the dominating)
position reference exhibit an erroneous drift in position, the
system(s) will also be rejected at an early stage before the vessel
is significantly affected by the wrong measurements.
301027/C 159
Normal
Medium limit. The same Minimum Prediction Error limit as for
Narrow is used. There is an additional feedback mechanism
where the actual deviation from the model is used to increase
the Prediction Error limit up to a maximum of 2 to 3 times
the smallest radius. Normal should be applied in situations
where there is a chance that the DP model does not follow the
actual movement of the vessel. This is especially relevant when
operating in rough sea. It is also applicable for a vessel operating
with another vessel alongside. A negative side-effect of this
setting is that the DP system will, to a larger extent than with
the Narrow setting, tend to follow drifting position-reference
systems.
Wide
Wide limit. A Minimum Prediction Error circle with an increased
radius compared to the other two settings is used. The same
feedback mechanism as for Normal is used, and the maximum
value of the Prediction Error is also increased. Wide is suitable,
for example, for sailing in Mixed/Joystick mode at high speed.
Median Test
The settings of the Median Test (see Median test on page 169)
can be changed.
Off
Turns off the median testing. This is indicated with the text OFF
in the Median Test field on the Refsys view, and by removal of
the median test limit circle from the plot on the Refsys view.
Warning
Turns on the median testing. When selected, a deviation warning
is given if the difference between the position data from a specific
systems exceeds a preset warning limit.
Warning can be preferable compared to Warning and Reject
(below) in some instances. For example, when operating with
two GPSs and one or two HPR systems, and the GPSs have
similar failures, Warning and Reject could lead to rejection of the
HPR by the median test.
Warning and Reject
Turns on the median testing. When selected, a reject warning is
given if the difference between the position data from a specific
systems exceeds a preset combined warning and reject limit. The
position-reference system is rejected.
The median test limit circle is shown on the plot on the Refsys
view, together with the limit value in the Median Test field.
160 301027/C
9.11 Reference System Properties dialog box

The Reference System Properties dialog box allows you to
change the characteristics, update period and accuracy of a
However, the characteristics of the position-reference system can
only be defined when it is not enabled for use or monitoring,
whereas the update period and accuracy can be specified while in
operation.
To display this dialog box, select Sensors→Reference System
Properties.
Reference system
Select the name of the reference system from the list box. If you
have changed the properties of a reference system, and then
selected another system from the list, a dialog box is displayed
asking if you want to save the changes.
Datum
For a global reference system, the datum in which the position
measurements are received. If this datum is different from the
selected system datum (WGS84), conversion to the system datum
will be performed.
If position information from a global reference system is based
on a predefined datum other than those present in the Datum
drop down list, you can select Local-datum from this drop-down
list. You must then use the Position Presentation dialog box
and Datum Details dialog box (see Position Presentation dialog
box on page 146 and Datum Details dialog box on page 149,
respectively) to define the required transformation parameters.
CG Offset
Allows you to specify the offset (Ahead, Stbd and Down) from
the antenna or sensor head on the vessel to the vessel’s center of
gravity (Midships). The received position information is then
adjusted for this offset.
301027/C 161
Note
Some position-reference systems have internal adjustments to
CG. For these systems, the received position information should
not be adjusted by the K-Pos DP system.
Expected values
Allows you to specify an Update Period and an Accuracy for the
selected position-reference system. The Update Period is mostly
used for HPR systems. To avoid unnecessary time-out warnings,
you can extend the Update Period and thus the time before a
warning is issued. The Accuracy value is used for calibration
purposes and when testing the accuracy of the position-reference
system. If calibration fails, increase the value to ease calibration
of a position-reference system. Note that the higher the value
entered in the Accuracy text box, the wider the limits for the tests
on position-reference systems.
Details
Clicking this button opens up an extension of the Reference
System Properties dialog box (see Position Presentation dialog
box on page 146). This expansion allows you to set up a quality
filter, defined as a general satellite navigation system filter for
both GPS, GLONASS and GNSS reference systems.
The Details button is only present in the Reference System
Properties dialog box when one of the above satellite navigation
reference systems has been selected in the list box.

The Reference System Properties dialog box can be used to define
the input conversion that is required for each position-reference
system:
• For global reference systems, you must specify the datum that
is used by that system so that the position information can be
converted to the selected system datum.
• For global reference systems on UTM format (for example
Konmap), you must specify whether the position information
is received with false northing and/or false easting so that
these can be removed. The UTM zone must also be specified.
• For all reference systems, you can specify the offset from the
antenna or sensor head on the vessel to the vessel’s Midships
position, so that the position information can be adjusted for
this offset.
9.11.2 UTM Properties

Certain position-reference systems provide a UTM position
without the required format information which must then be
entered by the operator.
162 301027/C
All UTM positions are assumed to be in the format (zone, false

easting and false northing) specified by the operator.
If a global position-reference system on UTM format (for
example KonMap) is selected in the Reference system drop-down
list in the Reference system Properties dialog box, the Details
button is replaced with the UTM Properties group box.
UTM Properties
Zone
Type in a number, or click the up- or down arrow to enter the
correct UTM zone.
False Easting
Select this check box if the position-reference system provides
position measurements which include false easting.
False Northing
Select this check box if the position-reference system provides
position measurements which include false northing.
9.11.3 Quality Filter Actions

With a satellite navigation system selected, and the Details button
in the Reference system Properties dialog box clicked to show
the quality filter, a number of filter parameters can be specified
specifically for the selected system. For each filter parameter, a
Quality Filter Action, which can be either None, Warning (data
used, warning given) or Alarm (data rejected, alarm given), can
be specified.
301027/C 163
No differential correction
Allows you to select a filter action if no differential data is
available/received. This is considered to be an important
parameter, and a warning or an alarm must always be given. It is
therefore not possible to select None as an action.
Min number of satellites (≥3)
Allows you to type in the minimum number of satellites in
the corresponding text box and to select filter action. The
number of satellites you enter must be larger than or equal to
the preconfigured number displayed on the dialog box (3 in the
example shown).
Max. HDOP (1.0-10.0)
Allows you to type in a maximum value for the HDOP
(Horizontal Dilution Of Precision) in the text box and to select
filter action. The HDOP is a figure of merit for the quality of the
derived position and clock bias estimates. This figure is based on
the geometry of the satellite constellation. The more spread out
the satellite positions are, the lower the HDOP becomes. Low
figures result in low position and clock bias errors.
Time freeze detection
Allows you to select a filter action for the UTC (Universal Time
Coordinated, i.e. common standard time) freeze detect function.
This quality filter function only applies when receiving telegrams
containing clock data.
9.12 Coordinate systems

9.12.1 Global and local position-reference
systems
Position information from position-reference systems may be
received by the K-Pos DP system in many different forms:
• Global position-reference systems such as GPS provide
position information as Latitude and Longitude in a geodetic
coordinate system. The applicable datum must be known (for
example: WGS84, ED87).
• Some global position-reference systems provide positions
in the UTM projection (a flat surface projection, defined by
a UTM zone and north and east distances from the 0-point
of this zone - see UTM Properties dialog box on page 151).
The applicable datum must be known (for example: WGS84,
ED87).
• Local position-reference systems such as HPR provide
positions in local Cartesian coordinates (defined by
two-dimensional measurement of the north/south (X) and
east/west (Y) distances from a locally defined reference origin,
such as the position of a transponder).
164 301027/C
Whatever types of position-reference systems are enabled, all

position input is converted into a geographic system using
WGS84 as a “system datum”.
9.12.2 System datum

The controller always uses an internal geographic coordinate
system, with a specified system datum, WGS84.
• All position information from global reference systems which
use a different datum are converted internally to WGS 84. (To
select the datum to be used for display of position information,
see Position Presentation dialog box on page 146.)
• Position information in UTM format is converted to
geographic coordinates.
9.12.3 The reference origin

Each position-reference system provides position measurements
relative to a known reference point specific for that reference
system.
The reference point of the first position-reference system selected
and accepted for use with the system, becomes the reference
origin (the origin in the internal coordinate system). Position
information from any other reference systems is then calibrated
according to this coordinate system.
This coordinate system remains as the reference origin until
all position-reference systems are de-selected and a new
position-reference system is selected as the reference origin.
Selecting a particular position-reference system as the reference
origin does not mean that the K-Pos DP system treats it as being
better or more reliable than any other position-reference system.
It concerns only the location of the reference origin.
The reference origin selected should be the one most appropriate
to your operational requirements.
The position of the reference origin is indicated on the Posplot
view (if within the range of the view). The reference system
defining the reference origin is marked with an asterisk on the
Refsys view.
Note
Recalibrating the origin reference system will give new
coordinates for the reference origin system (can vary from
zero) unless the reference system/transponder is set to be fixed
(see System Origin in Reference System Settings dialog box on
page 153).
301027/C 165
9.13 Tests on position measurements

The K-Pos DP system performs a series of tests on each
position-reference system to check that their position
measurements are accurate enough for use. The following online
tests are performed:
• A Freeze test rejects repeated measurements. If the variation
in the measured position is less than a system set limit over a
given period of time, the position-reference system is rejected.
• A Variance test monitors the measurement variance and
compares the variance value with a calculated limit.
• A Prediction test detects sudden jumps or large systematic
deviations in the measured position. The limit for the
prediction test is a function of the estimated position in the
Vessel Model and the actual measurement accuracy.
• A Divergence test gives a warning of systematic deviations
and/or slow-drift (before the system is rejected by the
prediction test).
• A Median test detects position measurements that differ
from the median position value with more than a predefined
limit. The test is mainly designed to detect slowly drifting
position-reference systems.
If the results of the prediction, median and variance tests suggest
that the position measurements from a particular reference system
are not accurate, then that system’s measurements are not used.
The characteristics of the active position-reference systems are
shown on the Refsys view (see Refsys view on page 317).
9.13.1 Standard deviation of position

measurements
For all position-reference systems, circles are placed around a
representative sample of position measurements. The size of the
circles relates to the spread, in metres, of the samples of position
measurements. The radii of the circles correspond to the standard
deviation of the measurements of each position-reference system.
The standard deviations are also trended on the Refsys view (see
9.13.2 Freeze test

If a position-reference system has an internal error causing the
same measurements to be continuously sent to the Vessel Model,
the system could, if no precautions were taken, mistake the data
for good and stable measurements.
The freeze test rejects repeated measurements. The K-Pos DP
system treats repeated reports of the same position from one
position-reference system with caution. The position-reference
166 301027/C
system is monitored and its input rejected if the variation in

its position measurements is less than a predefined limit over a
given time period. The following alarm message is displayed in
the Event List window:
Reference position frozen
You should disable the frozen position-reference system.
Note
By configuration, the freeze test is disabled for some
position-reference systems (usually GPS/Artemis) due to the
resolution in the data from these position-reference systems.
9.13.3 Variance, weight and the Variance

test
The K-Pos DP system calculates a variance for each of the
position-reference systems in use.
The system assigns different weightings to each position-reference
system, based on its calculated variance. In this way, the system
is able to place more emphasis on the position-reference systems
that are providing the best measurements. The higher the
system’s variance, the lower its weighting factor.
The following Warning Message is displayed in the Event List
window if the variance of a position-reference system exceeds
a system-set limit:
Reference high noise
The position-reference system is not rejected in this event, but the
K-Pos DP system places little emphasis on the position-reference
system in question.
The variance test detects if the variance in the measured values
exceeds the reject limit. The variance reject limit is based on
the expected variance of the position-reference system. The
following Warning Message is displayed in the Event List
window when a position-reference system is rejected due to too
high variance:
Reference high variance
You should disable the position-reference system if the event of
high variance is recurring. No corrective actions are necessary if
the problem is intermittent only.
9.13.4 Prediction test

The prediction test detects sudden jumps in the measured
position, and immediately rejects those that lie outside the limits,
see Figure 31 on page 168. The test will also reject data that
301027/C 167
drift away from the Vessel Model’s predictions. The limit for the
Prediction test is a function of the actual measurement accuracy
(calculated variance).
Figure 31 Prediction test

POSITION N/E
Rejected measurement
Rejection limit
Model prediction
Measurement
Rejection limit
TIME
(CD3293)
If the Prediction test limits are exceeded, the following Warning

Message is displayed in the Event List window:
Reference Prediction Error
When this Warning Message is displayed, you should verify that
the correct position-reference system is rejected. You can then
disable the position-reference system that causes the prediction
error.
The prediction error limit of the most accurate position-reference
system at any time, called the Minimum Prediction Error Limit,
is displayed on the Refsys view.
Irrespective of the accuracy of a position-reference system, the
prediction error limit is usually not set to less than 4 m. This is
done to avoid rejecting accurate position-reference systems.
9.13.5 Divergence test

When two or more position-reference systems are in use,
this slow drift test detects when measurements from one
position-reference system differ from the other(s). The limit is
taken as 70 % of the prediction error limit.
The purpose of the test is to give an early indication of systematic
errors before the position-reference system is rejected by the
prediction test. This test only warns the operator, and does not
automatically reject data. The following Warning Message is
displayed in the Event List window:
Reference high offset
168 301027/C
When this Warning Message is displayed, you should examine

which position-reference system is drifting using the Refsys
view (see Refsys view on page 317). Recalibrate or disable the
position-reference system that causes the high offset warning.
9.13.6 Median test

The median test can be performed when three or more
position-reference systems are in use. The median position is
computed from the filtered measurements that are independent of
the Vessel Model.
The Median test is primarily intended to reject slowly drifting
position-reference systems. Unlike the prediction test, the
median test is independent of the K-Pos DP model. This implies
that a position-reference system can be rejected even though its
measurements do not deviate from the Vessel Model, as can be
the case with slowly drifting position-reference systems.
Figure 32 Median test

POSITION Measurement
NORTH from system A
Reject limit
around total
median line
North
Median
line
Measurement
from system B
Measurement
from system C
POSITION
(CD2971) EAST
When the Median test is active, a blue circle with radius equal to
the Median Test Limit and with center at the median value of all
positions given by the position-reference systems, is displayed
on the Refsys view. The Median Test Limit is taken as 80 % of
the Minimum Prediction Error Limit.
The operator may choose to reject an inaccurate position-reference
system, or to only have a warning displayed.
The following Warning Message is displayed in the Event List
window when a position-reference system is rejected:
Reference median rejected
301027/C 169
When this Warning Message is displayed, you should verify

that the correct position-reference system is rejected. The
position-reference system that is verified to be in error must be
disabled. If the reference system is not disabled, this may lead
to rejection of a potentially more accurate reference system by
the Prediction test.
If measurements from more than one position-reference system
are outside the Median Test Limit, only the system with the
longest distance to the Median position is rejected. This system
will take part in the Median testing in the next sample (unless
it is disabled by the operator).
In a situation with several drifting position-reference systems,
disabling of a reference system may lead to a sudden change in
the Median position, as illustrated in Figure 33.
170 301027/C
Figure 33 Disabling a drifting position-reference system causes

the Median position to change
301027/C 171
9.14 Procedures for enabling position-reference

systems
origin. Position information from any other reference systems is
then calibrated according to this system.
9.14.1 Enabling the first position-reference

system
Before enabling the first position-reference system, ensure that
the vessel speed is as low as possible.
If the system has been in Joystick mode for more than a few
minutes without an enabled position-reference system, first go
to Standby mode and then back to Joystick mode to reset the
Vessel Model.
1 Ensure that the required gyrocompasses are enabled.
2 Ensure that the required position-reference system is active
and available.
3 Enable the position-reference system.
• An initial calibration of the position-reference system
is performed.
• The status lamp for the selected position-reference system
will flash during the calibration process.
4 Check that the status lamp of the selected position-reference
system button becomes steadily lit to indicate that acceptable
position measurements are being received.
5 Check that the following information message is displayed
in the Event List window:
Reference origin <system><vessel pos. north><vessel pos. east>
• The origin of this position-reference system is now used
as the reference origin.
6 Allow the Vessel Model to stabilise before enabling any
additional position-reference systems.
9.14.2 Enabling other position-reference

systems
The other position-reference systems that are enabled can be in a
monitoring state. This is indicated on the Refsys view, here you
will see the status for these systems as Mon Online in the Refsys
view. To change the status from monitoring to enabled for other
reference systems:
1 Enable the other position-reference systems by clicking on
the Enable check-box for the system you want to use.
172 301027/C
• The position measurements from the selected

position-reference systems are calibrated against the
reference origin.
• The button status lamps for the selected position-reference
systems will flash during the calibration process (up to
20 seconds).
2 Check that the status lamps of the selected position-reference
systems become steadily lit, or that the status shows Online
in the Refsys view, indicating that acceptable position
measurements are being received and that the calibration
process was successful. The following information message
should be displayed in the Event List window for each
system:
Calibration OK <system><vessel pos. north><vessel pos. east>
3 If the variation in the position measurements from a selected
position-reference system is too high during the calibration
process, the status lamp will continue flashing and the
following Warning Message will be displayed in the Event
List window:
Calibration error <system><limit><variance
• This may be due to an error in the position-reference
system or higher noise than the value specified as
expected Accuracy on the Reference System Properties
dialog box. See Reference System Properties dialog
box on page 161 for how to change the value. The system
will continue trying to calibrate the system until it is
disabled.
Continuous measurements of the vessel’s position are essential
for dynamic positioning. Several different position-reference
systems are normally used.
9.15 Changing the reference origin

Each position-reference system provides position measurements
relative to a known reference point specific for that reference
system.
origin (the origin in the internal coordinate system). Position
information from any other reference systems is then calibrated
according to this coordinate system.
The reference origin selected should be the one most appropriate
to your operational requirements.
To change the reference origin:
1 Disable all position-reference systems.
301027/C 173
• The following alarm message is displayed:

No reference system enabled
2 Wait until the status message Offline (in red) is shown in the
Refsys view for all disabled position-reference systems.
3 Enable the position-reference system that is to provide the
reference origin.
4 Allow the Vessel Model to stabilise.
5 Enable additional position-reference systems if required.
9.16 Position dropout

If the vessel position is under automatic control and all
position-reference input is lost or rejected, the following alarm
message is displayed:
All reference systems rejected
After 20 seconds without reference input, the following alarm is
given:
Position dropout
This means that the system is currently using only the estimated
position from the Vessel Model, and that this position has not
been updated with measured positions for at least 20 seconds
(“dead reckoning” mode).
When this message is generated, the setpoint is set automatically
to the current estimated vessel position.
The status lamps of all previously enabled position-reference
systems will be flashing as the system tries to recalibrate.
You can remain in Position dropout, but the following points
must be noted:
• The displayed vessel position is the estimated position from
the Vessel Model. After a few minutes, the vessel may begin
to pick up speed in one direction, without this being reflected
on the display.
• A calibration of the lost position-reference systems may occur
at any time. This will normally have no immediate effect
on the vessel’s movement, but if the calibrated system is
unreliable or drifting, the vessel may begin to move. In this
event, you must examine the Posplot view for any jumps in
the displayed vessel position.
The recommended action in Position dropout (if operational
circumstances allow) is:
1 Return the system to joystick control in all axes and use the
joystick to manoeuvre the vessel. When at least one reliable
position-reference system is successfully calibrated, return
to the required operational mode.
174 301027/C
2 When at least one reliable position-reference system is

successfully calibrated, return to the required operational
mode.
301027/C 175
10 MAIN MODES AND OPERATING

PROCEDURES
10.1 Standby mode...........................................................176
10.2 Joystick mode...........................................................177
10.3 Auto Position mode..................................................182
10.1 Standby mode

The Standby mode is a waiting and reset mode in which the
system is in a high state of readiness, but in which no vessel
control commands can be made. It is the default mode when the
system is first switched on. In Standby mode you can prepare
the system for operation.
From this mode, you can take the system to Joystick mode (see
Joystick mode on page 177) or start the built-in trainer (see
Using the trainer on page 266) or simulator (refer to the separate
Simulator Operator Manual).
Note
When in Standby mode, ignore any displayed position
information.
In this mode you may also:

• Calibrate the joystick (see Calibrating the joystick on page 78).
• Enable the required gyrocompasses (see Gyrocompasses on
page 126).
• Enable the required wind sensors (see Wind sensors on
page 131).
• Enable the required VRSs (see Vertical reference sensors
(VRS) on page 136).
• Enable the required speed sensors (see Speed sensors on
page 138).
• Enable the required draught sensors (see Draught sensors on
page 141).
• Enable the required thrusters, propellers and rudders (see
Enabling thrusters on page 201).
10.1.1 Returning to Standby mode/manual

levers
To return to Standby mode from any other mode:
1 Press the STANDBY button twice.
• The STANDBY button status lamp becomes lit.
176 301027/C
Main modes and operating procedures
2 Disable all position-reference systems.

3 Disable all thrusters, propellers and rudders.
4 If you are to use manual levers, switch from K-Pos DP
thruster control to manual thruster control (usually a switch
or a button located on the main thruster control panel).
• The K-Pos DP system provides Thruster not ready alarms.
Note
When switching to manual thruster control, thrusters, propellers
and rudders are no longer READY for K-Pos DP control (i.e.
they lose their READY status).
10.2 Joystick mode

In Joystick mode, the operator controls the movement of the
vessel using the three-axis joystick.
The following applies if the operator is facing forwards or aft
when looking at the display screen:
• Moving the joystick forward/back controls the vessel in the
surge axis.
• Moving the joystick left/right controls the vessel in the sway
axis.
• Rotating the joystick rotates the vessel (the yaw axis).
The following applies if the operator is facing to port or starboard
when looking at the display screen:
• Moving the joystick forward/back controls the vessel in the
sway axis.
• Moving the joystick left/right controls the vessel in the surge
axis.
• Rotating the joystick rotates the vessel (the yaw axis).
Refer also to the following sections:
• Joystick settings on page 79
• Thruster Allocation dialog box on page 204
• Rotation center for joystick manoeuvring on page 82
10.2.1 From Standby mode to Joystick

mode
Note
Before using the joystick, it must be correctly calibrated. See
Calibrating the joystick on page 78.
To take the system from Standby mode to Joystick mode:
301027/C 177
1 Ensure that the joystick is in the zero position in all three

axes, and that it is functioning correctly (see Joystick view on
page 281).
2 Ensure that the required gyrocompasses are enabled (see
Gyrocompasses on page 126). See also Position and heading
information on page 178.
3 Ensure that the required wind sensors are enabled (see Wind
sensors on page 131).
4 Ensure that the required VRSs are enabled (see Vertical
reference sensors (VRS) on page 136).
5 Ensure that the required draught sensors are enabled (see
Draught sensors on page 141).
6 Ensure that the required thrusters, propellers and rudders are
enabled (see Enabling thrusters on page 201).
7 If the vessel has a switch or button to select between manual
and K-Pos DP thruster control (usually located on the main
thruster control panel), set this switch/button to K-Pos DP.
8 Press the JOYSTICK button twice.
• The JOYSTICK button status lamp becomes lit.
9 Enable the required position-reference systems (see Methods
for enabling position-reference systems on page 153). See
also Position and heading information on page 178.
10.2.2 Joystick control of position and

heading
To move the vessel along the surge and sway axes (alongships
and athwartships directions), tilt the joystick. The direction in
which the joystick is tilted determines the direction of applied
thruster force, and the angle of tilt determines the amount of
applied thruster force.
To turn the vessel (the yaw axis), rotate the joystick. The direction
in which the joystick is rotated determines the direction of the
turning force demand, and the angle through which the joystick
is rotated determines the amount of applied turning moment.
The Joystick view (see Joystick view on page 281) provides
useful information in the Joystick mode.
10.2.3 Position and heading information

It is not essential to enable either position-reference systems or
gyrocompasses when operating in Joystick mode. However, the
estimated position, heading and speed provided by the Vessel
Model are meaningless if they have not been adjusted according
to measured information.
178 301027/C
Note
If you do not enable any position-reference systems or
gyrocompasses, you must ignore any displayed position, heading
or speed information.
10.2.4 Joystick electrical failure

Electrical failures affecting the joystick, such as an open loop or
a short circuit, are detected by the system. If the voltage read
by the panel controller is outside predefined limits, the joystick
value for the actual axis is set to zero (it is no longer possible to
control the vessel in this axis using the joystick), and an alarm
message is reported:
Joystick electrical failure <surge/sway/yaw>
10.2.5 Mixed joystick/auto modes

While remaining in Joystick mode, and provided the required
gyrocompasses and/or position-reference systems are enabled,
you can select either one or two of the surge, sway and yaw axes
for automatic control:
• Press the YAW button for automatic heading control with
joystick control of the surge and sway axes (see Joystick mode
with automatic heading control on page 179).
• Press the SURGE and SWAY buttons for automatic position
control with joystick heading control (see Joystick mode
with automatic position control in both surge and sway on
page 180).
• Press the YAW and SURGE buttons for automatic heading
control, automatic stabilisation in the surge axis, and joystick
control of the sway axis (see Joystick mode with automatic
stabilisation on page 181).
• Press the YAW and SWAY buttons for automatic heading
control, automatic stabilisation in the sway axis, and joystick
control of the surge axis (see Joystick mode with automatic
stabilisation on page 181).
If you select all three axes for automatic control, the system
automatically enters the Auto Position mode (see Auto Position
mode on page 182).
10.2.6 Joystick mode with automatic

heading control
In Joystick mode, and with an active gyrocompass, you can select
automatic heading control.
301027/C 179
The current vessel heading becomes the heading setpoint.

Thruster control to maintain this heading is provided
automatically by the K-Pos DP system.
• Controller mode and gain level selection on page 68
• Changing the heading setpoint on page 195
• Alarm Limits dialog box on page 65
• Rate Of Turn page on page 199
10.2.6.1 Selecting automatic heading control
To select automatic heading control while in Joystick mode:
1 Check that none of the status lamps for the SURGE, SWAY
or YAW buttons are lit.
Gyrocompasses on page 126).
3 Press the YAW button twice.
• The YAW button status lamp becomes lit.
• The current vessel heading becomes the heading setpoint,
and the system automatically maintains this heading.
• The deviation between the estimated heading and the
heading setpoint is shown on the Deviation view (see
Deviation view on page 272) and the General view (see
General view on page 279).
10.2.6.2 Returning to joystick heading control
To return to joystick heading control:
• The YAW button status lamp becomes unlit.
2 Control the vessel’s heading manually using the joystick.

position control in both surge and sway
In Joystick mode, with an active gyrocompass and with an active
position-reference system, you can select automatic position
control in both the surge and sway axes. (Selection of only one
of the surge and sway axes for automatic control is normally
combined with automatic heading (yaw) control, and is described
in Joystick mode with automatic stabilisation on page 181.)
Unless there is a specific operational requirement for joystick
yaw control, it is better to use the full Auto Position mode when
changing position in order to allow the system to maintain a
constant heading during the manoeuvre.
180 301027/C

• Changing the position setpoint on page 185
10.2.7.1 Selecting automatic position control

To select automatic position control while in Joystick mode:
3 Ensure that at least one position-reference system is active
and enabled (see Methods for enabling position-reference
systems on page 153).
4 Press the SURGE and SWAY buttons twice.
• The SURGE and SWAY button status lamps become lit.
• The current vessel position becomes the position setpoint,
and the system automatically keeps the vessel at this
position.
• The deviation between the estimated position and the
position setpoint is shown on the Deviation view (see
Deviation view on page 272) and the General view (see
General view on page 279).
10.2.7.2 Returning to joystick position control

To return to joystick position control:
1 Press the SURGE and SWAY buttons twice.
• The SURGE and SWAY button status lamps become unlit.
2 Control the vessel’s position manually using the joystick.

stabilisation
In Joystick mode, with an active gyrocompass and with an active
position-reference system, you can select automatic stabilisation.
This means that either:
• The yaw and surge axes are under automatic control while the
sway axis remains under joystick control
or
• The yaw and sway axes are under automatic control while the
surge axis remains under joystick control.
301027/C 181

• Speed Setpoint dialog box on page 191
• Rate Of Turn page on page 199
10.2.8.1 Selecting automatic stabilisation

To select automatic stabilisation while in Joystick mode:
• The YAW button status lamp becomes lit.
• The current vessel heading becomes the heading setpoint
and the system automatically keeps the vessel on this
heading.
5 Press either SURGE or SWAY twice.
• The corresponding button status lamp becomes lit.
• The current vessel position in the selected axis becomes
the position setpoint in that axis and the system
automatically keeps the vessel at this position.
6 Control the vessel movement in the unselected axis manually
using the joystick.
10.2.8.2 Returning to joystick control

To return to joystick control in all axes:
• The YAW button status lamp becomes unlit.
2 Press either SURGE or SWAY twice (whichever is lit).
• The corresponding button status lamp becomes unlit.
3 Control the vessel’s heading and position manually using
the joystick.
10.3 Auto Position mode

In Auto Position mode, the system automatically maintains the
heading and position of the vessel. This mode requires at least
one active gyrocompass and at least one active position-reference
system. The actual number of active sensors required depends on
the DP Class requirements for the operation to be performed.
182 301027/C

• Thruster Allocation dialog box on page 204
• Changing the position setpoint on page 185
• Rotation center for automatic control on page 75
• Quick model update on page 73
• DP online consequence analysis on page 269
10.3.1 From Joystick mode to Auto Position

mode
To take the system from Joystick mode to Auto Position mode:
1 Ensure that at least one gyrocompass is active and enabled
(see Sensors dialog box - Gyro page on page 126).
3 Ensure that either High Precision or Relaxed (if configured)
is set as the selected Controller Mode in the Gain dialog box.
4 Hold the vessel as stationary as possible using the joystick.
5 Press the AUTO POSITION button twice.
• The status lamps for the AUTO POSITION, SURGE,
SWAY and YAW buttons become lit.
• The setpoints for heading and position are set to the
present estimated vessel heading and position.
• The deviation between the estimated heading and
position and the corresponding setpoint are shown on the
Deviation view (see Deviation view on page 272) and the
General view (see General view on page 279).
Alternatively, the system can be taken from Joystick mode
via Joystick mode with automatic heading control (see
Joystick mode with automatic heading control on page 179)
before entering Auto Position mode.
If Green controller mode is desired, continue as follows:
6 Allow the vessel to stabilise in Auto Position mode for
about 15 minutes to attain optimal performance in the Green
controller mode.
7 Select Green controller mode with the required area set in
the Gain dialog box (see Controller mode and gain level
selection on page 68) and apply.
301027/C 183
• The defined area is displayed on the Posplot view. The

inner and outer areas are indicated with dashed circles
with green shading on the inner area.
• The background of Auto Position in the status bar is
shaded green.
• The Gain symbol in the status bar is changed to a green
shaded box indicating that Green controller mode is
active.
Note
No change in position or heading should be attempted during the
first five minutes after entering the Auto Position mode in order
to allow the Vessel Model to stabilise. For critical DP operations
or during difficult weather/current conditions, this initial time
period should be extended to at least 15 minutes.
184 301027/C
Changing the position setpoint
11 CHANGING THE POSITION SETPOINT

11.1 Stopping a change of position..................................185
11.2 Marking a new position setpoint on the Posplot
view..........................................................................185
11.3 Position R/B dialog box (range/bearing) .................186
11.4 Position Inc dialog box (incremental)......................186
11.5 Position dialog box ..................................................187
11.6 Speed Setpoint dialog box .......................................191
11.7 Acceleration/Retardation Settings dialog
box............................................................................192
11.1 Stopping a change of position

To set the vessel’s present position as the position setpoint, press
the PRESENT POSITION button twice. This will interrupt a
requested change of position.
11.2 Marking a new position setpoint on the

Posplot view
With the Posplot view displayed, you can change the position
setpoint using the trackball.
1 Click on the position setpoint symbol in the Posplot

view.
• The Position dialog box is displayed.
301027/C 185
2 Move the setpoint symbol with the trackball.

• The setpoint symbol moves on the display and the
position coordinates are updated dynamically on the
Position dialog box.
3 Click again to fix the setpoint symbol at the required
position.
• A temporary position setpoint symbol is displayed at the
new position and the coordinates, distance and both true
and relative direction from the present position setpoint
are displayed on the Position dialog box.
4 Either click the OK button to accept the new position
setpoint, or click the Cancel button to continue with the
existing setpoint.
11.3 Position R/B dialog box (range/bearing)

The Position R/B dialog box is useful in operations that require
frequent changes of position setpoint.
To display this dialog box, select AutoPos→Position R/B.
Range
Enter the range from the Present Setpoint to the New Setpoint in
this text box.
True Bearing
Enter the true bearing from the Present Setpoint to the New
Setpoint in this text box.
A temporary setpoint symbol is displayed on the Posplot view
showing the position of the New Setpoint relative to the Present
Setpoint.
11.4 Position Inc dialog box (incremental)

The Position Inc dialog box is useful in operations that require
frequent changes of position setpoint.
To display this dialog box, select AutoPos→Position Inc
186 301027/C
You can enter an increment by typing a value into the increment

spin box. You can adjust the size of the increment by clicking on
the up or down arrows next to the increment spin box.
To add the selected increment in a particular direction to the New
Setpoint coordinates, click Forw, Aft, Port or Stbd as appropriate.
Each time you click one of these, the New Setpoint coordinates
are adjusted and the temporary setpoint symbol on the Posplot
view is moved accordingly.
Range
Shows the range from the Present Setpoint position to the New
Setpoint position.
True Bearing
Shows the true bearing from the Present Setpoint position to the
New Setpoint position.
11.5 Position dialog box

The Position dialog box contains three tabbed pages (Inc, R/B
and Absolute) that allow you to specifying the required position
setpoint in the following ways:
• Inc (Incremental) for defining the setpoint relative to the
existing setpoint
• R/B for defining the setpoint using range and bearing
• Absolute for defining the setpoint using absolute coordinates
It also allows you to specify the Speed at which the vessel should
try to move during a change of position.
11.5.1 Inc page

The Inc (Incremental) page allows you to define the position
setpoint relative to the existing setpoint.
To display this page, select AutoPos→Position or press the
CHANGE POSITION button.
301027/C 187
New Setpoint
Shows the coordinates that will be used for the new position
setpoint when you click the OK or Apply button.
Setpoint.
Relative
This applies increments Ahead/Astern/Port/Starboard.
True
This applies increments North/South/East/West.
From Present Setpoint to New Setpoint
Shows the Range and True Bearing from the Present Setpoint
position to the New Setpoint position.

You can select either Relative or True increments. An increment
can be entered by typing a value into the increment spin box.
The size of the increment can be adjusted by clicking on the up
or down arrows next to the increment spin box.
To add the selected increment in a particular direction to the
New Setpoint coordinates, click Ahead/Astern/Port/Starboard
or North/South/East/West as appropriate. Each time you click
one of these, the New Setpoint coordinates are adjusted and
the temporary setpoint symbol on the Posplot view is moved
accordingly.
11.5.2 R/B page

The R/B page allows you to define the position setpoint using
range and bearing.
188 301027/C

CHANGE POSITION button and then click the R/B page tab.
New Setpoint
setpoint when you click the OK or Apply button.
Setpoint.
To define a new position setpoint, enter the range and bearing in
the Range and Bearing text boxes.
Start position
Choose whether the new position setpoint is to be calculated
relative to the Present Setpoint or the Present Position by clicking
the matching option button.
Bearing
Select either True or Relative bearing by clicking the matching
option button.
11.5.3 Abs page

The Abs page allows you to define the position setpoint using
absolute coordinates.
CHANGE POSITION button and then click the Abs page tab.
301027/C 189
New Setpoint
setpoint when you click the OK or Apply button. You can enter
New Setpoint coordinates by typing the required coordinates
directly into the New Setpoint boxes.
Setpoint.
Previous Setpoint
Shows the coordinates of the previous position setpoint. Clicking
the Use button writes these coordinates into the New Setpoint
boxes. This feature can be used to return the vessel to a previous
position.
11.5.4 Speed page

The Speed page allows you to specify the speed at which the
vessel should try to move during a change of position.
CHANGE POSITION button and then click the Speed page tab.
190 301027/C
New Setpoint
Either enter the required value in the New Setpoint spin box, or
use the up and down arrows to adjust the setpoint by the selected
increment or decrement defined in the Increase/Decrease speed
step spin box.
Note
If the speed setpoint is set to 0.0, the vessel will not change
position.
If the speed setpoint has been set to 0.0 and the vessel’s rotation
center has been set to another position than Midships, it will
not be possible to perform a change of heading. This is because
a heading change with a rotation center other than Midships
implies a change of position which requires a speed setpoint that
is not zero.

The speed setpoint applies only when the surge and sway axes
are under automatic control.
As the vessel approaches the position setpoint, the speed setpoint
is reduced to zero.
11.6 Speed Setpoint dialog box

The Speed Setpoint dialog box is useful in operations that require
frequent changes of speed setpoint as it allows you to specify the
speed at which the vessel should try to move during a change
of position.
To display this dialog box, select AutoPos→Speed.
301027/C 191
Either enter the required value in the Speed Setpoint spin box, or
use the up and down arrows of the to adjust the setpoint by the
selected increment or decrement defined in the Increase/Decrease
speed step spin box.
Note
If the speed setpoint is set to 0.0, the vessel will not change
position.
If the speed setpoint has been set to 0.0 and the vessel’s rotation
center has been set to another position than Midships, it will
not be possible to perform a change of heading. This is because
a heading change with a rotation center other than Midships
implies a change of position which requires a speed setpoint that
is not zero.

This speed applies only when the surge and sway axes are under
automatic control.
As the vessel approaches the position setpoint, the speed setpoint
is reduced to zero.
11.7 Acceleration/Retardation Settings dialog box

Acceleration and retardation factors in the surge, sway and
yaw axes can be specified for Low Speed operation, and for
operation in Relaxed Controller Mode. (In Auto Position mode
with High Precision Controller Mode selected, the Low Speed
Acceleration/Retardation factors apply.) Acceleration and
retardation factors in the yaw axis can be specified for High
Speed operation.
Using the Acceleration/Retardation Settings dialog box you can:
• Specify the acceleration and retardation factors for the
vessel speed in surge and sway axes at start and finish of a
commanded change of position
• Specify the acceleration and retardation factors for the vessel’s
Rate Of Turn at start and finish of a commanded rotation
192 301027/C
To display and use this dialog box, select Joystick→Acceleration or

AutoPos→Acceleration and then click the required page tab; Low
Speed, Relaxed Control or High Speed.
The options available on the Low Speed and Relaxed Control

pages are identical.
The acceleration/retardation factors on the Low Speed page are
those that are used when neither Relaxed Control nor High Speed
apply.
The acceleration/retardation factors on the Relaxed Control page
are those that are used when Relaxed Controller mode (see
Controller mode and gain level selection on page 68) is selected.
The acceleration/retardation factors on the High Speed page are
those that are used in Auto Track (high speed) and Autopilot
modes (refer to the separate Auto Track Mode and AutoPilot
Mode operator manuals).
Controller Reference
The acceleration and retardation factors (Surge, Sway and Yaw)
can be set in the range 0.0 to 100%, and represent percentage of
maximum available acceleration/retardation. The selections on
the Low Speed and Relaxed Control pages are identical. On the
High Speed page only acceleration/retardation factors in the Yaw
axis can be specified.
Acceleration Factor
As the vessel starts a change of position, the vessel speed is
increased to the speed setpoint using the selected acceleration
factors in the surge and sway axes.
As the vessel starts a change of heading, the Rate Of Turn
is increased to the Rate Of Turn setpoint using the selected
acceleration factor in the yaw axis.
Retardation Factor
As the vessel approaches the new position setpoint, the vessel
speed is decreased to zero using the selected retardation factor in
the surge and sway axes.
301027/C 193
As the vessel approaches the new heading setpoint, the Rate Of

Turn is decreased to zero using the selected retardation factor in
the yaw axis.
194 301027/C
Changing the heading setpoint
12 CHANGING THE HEADING SETPOINT

12.1 Stopping a change of heading ..................................195
12.2 Marking a new heading setpoint on the Posplot
view..........................................................................195
12.3 Heading Wheel and its associated buttons...............196
12.4 Heading dialog box ..................................................197
12.5 Acceleration/retardation factors in the yaw
axis ...........................................................................200
Note
It is not possible to perform a change of heading, even though
you have entered a new heading setpoint, when the Rate Of Turn
setpoint is zero. Nor is it possible to perform a change of heading
when the vessel’s rotation center is set to a position other than
Midships and the position speed setpoint is zero.
Note
The different methods for changing the heading setpoint cannot
be used at the same time. When the Heading dialog box is open,
you cannot mark a new setpoint on the Posplot view.
12.1 Stopping a change of heading

To set the vessel’s present heading as the heading setpoint,
press the PRESENT HEADING button twice. This will interrupt
a requested change of heading, and if the heading Strategy is
System Selected, it will be changed to Operator Selected.
12.2 Marking a new heading setpoint on the

Posplot view
With the Posplot view displayed, you can change the heading
setpoint using the trackball.
1 Click on the heading setpoint symbol in the Posplot

view.
301027/C 195
• The Heading dialog box is displayed.
2 Move the setpoint symbol with the trackball.

• The setpoint symbol moves along the edge of the Posplot
view and the heading is updated dynamically on the
Heading dialog box.
3 Click again to fix the setpoint symbol at the required
heading.
• A temporary heading setpoint symbol is displayed.
• The New setpoint and the difference (Diff) from the
Present Setpoint are displayed on the Heading dialog box.
4 Either click the OK button to accept the new heading
setpoint, or click the Cancel button to continue with the
existing setpoint.
12.3 Heading Wheel and its associated buttons

You can change the heading setpoint using the Heading Wheel
and its HEADING buttons (from left to right), DECREASE,
ACTIVATE and INCREASE (see Heading wheel on page 34).
To activate the Heading Wheel, one of these three associated
buttons must be pressed.
To change the heading setpoint:
1 Press the DECREASE, ACTIVATE or INCREASE button
once.
196 301027/C
• The Heading Setpoint dialog box is displayed.
2 With the Heading Setpoint dialog box displayed, rotate the

Heading Wheel clockwise or counter-clockwise to increase
(to starboard) or decrease (to port) the heading setpoint, or
use the INCREASE and DECREASE buttons (typically 0.1
degree for each press).
Note
The Heading Setpoint dialog box must be displayed if rotation
of the Heading Wheel is to have an effect. When not used, the
dialog box is automatically closed.
12.4 Heading dialog box

The Heading dialog box contains two tabbed pages (Heading and
Rate Of Turn) which allow you to change the heading setpoint
and specify the Rate Of Turn.
12.4.1 Heading page

The Heading page of Heading dialog box allows you to define the
heading setpoint.
To display this page, select Joystick→Heading or
AutoPos→Heading, or press the CHANGE HEADING button.
301027/C 197
Note
When changing the heading setpoint, the turn direction will
depend on the new heading setpoint. The shortest turn is always
used.
New Setpoint
Shows the heading that will be used as the new heading setpoint
when you click the OK or Apply button. When Operator Selected
is chosen under Strategy, you can enter the Heading Setpoint by
typing in the required heading or by increasing or decreasing the
value by clicking the arrows next to the New Setpoint spin box.
A temporary heading setpoint symbol is displayed on the Posplot
view showing the proposed heading setpoint.
Previous Setpoint
Shows the previous heading setpoint. Clicking the Use button
writes this heading into the New Setpoint box. You can therefore
use this feature to return the vessel to a previous heading.
Offset From Present Setpoint
Shows the difference in heading between the New Setpoint and
the Present Setpoint. This value is updated dynamically when you
enter the new heading setpoint.
Strategy
System Selected
If you choose System Selected, the displayed system-selected
heading is written into the New Setpoint box. When you click the
OK or Apply button, the system will continue to determine what
the heading setpoint should be.
Operator Selected
If you choose Operator Selected, you can enter the Heading
Setpoint using any of the other methods described here.
198 301027/C

While entering data on the Heading page, before you click the
OK or Apply button, a temporary heading setpoint symbol is
displayed on the Posplot view showing the proposed heading
setpoint.
When System Selected is chosen as Strategy, the heading chosen
by the system depends on the current operational mode. For
example, in Auto Position mode the system will select the
heading that requires the minimum power to be maintained in
the current environmental conditions. This heading will change
continuously according to the prevailing environmental forces
on the vessel.
12.4.2 Rate Of Turn page

The Rate Of Turn page allows you to define the speed at which
the vessel should try to rotate during a change of heading (the
vessel’s Rate Of Turn).
To display this page, select Joystick→Rate Of Turn or
AutoPos→Rate Of Turn.
New Setpoint
Either enter the required value in the New Setpoint box, or use
the up and down arrows to adjust the setpoint by the selected
increment or decrement (Increase/Decrease step).

This Rate Of Turn applies only when the yaw axis is under
automatic control.
As the vessel approaches the heading setpoint, the Rate Of Turn
is reduced to zero.
301027/C 199
When the vessel rotation center is at a position other than the

vessel’s Midships position, the actual Rate Of Turn may be less
than the speed specified. This is because the speed of movement
of the Midships position is limited in proportion to the required
vessel speed (see Speed page on page 190 and Speed Setpoint
dialog box on page 191) and the distance of the rotation center
from the Midships position.
Note
It is not possible to perform a change of heading, even though
you have entered a new heading setpoint when the Rate Of Turn
is zero.
12.5 Acceleration/retardation factors in the yaw

axis
Acceleration and retardation factors in the yaw axis can
be specified for Low Speed and High Speed operations,
and for operation in Relaxed Controller Mode using the
Acceleration/Retardation Settings dialog box. (In Auto Position
mode with High Precision Controller Mode selected, the Low
Speed Acceleration/Retardation factors apply.)
To display and use this dialog box, select Joystick→Acceleration or
AutoPos→Acceleration and then click the required page tab; Low
Speed, Relaxed Control or High Speed.
See Acceleration/Retardation Settings dialog box on page 192

for more information about this dialog box.
200 301027/C
Thrusters
13 THRUSTERS
13.1 Enabling thrusters ....................................................201
13.2 Automatic thruster start (for IAS deliveries) ...........203
13.3 Thruster Allocation dialog box ................................204
13.4 Allocation Settings dialog box.................................208
13.5 Rudder/Nozzle control .............................................209
13.6 Thruster biasing .......................................................209
13.7 Thruster Biasing dialog box.....................................210
13.8 Thruster Combinator Control Settings dialog
box............................................................................219
13.9 Thruster Run-in dialog box ......................................220
The term “thruster” is used throughout this manual to mean any
element of the vessel’s propulsion system; including propellers,
rudders, tunnel thrusters and azimuth thrusters. (The specific
terms for the elements of the propulsion system are used
whenever this enhances the readability of the manual).
13.1 Enabling thrusters

When a thruster can be enabled for K-Pos DP control, the thruster
is shown as Ready on the Thruster main view (see Thruster main
view on page 333) and on the Thruster Enable dialog box.
There are generally two criteria for a thruster Ready status:
• The individual thruster must be running
• The individual thruster must be available for K-Pos DP control
The K-Pos DP system uses only those thrusters that are enabled
for use by the system. The thrusters can be enabled and disabled
using the Thruster Enable dialog box. You can also monitor if the
thrusters are running and ready.
The THRUSTERS button group contains buttons used to enable
or disable each of the available thruster units for K-Pos DP
control. Each thruster button has a status lamp which is lit when
the thruster is enabled.
Before a thruster can be enabled, it must be Ready. If a thruster
is enabled and it subsequently loses its Ready status, it is
automatically disabled.
13.1.1 Thruster Enable dialog box

To display the Thruster Enable dialog box, select
Thruster→Enable.
301027/C 201
Thrusters
Rudders
Enable/disable All
Selecting or clearing this check box allows you to enable
or disable all thrusters and rudders for K-Pos DP control
simultaneously.
Running
These check boxes show whether the thrusters are running or not.
When a thruster status is set as running, the K-Pos DP system
reads the feedback signal from the thruster and calculates the
resulting thruster force.
Under certain conditions, the operator can switch the thruster
Running signals on/off. The running status can be changed in
this way only if all of the following conditions are satisfied:
• The running status is not interfaced directly from the thruster
to the K-Pos DP system.
• The thruster is not Ready.
• The system configuration allows manual setting of thruster
running status.
Rdy
These check boxes show whether the thrusters are Ready for
K-Pos DP control.
Enable
These check boxes allow you to enable or disable each of the
thrusters for K-Pos DP control. The system will automatically
202 301027/C
Thrusters
disable a thruster if it is not Ready, i.e. clear the Enable check

box, and also make the check box unavailable, thus indicating
that before a thruster can be enabled, it must be Ready.
13.2 Automatic thruster start (for IAS deliveries)

The Automatic Thruster Start function allows the system to
enable and start thrusters (and propellers) automatically when
necessary. A thruster which starts up automatically, can also be
automatically enabled. Automatic thruster start and enabling can
be switched on and off using the Automatic Thruster Start dialog
box. This functionality requires IAS from Kongsberg Maritime.
The thrusters are divided into preconfigured groups, and each
group is handled separately related to the start request limit and
delay specified by the operator.
To perform an automatic thruster start, the following conditions
must be satisfied:
• The system must be in Auto Position mode or another mode
with automatic control (not in Standby or Joystick mode).
• No other automatic thruster start requests must be in progress
in the group.
• No thrusters in the group must have been enabled for the past
100 seconds.
An additional thruster in a group will be started automatically if
one of the following conditions are satisfied:
• There are no enabled thrusters in the group.
• The force setpoint is greater than (Start request limit) for a
period of time, and this period of time is greater than the time
limit set for (Start request delay).
If a thruster fails to start, check if any other thruster in the same
group was started up manually without being enabled. If so,
enable it.
13.2.1 Automatic Thruster Start dialog box

To display the Automatic Thruster Start dialog box, select
Thruster→Automatic Start.
301027/C 203
Thruster Start
Turns on and off automatic start of thrusters in all groups.
Thruster Enable
Turns on and off automatic enabling of thrusters in all groups.
(thruster) Group
Start request limit
Allows you to set the force setpoint limit (in %) for automatic
start of a thruster. The force setpoint limit is set individually
for each thruster group.
Start request delay
Allows you to set the delay (in seconds) following a violation of
the start request limit, before performing an automatic start of
a thruster. The Start request delay is set individually for each
thruster group.
13.3 Thruster Allocation dialog box

Thruster allocation can be performed in many different ways.
The functions that are available for the vessel are listed on the
Thruster Allocation dialog box.
204 301027/C
Thrusters
To display the Thruster Allocation dialog box, select

Thruster→Allocation Mode, press the ALLOC. SETUP button, or
click the AllocMode indicator on the status bar.
Mode
For the azimuth thrusters, you can choose between various
thruster allocation modes. The currently-selected thruster
allocation mode is shown both on the Thruster Allocation dialog
box and on the Thruster main view (see Thruster main view on
page 333).
Depending on the operational mode, illegal thruster allocation
modes are unavailable on the Thruster Allocation dialog box.
Some azimuth thruster allocation modes can be configured
to comprise thruster biasing. Thruster biasing (see Thruster
biasing on page 209) can also be available as a dedicated thruster
allocation mode with its own name. The following are some
typical examples of azimuth thruster allocation modes:
VARIABLE
The system automatically changes the angle of the azimuth
thrusters so that the thrust is always angled in the optimum
direction. In order to reduce wear and tear on the azimuth
thrusters due to continuous changes in the azimuth thruster
angles, a dead-band function is incorporated.
Use this mode when the environmental forces acting on the
vessel are large and are not constantly changing direction.
A set of prohibited zones for each thruster can be predefined to
prevent a particular thruster from interfering with other thrusters,
the hull or other equipment. What happens to the thrust when a
thruster passes a prohibited zone can be predefined for each zone
(for example, the thrust can be reduced).
301027/C 205
FIX
The system automatically selects a fixed angle for each azimuth
thruster. When the environmental force is small and constantly
changing direction, this mode can be used in order to avoid
continuous changes in the azimuth thruster angle.
If disabling and then re-enabling a thruster with a negative pitch
or RPM, the system will automatically turn the thruster 180°.
ENVIRON FIX
A set of alternative, fixed angles are predefined for each azimuth
thruster. The system will choose the best predefined angle in the
set, based on the direction of the environmental forces when the
mode is enabled.
If disabling and then re-enabling a thruster with a negative pitch
or RPM, the system will automatically turn the thruster 180°.
DIVING
This is identical to VARIABLE azimuth mode except that the two
modes have separate configuration of prohibited zones. It is used
to activate dedicated zones during diving operations to prevent
the sending of thruster wash towards the umbilical or diving bell.
This mode can also be used to protect other kinds of equipment,
such as HPR and LTW, and will then be named accordingly.
What happens to the thrust when a thruster passes a prohibited
zone can be predefined for each zone (for example, the thrust
can be reduced).
STEERING
Azimuth thrusters not used for steering will have predefined
fixed angles for use in Autopilot mode. This allocation mode is
automatically selected when the system is in Autopilot mode or
in Auto Track (high Speed) mode (when the speed is high-high).
HEAVE RED
When using heave reduction, excessive thrust is applied to
increase the hydrodynamic damping of the vessel. This reduces
the motion of the vessel induced by wave forces. The effect
can be used to reduce the motions when particularly critical
operations are to be carried out, for example crane operations,
transfer of personnel, etc.
The azimuth thrusters configured to participate in the motion
reduction will be at predefined azimuth angles, and they will as
a minimum be run at a predefined force limit, for example 50%
force. The thruster angles are selected so that the resulting thrust
is zero when there is no thrust demand.
MANUAL FIX
In this mode the operator can freely set fixed azimuth angles
of azimuth thrusters and rudders/nozzles using the Allocation
206 301027/C
Thrusters
Settings dialog box (see Allocation Settings dialog box on

page 208).
Control
The configuration and operational requirements of the vessel
determines the controls that are implemented in the K-Pos DP
system. Details of the available controls are provided with the
configuration information for the vessel.
The following are examples of thruster allocation controls:
Increased Power
Allows the thrusters to be used at more than their nominal rating
for a limited period of time (if the thrusters are designed to
handle this) in order to survive an emergency situation. The
Increased Power is predefined for each thruster, typically 10 to
20%. Normally, this mode needs a ready signal to be selected.
When the time period has expired, the thruster utilisation is
automatically returned to nominal values.
Position Priority
If both the rotational moment and directional force setpoint
cannot both be met due to insufficient available thrust, priority is
normally set to obtain the rotational moment setpoint (heading
priority). Selecting Position Priority changes the thrust allocation
priority from heading to position.
Free Run
Allows a greater maximum pitch/rpm to enable the vessel to
reach full speed when running in Autopilot or Auto Track (high
speed) mode. You can select between Off, On and Automatic.
When set to Automatic, free run is automatically selected when
Autopilot or Auto Track (high speed) mode is entered. The on/off
state for free run is also shown on the Thruster main view (see
Thruster main view on page 333). The contents of the Free Run
group box may vary depending on vessel configuration.

The configuration and operational requirements of the vessel
determines the thruster allocation modes that are implemented
in the K-Pos DP system, as well as the criteria for the automatic
mode switch. Details of the available thruster allocation modes
are provided with the configuration information for each vessel.
For some of the modes (FIX, HEAVE RED, MANUAL FIX,
and, when available, ENVIRON FIX), a sufficient number of
thrusters must be enabled to select the mode. The system will
automatically switch back to the default thruster allocation
mode (normally VARIABLE mode), if you deselect thrusters or
thrusters lose their READY status.
301027/C 207
13.4 Allocation Settings dialog box

The Allocation Settings dialog box allow you to set fixed direction
of azimuth thrusters/rudders and/or specify rudder angle limits.
To display this dialog box, select Thruster→Allocation Settings.
Manual Fix angles

The operator can set fixed direction of azimuth thrusters/rudders
by entering the required direction (in degrees) in the Value text
boxes and selecting the In Use check boxes. An azimuthing
unit which is not selected to have fixed angle, will be rotated
individually as required. The Thruster Main view (see Thruster
main view on page 333) shows which thrusters and/or rudders are
using fixed angle.
Note
Manual Fix angles is only effective when the MANUAL FIX
allocation mode is selected (see Thruster Allocation dialog
box on page 204).
Ignore Forbidden Azimuth Zones

When this is selected, the operator may set fixed azimuth angles
that otherwise would be within forbidden azimuth zones. Ignore
Forbidden Azimuth Zones affects only zones defined in the
MANUAL FIX allocation mode.
208 301027/C
Thrusters
Rudder Limit
The operator can specify angle limits within which the rudders
are allowed to operate. When the In Use check box is selected,
the system will not turn the rudders beyond the specified limit.
13.5 Rudder/Nozzle control

The Rudder/Nozzle Control function uses the rudder/nozzle to
generate sideways thrust, either as an addition to stern thrusters
or alone if no lateral stern thrusters are available.
This function is designed for operation with two main propellers
and individually-controlled rudders/nozzles. The rudders may be
of traditional or high performance type.
For example, during station-keeping modes, one main propeller
and rudder/nozzle are used to generate forward directional thrust
within the rudder/nozzle angle limits. The second rudder/nozzle
is set in the neutral position, and the second propeller is used to
reverse and counteract any excess thrust generated alongships
by the first.
The operator can limit the Max Rudder Angle (see Allocation
Settings dialog box on page 208), and can use the MANUAL
FIX allocation mode (see Thruster Allocation dialog box on
page 204) when this is included in the delivery.
13.6 Thruster biasing

Thruster Biasing allows azimuth thrusters to counteract each
other in groups so that the resulting effect of the biasing is zero.
Each group can contain either two or three thrusters. Thruster
biasing does not limit the use of the thrusters since the
counteraction will be reduced when the total demand increases.
The operator can specify the level of biasing.
Up to six thruster groups can be preconfigured.
This function is useful in the following situations:
• When an azimuth thruster cannot give zero thrust. Other
azimuth thrusters or main propellers can be used to
compensate for this minimum force.
• When a higher power consumption is required (than what is
actually needed for positioning).
• When the weather is calm.
• When heave reduction is required combined with variable
azimuth mode.
Depending on the vessel configuration, the Thruster Biasing
function can also:
301027/C 209
• Reduce the turning of azimuth thrusters when the force

setpoint is changing, thereby improving the effective thruster
response and the positioning accuracy.
• Improve the damping of vessel motion.
The Thruster Biasing dialog box can be configured to suit the
individual needs of each vessel, and the contents (number and
configuration of thruster groups and columns) will tend to vary
from vessel to vessel.
Two examples of the Thruster Biasing dialog box are described in
the following sections.
13.7 Thruster Biasing dialog box

The content of the Thruster Biasing dialog box will vary
according to system configuration. The dialog box in the system
installed on your vessel may display only some of the items
shown in the following examples, Manual selection of thruster
biasing and Automatically changing biasing available.
To display this dialog box, select Thruster→Biasing.
13.7.1 Manual selection of thruster biasing
Group Name
The predefined name of the thruster group. The thruster groups
are shown colour-coded on the small thruster force model in the
upper right corner of the Thruster main view (see Thruster main
view on page 333).
In use
Select this check box to turn on the Thruster Biasing function
for this thruster group.
Thrusters
Shows the thruster numbers to counteract each other in each
group. A special situation is when there is only one thruster in a
group. The text boxes for this group then appear dimmed, with
the thruster number shown only in the first text box. With two or
more thrusters in a group, you can define the thrusters to interact.
An error checking routine informs if:
210 301027/C
Thrusters
• The same thruster number is specified twice in the same group

• The same thruster number is specified in two different groups
• An illegal thruster number is entered
• An illegal thruster type is entered
These checks only apply for thruster groups that have the In use
check box selected.
Bias
The minimum force to be used for each thruster when running
the thrusters to counteract each other.
Turn factor
The thrusters will work towards each other (when the Inwards
check box selected, see Inwards on page 217) until this force
level is reached. When this level is reached, one thruster will
turn, and they will both work in the same direction (see Turn
factor on page 216).
Angle factor
Determines the relative priority of angle against force to satisfy
the force demand (see Angle factor on page 216).
Spin
If one thruster in this group is disabled and the other is not, and
the demand to the enabled thruster is less than the Bias force, you
can choose to spin the enabled thruster.
Inwards
When two thrusters are counteracting each other, you can choose
between running them towards each other (Inwards check box
selected), or away from each other (Inwards check box not
selected) (see Inwards on page 217).
13.7.2 Automatically changing bias

available
301027/C 211
Thrusters
Shows the thruster numbers to counteract each other in each
group. With two or more thrusters in a group, you can define the
thrusters to interact when By Operator is selected (see Thruster
Select below). See also Manual selection of thruster biasing on
page 210.
Bias
The minimum force to be used for each thruster when running the
thrusters to counteract each other. You can enter a required Bias
value when By Operator is selected (see Thruster Select below).
Thruster Select
Allows you to set the system to change bias pairs automatically
as a function of demand direction. In the Thruster Select group
box, you can choose between Automatic, By Operator or No Bias.
Used
A check mark in this column indicates the option (Automatic, By
Operator or No Bias) used by the system.
Automatic
When selected, the Thrusters and Bias columns become dimmed,
i.e. unavailable for editing by the operator. The system selects
thruster bias groups automatically based on a predefined setting.
The demand direction decides which group setup is selected.
If a thruster becomes the only enabled thruster in a group, this
thruster can (based on certain criteria) join another group. The
thrusters will then counteract each other so that the resulting
thrust is zero for this “new” group. When a thruster joins a
group, the thruster number is shown below the text Joined on the
Thruster Biasing dialog box, adjacent to the numbers of the other
thrusters in the group. See Figure 34.
Figure 34 Thruster Biasing - Thruster 5 has joined the group

containing thruster 7 and 8 because thruster 4 is disabled
212 301027/C
Thrusters
By Operator
With Thruster Select set to By Operator, the operator can select
the thrusters in each group by typing in the required thruster
numbers, and enter Bias values or select Total Bias.
No Bias
With Thruster Select set to No Bias, the system is still in thruster
bias main thruster allocation mode, but no bias is applied.
Total Bias
Use
When Use is selected, a total common bias can be entered. You
can also monitor the total applied bias on the dialog box.
Request
When the total bias is entered in this spin box, this bias value is
distributed to all of the bias groups. If the bias was initially equal
for each group, the total bias is distributed equally. If however
the bias was initially unequal for each group, the total will be
distributed in the same proportion as the initial proportions.
Applied
This text box shows the difference of the thrust before and after
total bias was applied.
Bias Type
The Bias Type group box only becomes available when running
in FIX thruster allocation mode. The frame appears dimmed in
all other thruster allocation modes. You can select between Port,
Stbd or Both in this frame. By default the Bias Type is set to Both.
When running in FIX thruster allocation mode the K-Pos DP
system automatically selects a fixed angle for each azimuth
thruster, i.e. the azimuth thrusters cannot turn.
You can use the Bias Type settings in the Thruster Biasing
function to work around this restriction. Depending on the
direction of applied thruster setpoint, removal of the thruster
biasing on specific thrusters in a group can be allowed. In this
situation, the thruster will run below its bias value, including
negative values (e.g. pitch/rpm). The thruster will not turn, but
the thruster force will be in the opposite direction.
In the following examples we have set (by operator) thrusters 7
and 8 to be in the AFT group (and thus to counteract each other).
The vessel is run in Joystick mode using the joystick to control
the thruster setpoint. The effects of the configured Bias Types
Both, Port and Stbd on thruster behaviour are described.
When Bias Type is set to Both and thruster setpoint to Stbd
(Starboard), a bias is applied on both thruster 7 and 8. Thruster
7 cannot turn because it is in FIX thruster allocation mode (see
Figure 35). The same will happen when you set the thruster
301027/C 213
setpoint to Port. Thruster 8 will not turn. None of the thrusters

will go below the Bias value you have set for the AFT group.
Figure 35 Thruster allocation FIX combined with Bias Type

Both
214 301027/C
Thrusters
Bias Type set to Port.

Thruster setpoint to Starboard (illustrated
by the joystick symbol). Starboard thruster
(7) is allowed to go negative (i.e. no bias
on this thruster). It will only go negative if
the force setpoint is not fulfilled by the port
thruster (8).
Bias Type set to Port.

Thruster setpoint to Port (illustrated by the
joystick symbol).
Port thruster (8) stops at its bias value and is
not allowed to go negative.
Bias Type set to Stbd.

Thruster setpoint to Starboard (illustrated
by the joystick symbol).
Starboard thruster (7) stops at its bias value
and is not allowed to go negative.
Bias Type set to Stbd.

Thruster setpoint to Port (illustrated by the
joystick symbol).
Port thruster (8) is allowed to go negative
(i.e. no bias on this thruster). It will only go
negative if the force setpoint is not fulfilled
by the starboard thruster (7).
301027/C 215
13.7.3 Turn factor

The Turn factor determines when to turn a thruster within a
group, instead of continuing to counteract the other thruster. In
the examples below, the maximum force for each thruster is 10
tonnes and the idle or bias force is 2 tonnes.
Figure 36 Turn factor - examples
5 T demand
Starboard thruster counteracting
port thruster.
7T 2T
5.99 T demand
Port thruster about to reach 80%.
Starboard thruster will start turning.
7.99 T 2T
6.0 T demand
Port thruster reached 80%, so
starboard thruster turned.
3T 3T (Increasing turn factor to 90% would
turn starboard thruster back again.)
(CD3325)
13.7.4 Angle factor

The Angle factor determines the relative priority of angle against
force to satisfy the force setpoint. In the examples below, the
same 10 tonnes demand ahead is achieved, but more thrust is
used in example 1 (with a higher angle factor), than in example
3 (with a lower angle factor).
216 301027/C
Thrusters
Figure 37 Angle factor - examples
Example 1
Force demand = 10T ahead

Angle factor = 80%
Example 2

Angle factor = 60%
Example 3

Angle factor = 40%
(CD3326)
13.7.5 Inwards
When two thrusters are counteracting each other, the Inwards
check box determines whether they should be run towards each
other or away from each other. The examples below show
various situations with Inwards both selected and not selected.
The specified setpoint is the force setpoint for this group.
301027/C 217
Figure 38 Angle factor - examples

Inwards selected Inwards not selected
Sway demand = 0 T Sway demand = 0 T

Bias = 3 T Bias = 3 T
3T 3T 3T 3T
Sway demand = 5 T Sway demand = 5 T

7T 2T 2T 7T
Surge demand = -10 T Surge demand = -10 T

Surge demand = 10 T Surge demand = 10 T

Sway demand = -5 T Sway demand = -5 T
(CD3327)
218 301027/C
Thrusters
13.8 Thruster Combinator Control Settings dialog

box
By combinator control of a thruster we mean that the K-Pos DP
system controls both pitch and RPM, and that pitch and RPM
can be controlled individually.
Select Thrusters→Combinator Control Settings. The Thruster
Combinator Control Settings dialog box is displayed.
Configuration
Minimum RPM %
For each of the listed thrusters, the operator can specify a
minimum percentage value for the RPM. The RPM will not fall
below this limit when Sequential or Stepwise Combinator Control
Mode is selected.
Minimum RPM is not applicable for Full Combinator Control
Mode and is therefore unavailable (appears dimmed) when this
mode is selected.
Combinator Control Mode
Sequential
The RPM is kept fixed at the Minimum RPM limit for low force
demands. The RPM will only increase if the force demand is
higher than what can be dealt with by varying the pitch. The
pitch setpoint will always be +100% or –100% when the RPM
setpoint is higher than the Minimum RPM limit.
Stepwise
The RPM will be stepped up (respective down) if the filtered
pitch setpoint is higher (respective lower) than a predefined limit.
The RPM will never be stepped below the Minimum RPM limit.
This mode is designed with long term station-keeping in mind.
In this mode the thrusters will step the RPM automatically in
varying weather conditions in order to force the pitch setpoint
into a desired working interval.
Full
The pitch and the RPM follows a predefined trace (combinator
curve) with regards to the force demand.
301027/C 219
Full Combinator Control Mode is similar to the way pitch and

RPM is controlled in combinator mode during manual thruster
lever control.
13.9 Thruster Run-in dialog box

The Thruster Run-in dialog box allows you to limit the maximum
thruster setpoint of each individual thruster configured with this
functionality.
To display this dialog box, select Thruster→Run-in.
Configuration
Enable
Select a check box to turn on the Thruster Run-in function for the
corresponding thruster.
Max. setpoint (%)
The maximum setpoint for the corresponding thruster in percent.
The specified value must be more than any required minimum
setpoint for the thruster (such as for minimum thrust or idle rpm)
and must always be at least 20%. This value is valid for both the
positive and negative directions.
For thrusters with combined pitch/rpm control, the specified
maximum setpoint refers to either the pitch or the rpm setpoint,
depending on the configuration.
220 301027/C
Power system
14 POWER SYSTEM
14.1 Power monitoring.....................................................221
14.2 Power load monitoring and blackout
prevention ................................................................221
14.1 Power monitoring

The K-Pos DP system has no control over the vessel’s electrical
power system. This is administered by a separate Power
Management System (PMS).
Normally the K-Pos DP system receives information about:
• The power produced by each main generator.
• Which power bus each generator is connected to.
• How the power buses are connected.
• How the thrusters are connected to the power buses.
This information is used by the K-Pos DP system for power
overload control and is also displayed on the Power view (see
Power view on page 312).
14.2 Power load monitoring and blackout

prevention
The Power Load Monitoring and Blackout Prevention function
performs a dynamic setpoint reduction of the thrusters/propellers
to prevent blackout on a power bus or isolated bus section as a
consequence of applying too much power to the thrusters as a
secondary barrier. The primary barrier is the thruster allocation
system itself limiting the thruster output within the power system
overall capacity. This is achieved by monitoring the load on the
main bus or isolated bus sections and reducing power on the
connected thrusters/propellers by reducing setpoint demand if
the estimated load exceeds the nominal limit. The reduction is
shared between the connected thrusters/propellers in such a way
that the effect on the position and heading control is minimised.
The function will only limit thruster commands to avoid a stable
power plant becoming overloaded. The function cannot prevent
a potential blackout caused by generator tripping.
The Power Load Monitoring and Blackout Prevention function
covers the following standard power plant configurations:
• Diesel generators supplying thruster/propeller drives
• Shaft generators supplying thruster drives
• A combination of diesel generators and shaft generators.
301027/C 221
This function supplements to the vessel’s Power Management

System (PMS). The thruster/propeller setpoint reduction criteria
during K-Pos DP control, are set at lower overload levels than
the load reduction initiated by the vessel’s own PMS. The Power
Load Monitoring and Blackout Prevention function is active in
all operational modes and is illustrated in Figure 39.
Figure 39 Power overload control
The K-Pos DP system requires the following information in order

to perform blackout prevention:
• Generator power and breaker status
• Bus-tie breaker status
• Thruster breaker status (if more than one for each thruster)
The following functions are also available:
• Generator Load Limitation
Performs load limitation of the most loaded generator
if a skew-load situation occurs on the power bus. The
overload protection is achieved by automatically reducing the
pitch/rpm/force/load on the thrusters/propellers connected to
the power bus until the most loaded generator operates within
its nominal capacity.
• Diesel Engine Load Limitation
Monitors the load on each diesel engine (fuel-rack monitoring)
which drives both a generator and a controllable-pitch
propeller on the same shaft. Power load is reduced by
reducing the pitch setpoint on the connected propeller when
the nominal engine load is exceeded. Note that this function
requires an interface to the diesel engine fuel-rack reading.
222 301027/C
Power system
• Diesel Engine Load Monitoring

Monitors the load on each diesel engine (fuel-rack monitoring)
which drives a controllable-pitch propeller. This function
requires an interface to the diesel engine fuel-rack reading.
This function is for presentation purposes only, and does not
perform any load limitation.
• Thruster Load Monitoring (Current/Power)
Monitors the current/power load on each individual
thruster/propeller motor. Note that this function requires an
interface for the motor current/power reading.
Thruster load monitoring will improve thruster failure
detection, making it possible to distinguish between feedback
failures and internal drive or servo failures.
301027/C 223
15 SYSTEM STATUS INFORMATION

15.1 Remote diagnostics ..................................................224
15.2 Printing system status data.......................................226
15.3 Displaying software information .............................229
15.4 Interface to CyberSea...............................................231
15.1 Remote diagnostics

Online support from Kongsberg Maritime is available through
the Remote Diagnostic Service using secure communication
facilities. The service engineer at the Support Centre can view
the same Operator Station information as the operator on site.
Log files and databases can be transferred to the Support Centre
for further analysis, and updates may take place on the system on
site with the restrictions imposed by the operational guidelines
and the classification authorities.
The K-Pos DP system is prepared for this Remote Diagnostic
Service by means of a communication software package installed
in each Operator Station.
When a remote user is connected on the Remote Access Service
connection, the text Remote Diagnostics (on red background) is
displayed in the K-Pos DP title bar.
To display the Remote Diagnostics dialog box, select

System→Remote Diagnostics.
224 301027/C
System status information
Remote Access Services

A remote user is connected on the Remote Access Service
connection when information about Port, User and Duration is
displayed in the corresponding text fields.
Port
The port to which the modem is connected, usually COM1.
User
The user name of the remote user.
Duration
Duration of time since the remote user was connected to the
Remote Access Service connection.
Disconnect
Click this button to disconnect from the Remote Access Service
connection.
PcAnywhere
Start
Click this button to start PcAnywhere when a remote user is
connected on the Remote Access Service port. The remote user
is connected when information about Port, User and Duration is
displayed in the corresponding text fields.
Show
When PcAnywhere is started, the text on the Start button changes
to Show. Click the Show button to open the pcAnywhere Waiting...
301027/C 225
dialog box to monitor the TCP/IP Host Service and TCP/IP

addresses.
Close
Click this button to close the Remote Diagnostics dialog box.
15.1.1 pcAnywhere Waiting... dialog box

The service engineer at the Kongsberg Maritime Support Centre
may ask you to present information about the TCP/IP Host
Service (remote user) to verify that the required connections are
established. This information can be found on the pcAnywhere
Waiting... dialog box.
To display this dialog box, select System→Remote Diagnostics to
display the Remote Diagnostics dialog box and then click the Start
button for PcAnywhere. When PcAnywhere has started, click the
Show button on the Remote Diagnostics dialog box.
Note
To minimise the pcAnywhere Waiting... dialog box, do not click
the Cancel button, as this will abort pcAnywhere. Instead, click
the Windows minimize button ( ) in the upper right corner of
the dialog box.
15.2 Printing system status data

You can print a predefined set of system status data on the event
printer connected to the Operator Station. You can either request
an immediate printout or request repeated printouts with a given
time interval. An example of a printed status page is shown in
Figure 40.
The Print Status dialog box allows you to print the status page or
to request repeated printouts.
226 301027/C
To display this dialog box, select System→Print Status.
Print Status
Click this button to request an immediate print-out of the status
page.
Cyclic Print Control
Select the Cyclic Print check box if you want a cyclic print-out to
be made automatically after a specified Interval. This can only be
selected from the Operator Station in command.
301027/C 227
Figure 40 Status page (example)
228 301027/C
15.3 Displaying software information

The About dialog box allows you to view vital K-Pos DP
system and file information which can be useful for you to have
available when contacting Kongsberg Maritime for help in case
of problems with the K-Pos DP system. It contains an overview
of basic software information for your K-Pos DP system.
To display this dialog box, select Help→About.
Clicking the EXE/DLLs button, displays a list of EXE and DLL

files in use and their corresponding version numbers.
301027/C 229
Clicking the Overview button returns to the overview of software

information.
Clicking the Details>> button displays a detailed list of which
EXE files use which DLL files.
The structure of the information presented is as follows:

• The Program (EXE) column lists all the EXE files.
• The Using DLL column lists a batch of all the DLL files used
by each specific EXE file.
230 301027/C
• The Version column lists the version of the program (EXE file).
• The Modified column lists the date when each DLL and EXE
file was last modified.
• The Size column lists the file size for each DLL and EXE file.
Clicking the Overview button returns to the overview of software
information.
Clicking the Details<< button returns to the list of EXE and DLL
files in use.
15.4 Interface to CyberSea

Marine Cybernetics AS (http://www.marinecybernetics.com/)
has developed the CyberSea Simulator for Hardware-In-the-Loop
(HIL) safety and performance testing of feedback control systems
such as dynamic positioning systems. The K-Pos DP system
supports interface to CyberSea, which gives the possibility for
testing by an independent company.
The following interfaces are available:
• CyberSea FMEA Simulator
The K-Pos DP system controls the vessel as in normal
operation, but the I/O is manipulated by the CyberSea FMEA
Simulator. This FMEA Simulator testing is intended to be
used in sea-trials and periodical trials.
• CyberSea DP-HIL Simulator (VSim)
Hardware-in-the Loop (HIL) testing may be performed during
Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT), commissioning, sea-trials, as
well as for ships in operation. The K-Pos DP system will act
against a simulated vessel in the DP-HIL simulator.
To run the CyberSea application:
1 Ensure that the K-Pos DP is in Standby mode.
2 Select System→CyberSea.
• The CyberSea Mode dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the required mode and then click the OK or Apply

button.
301027/C 231
• The text In FMEA mode or In VSim mode (or other

configuration-dependable text) is displayed flashing in
the title bar.
4 Run testing/simulation as required.
• If contact with CyberSea is lost during testing in FMEA
mode, this mode is aborted and a message is given.
232 301027/C
System status monitoring
16 SYSTEM STATUS MONITORING

16.1 Introduction..............................................................233
16.2 System architecture ..................................................233
16.3 Equipment ................................................................237
16.4 Station Explorer .......................................................245
16.5 IO Manager ..............................................................249
16.6 RBUS IO Image .......................................................250
16.7 IO Terminal Block ...................................................252
16.8 IO Point Browser .....................................................257
16.9 Properties — DpPs Serial port.................................261
16.10 Resetting a disabled serial line.................................264
16.1 Introduction
Functions are available for monitoring the status of the K-Pos DP
operator stations, process stations and IO system.
During normal operation you can:
• View the operational status of the Operator Stations, History
Stations and Process Stations
• View information and status indications for every IO driver,
IO block and IO point configured in the system.
16.2 System architecture

A K-Pos DP system consists of one or more operator stations
(OS) and one or more process stations (PS). A history station
(HS) may also be included.
The K-Pos DP control software is implemented in one, two or
three K-Pos DP process stations (DpPSs) (the Main controller PS
group) depending on the redundancy level of the system. The
process stations are implemented in computers located in the
K-Pos DP Controller Cabinet.
The DpPSs in the Main controller group are interconnected via a
dedicated redundancy net (RedNet).
Communication between operator stations, history stations and
process stations is via a single or dual communication net (Net
A and Net B).
Communication with thrusters and sensors is performed by the
IO system, which is an integrated part of the DpPS. If additional
IO is required for sensors or thrusters, additional dedicated IO
process stations can be implemented.
301027/C 233
The process stations themselves provide no permanent storage

of programs and data. When a process station starts up, all its
programs and data are loaded from its PS servers, which are
located either on one or more operator stations or in the flash
memory of the PS itself.
16.2.1 Operator stations

The following standard names are used to identify the operator
stations and history stations in K-Pos DP systems:
OS name OS description
DP-OS1 Main K-Pos DP Operator Station
DP-OS4 Fire Backup K-Pos DP Operator Station
DP-OS6 Stand-alone Simulator K-Pos DP Operator Station
DP-HS1 Main K-Pos DP History Station
cPos-OS1 cPos Operator Station
cPos-OS2 cPos Operator Station
cJoy-OT1 cJoy Operator Terminal
cJoy-OT2 cJoy Operator Terminal
WT1 cJoy (cWing) Wing Terminal
16.2.2 Process stations

The process stations are implemented in Remote Control Units
(RCU).
The RCU unit contains a real-time single board computer and
IO interfaces in the same unit.
16.2.2.1 Redundancy
In single systems, the K-Pos DP Controller Cabinet contains a
single DpPS.
In dual systems, the K-Pos DP Controller Cabinet contains two
DpPSs which operate with a master/slave relationship. Switching
between master and slave can be performed manually, or the
switching can be performed automatically by the system.
In triple systems, the K-Pos DP Cabinet contains three DpPSs.
The concept of majority voting is used to detect and isolate faults
in the sensors and in theK-Pos DP system itself.
234 301027/C
For more information, see Redundant systems on page 118.
16.2.2.2 WinPS
A WinPS is a Process station that runs on an OS computer, as
opposed to a standard PS. A WinPS provides full PS functionality,
except that it cannot communicate with the IO system.
WinPSs are used for development purposes and in simulators.
16.2.2.3 PS names and numbers

The following standard names and numbers are used to identify
process stations and redundancy groups in K-Pos DP systems.
Redundancy Redundancy type PS description
group
DpMain Single, DpDual or DpTriple Main K-Pos DP Controller PS A
Main K-Pos DP Controller PS B
Main K-Pos DP Controller PS C
DpM_IO1 Single, DpDual or DpTriple Main Input/Output 1
DpM_IO2 Single, DpDual or DpTriple Main Input/Output 2
DpM_Sim Single Main - Simulator (WinPS)
DpM_Vrm Single Main - Built-in Trainer - Vessel Reference Model (WinPS)
DpFS_Vrm Single Field Simulator - Vessel Reference Model (WinPS)
DpBackup Single Backup K-Pos DP Controller PS A
DpB_IO1 Single Backup Input/Output 1
DpB_IO2 Single Backup Input/Output 2
DpB_Sim Single Backup - Simulator (WinPS)
DpB_Vrm Single Backup - Vessel Reference Model (WinPS)
The Vessel Reference Models run in WinPS and provide

simulator and built-in trainer functions.
16.2.3 IO system
The IO system provides the communication interface for
exchange of IO signals between the field devices (thrusters and
sensors) and the process station.
The main elements of the IO system are:
301027/C 235
• IO drivers
IO drivers are responsible for the communication with the
field device. The IO driver provides conversion between field
values and IO raw values.
The following driver types are supported:
– RBUS for discrete analog and digital IO
– NetIO for communication between PSs
– Dedicated sensor and interface drivers for serial line
devices such as Artemis, GPS, Fanbeam and HPR
– ComAs for generic serial line IO
• IO blocks
An IO block represents a group of identifiable IO signals from
an IO device in the field. For example:
– For IO cards belonging to the RBUS driver, an IO block
represents an IO card in the IO rack.
– For NetIO communication between process stations, an IO
block may represent all the signals related to a particular
sensor or thruster.
• IO points
IO points are the connection points for IO signals. An
IO point may provide signal conditioning elements for
conversion between the IO raw value on the driver side and
the engineering value on the K-Pos DP system side.
16.2.4 Monitoring functions

The following monitoring functions are available:
• Viewing of status information for the Operator Stations,
History Stations and Process Stations in your system, using
the Equipment - System Status dialog box. See Equipment on
page 237.
• Viewing of status information for all PSs in the system, using
the Station Explorer dialog box. See Station Explorer on
page 245.
• Viewing of overview information for all IO drivers, IO blocks
and IO points, using the IO Manager dialog box. See IO
Manager on page 249.
• Viewing of information for selected IO Points using the IO
Point Browser dialog box. See IO Point Browser on page 257.
• Viewing of information displayed for each IO Block, related
to each IO Point and its contents, using the IO Terminal Block
dialog box. See IO Terminal Block on page 252.
236 301027/C
• Viewing of information for selected DP PS Serial ports using

the Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog box. See Properties
— DpPs Serial port on page 261.
Note
Many of the features provided by these dialog boxes are related to
configuring the system. These features require OS Configuration
Mode and/or PS Configuration Mode and therefore are not
described in this manual. This manual only describes features
that are available in normal operation mode.
16.3 Equipment
The Equipment - System Status dialog box shows operational
status information about the Operator Stations, History Stations
and Process Stations in your system.
This dialog box has five pages:

• PS
• PS Redundancy
• OS/HS
• Event Printer
• Net Status
In each line of each page, the background colour of certain fields
are changed to indicate alarm conditions.
When a system or process alarm condition occurs, the background
of the field changes colour and starts to flash. It will continue to
flash until the applicable alarm is acknowledged.
16.3.1 PS page
The PS page shows the current status of all process stations
defined in the system.
To display this page, select System→Equipment.
301027/C 237
Station
Identification of the PS.
Group name
Displays the name of the redundancy group to which this station
belongs.
(No column title)
Identification of the PS within the redundancy group. For
example: Controller PS A, B or C within the DpMain group.
Status
Shows the current status of the PS:
• Operational — PS is operational.
• Booting — PS is booting (loading configuration).
• Rebooting — PS is rebooting due to an error.
• Not Communicational — PS has reported a status, but no
communication with the PS is possible.
• Not Reported — PS has not reported any status.
• Halt — PS has stopped due to an error condition.
Spare Time (%)
The available CPU capacity, expressed as a percentage of total
CPU capacity.
Net State
Indicates the state of the A and B network interfaces:
• OK — Both network interfaces are OK.
• A-ERROR — Error on network interface A.
• B-ERROR — Error on network interface B.
• AB-ERROR — Error on both network interfaces.
I/O Status
Shows the status of the IO system for this PS:
• OK — No errors reported.
• ERROR — Errors reported.
Serial Status
Not relevant for K-Pos DP systems.
238 301027/C
Other Status:
Shows the status of other sub-systems reported by this station
(typically system self-test and monitoring):
• OK — No errors reported.
• ERROR — Errors reported.
Free Memory
Available memory (or largest continuous block) in kB. (Not
applicable for WinPSs.)
Uptime
The accumulated uptime of the station. Shown as a number
followed by a character indicating the period. For example: 3.06
d indicates 3.06 days (m = minutes, h = hours, d = days, y =
years).
Started
Time stamp when the PS was started.
Format: day/month/year hour:min:sec
Last reported
Time stamp of last communication.
Format: hour:min:sec
The PS page has a shortcut menu. Right-click anywhere on the
page to display the following menu:
Print Image.. see Print Image on page 244.
Station Explorer... see Station Explorer on page 245.
PS Info... not relevant for K-Pos DP systems during normal
operation.
System Events... see Presentation of messages on page 88.
IO Manager... see IO Manager on page 249.
IO Point Browser... see IO Point Browser on page 257.
16.3.2 PS Redundancy page

The PS Redundancy page shows redundancy information for all
process stations.
To display this page, select System→Equipment and then click
the PS Redundancy page tab.
301027/C 239
Station
Identification of the PS.
Group name
Displays the name of the redundancy group to which this station
belongs.
(No column title)
Identification of the PS within the redundancy group. For
example: Controller PS A, B or C within the DpMain group.
Status
Shows the current status of the PS:
• Operational — PS is operational.
• Booting — PS is booting (loading configuration).
• Rebooting — PS is rebooting due to an error.
• Not Communicational — PS has reported a status, but no
communication with the PS is possible.
• Not Reported — PS has not reported any status.
• Halt — PS has stopped due to an error condition.
Online
Displays whether the PS is online or not. See Redundant
systems on page 118.
Master
Displays whether the PS is master or not. See Redundant
systems on page 118.
Capability
Displays the Capability status, indicating to what extent the PS is
technically capable of fulfilling its intended purpose:
• OK — No errors.
• Common Error — Errors that are common to all PSs in the
redundancy group.
• Degraded — Errors that related to only this PS in the
redundancy group.
• Incapable — The PS is in a state where it should not be used
as the master or online computer.
240 301027/C
Running mode
Displays the Running mode:
• Running — The PS is communicating and has finished all
start-up preparations.
• Starting — The PS is communicating, but more startup
preparation is needed.
• Inactive — The PS is not communicating. It may be
initializing or loading, or not executing at all.
Type
Displays the redundancy type for the redundancy group.
For the DpMain and DpM_IO groups, the following types are
relevant: Single, DPDual and DPTriple.
The PS Redundancy page has a shortcut menu. Right-click
anywhere on the page to display the following menu:
Print Image.. see Print Image on page 244.
Station Explorer... see Station Explorer on page 245.
PS Info... not relevant for K-Pos DP systems during normal
operation.
System Events... see Presentation of messages on page 88.
IO Manager... see IO Manager on page 249.
IO Point Browser... see IO Point Browser on page 257.
16.3.3 OS/HS page

The OS/HS page shows the status of the operator stations and
history stations that are defined in the system.
the OS/HS page tab.
Station
Identification of the OS or HS.
Status
Shows the current status of the OS or HS:
301027/C 241
• Operational — OS or HS is operational.
• Not Communicational — OS or HS has reported a status, but
no communication with the OS or HS is possible.
• Not Reported — OS or HS has not reported any status.
• Stopped — OS or HS is not switched on.
Last Reported
Time stamp of last communication.
Format: day/month/year hour:min:sec
Net State
Indicates the state of the A and B network interfaces:
• OK — Both network interfaces are OK.
• A-ERROR — Error on network interface A.
• B-ERROR — Error on network interface B.
• AB-ERROR — Error on both network interfaces.
The OS/HS page has a shortcut menu. Right-click anywhere on
the page to display the following menu:
See Print Image on page 244.
16.3.4 Event Printer page

The Event Printer page shows the status of the event printers that
are configured in the system.
the Event Printer page tab.
The operator stations in the K-Pos DP system are grouped into

Print Groups - usually either Main or Backup - where each group
has one event printer. Only one of the operator stations (the
Master) within a print group will print alarm messages to the
242 301027/C
event printer. If the Master operator station becomes inactive for

any reason, the role of event printer Master passes automatically
to another active Master of the Print Group.
Station
The address of the event printer.
Print Group
The name of the group of operator stations that can print to this
printer.
Master
The current master operator station in this print group.
Members
The operator stations that are members of this print group. If an
operator station is not active, its name is shown in parentheses.
Printer Info
Information on the printer status such as Idle or Printing. This
information is provided by the printer interface.
The Event Printer page has a shortcut menu. Right-click
anywhere on the page to display the following menu:
See Print Image on page 244.
16.3.5 Net Status

The Net Status page shows the status of the communication
network for all OSs, HSs and PSs in the system.
the Net Status page tab.
This page contains a window that is divided into two panes. The
left-hand pane lists all stations in the communication network by
means of icons and names. Clicking any icon or name displays in
the right-hand pane the status of the communication network as
seen from the receiving station in the left-hand pane.
301027/C 243
If a red A, B or AB is displayed superimposed on an icon, this

indicates that the station has a network communication error on
net A, B or both.
Sending Station
Identification of the OS, HS or PS sending messages to the
receiving station.
Msg pr. 100 sec
The total number of messages being received every 100 seconds
on both networks.
Lost Msg Net A
The number of lost messages on network A.
Lost Msg Net B
The number of lost messages on network B.
IpAddress
The Internet Protocol (IP) address of the sending station.
The right-hand pane is static and once information has been
displayed it is not updated. You can update the information either
by reselecting the Net Status page or by right-clicking anywhere
on the page to display the following shortcut menu:
Select Print Image to print the content of the current page.
Select the Update Statistics command to update the statistical
information for the selected station in the right-hand pane.
Select the Show only errors command to filter the information
displayed in the right-hand pane so that only the stations with lost
messages are displayed.
16.3.6 Print Image

The Print Image command on the shortcut menu of the PS, PS
Redundancy, OS/HS or Net Status page allows you to print the
content of the current page on your printer.
Selecting this command displays the Print dialog box.
244 301027/C
Select the appropriate printer from the Name drop-down list box.
Use the Properties button to select the printout format.
Comment
The text that you type in the Comment text box is printed in a
separate box on the top right corner of the printout.
Color print
Select this check box if a printout in colour is required.
16.4 Station Explorer

The Station Explorer provides system status information for all
system components in a selected process station, such as:
• For the basis system: applicable PS system information,
self-tests and environment checks (such as temperature check,
fan alarm).
• For the IO Manager: information on all nodes and subnodes
of all configured IO parts.
• For the Network: information on the redundant networks -
Net A and Net B.
All nodes in the process station are represented by graphical
symbols showing their current alarm status.
To display the Station Explorer dialog box:
1 Select System→Equipment.
• The Equipment - System Status dialog box is displayed.
301027/C 245
2 Right-click on a PS line anywhere on the PS or PS

Redundancy page of the Equipment - System Status dialog
box.
3 Select Station Explorer....

• The Station Explorer dialog box is displayed, showing the
PS that you right-clicked in step 2.
4 You can use the drop-down list box to select any other PS
to be displayed.
246 301027/C
16.4.1 PS tree structure

The dialog box provides a tree structure showing all the nodes
and subnodes in the PS. The tree structure can be expanded and
collapsed, to display or hide information details. Graphical
symbols are displayed to indicate the alarm status. Hotspot
symbols provide links to dialog boxes for displaying further
information about the IO system.
16.4.2 Alarm status indicators

The following alarm status indicators may be displayed on the
PS status view pane.
There is an error condition in this equipment node, and the
alarm is not acknowledged. When acknowledged, a red circle is
displayed (see below).
The error condition in this equipment node is no longer present,
but the alarm is not acknowledged. When acknowledged, a green
circle is displayed (see below).
There is an error condition in this equipment node and the alarm
is acknowledged.
The red arrow indicates that there is either an error or an
unacknowledged alarm in one or more equipment subnodes.
Node and all sub equipment nodes are OK.
16.4.3 Hotspots
Hotspot symbols provide links to dialog boxes for displaying
further information about the IO system:
Displays the Properties dialog box, which shows an overview of
the software and hardware status of the selected PS. This feature
is intended only for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
Displays the IO Manager dialog box, which shows the status
of the IO drivers and IO blocks for the selected PS. See IO
Manager on page 249.
Displays the Driver Properties dialog box for the selected IO
driver. This feature is intended only for Kongsberg Maritime
personnel.
Displays a submenu:
301027/C 247
• For an IO driver:
– The Show RBUS IO Image command displays a graphical

view of the IO cards. See RBUS IO Image on page 250.
– The Show IO Driver command displays the Driver
Properties dialog box for the selected IO driver. This
feature is intended only for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
• For an IO block (IO card):
– The Show IO Block command displays the IO Terminaal

Block dialog box, which shows information about the
selected IO block and its IO points. See IO Terminal
Block on page 252.
– The Properties command displays the Properties dialog box
for the selected IO card. This feature is intended only for
Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
• For a serial port:
– The Properties command displays the Properties dialog box

for the selected serial port. See Properties — DpPs Serial
port on page 261.
Displays the IO Terminal Block dialog box, which shows
information about the selected IO block and its IO points. See
IO Terminal Block on page 252.
16.4.4 Acknowledging PS system alarms

To acknowledge a PS system alarm:
1 Right-click on the appropriate node in the tree structure of
the Station Explorer dialog box.
2 Select the appropriate command from the shortcut menu.
248 301027/C
• The Event List window is displayed, containing the

relevant alarms:
– System Events for Node displays alarms for the selected
IO node.
– System Events for Node and Subnode displays alarms
for the selected IO node and all subnodes.
– System Events for PS displays all alarms for the
selected PS.
3 Acknowledge the alarm. For more information, see
Acknowledging messages on page 93.
16.5 IO Manager
The IO Manager dialog box displays an overview of the IO
system, showing the IO drivers and IO blocks for a selected
station.
To display the IO Manager dialog box, either:
box.
3 Select IO Manager.
• The IO Manager dialog box is displayed.
or:
1 Start the Station Explorer (see Station Explorer on page 245).
2 Select the required PS from the drop-down list.
3 Click on the IO Manager icon ( ).

The IO Manager dialog box has three pages, which give an
overview of the IO Interface system:
• The IO Configurator page, in expandable tree view, presents
the IO drivers, IO objects and IO blocks for the selected PS.
301027/C 249
• The IO Statistics page gives an overview of the connected

terminals and modules. This feature is intended only for
Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
• The IO Library page presents the contents of the IO typical
library. This feature is intended only for Kongsberg Maritime
personnel.
16.5.1 IO Configurator
Use the drop-down box to select the PS for which you will
display the IO drivers and IO blocks.
In the expandable tree view, the symbols are as follows:
1st level, lists the IO driver types ( )
2nd level, lists the IO drivers ( )

3rd level, lists the IO blocks in alphabetic order ( )
If you click on an IO driver name, the corresponding Driver
Properties dialog box is displayed.
If you click on an IO block name, the corresponding IO Terminal
Block dialog box is displayed. See IO Terminal Block on
page 252.
16.6 RBUS IO Image

The RBUS IO Image provides a graphical view of the status of
the RBUS IO cards. This is intended as an aid to fault-finding
in the IO system.
To display the RBUS IO Image:
3 Expand the IO Manager to locate the RBUSDriver.
4 Click on the sub-menu symbol ( ) and select the Show
RBUS IO Image command from the sub-menu.
The RBUS IO Image can be displayed either in the Overview
level or the Detailed level:
• When the Overview level is selected, the display corresponds
to the physical layout of the IO cards as you see them in the
IO cabinet.
• When the Detailed level is selected, more detailed card and
rack information is displayed. The Detailed level is intended
primarily for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
250 301027/C
16.6.1 Overview level

Example RBUS IO Images at the Overview level for an
RCU-based PS is shown below.
The alarm status indicators are the same as for the Station
Explorer. See Station Explorer on page 245.
If you click on an IO card, the IO Terminal Block dialog box is
displayed showing information about the selected IO card and its
IO channels. See IO Terminal Block on page 252.
If you right-click on an IO card, a shortcut menu is displayed:
• The Show IO Block command displays the IO Terminal Block

dialog box, showing information about the selected IO card
and its IO channels. See IO Terminal Block on page 252.
• If the IO card has an error condition, you can select the System
Events for Node or System Events for Node and Subnodes
command to display the Event List window containing the
relevant alarms.
The tool bar of the RBUS IO Image window provides the
following functions:
Displays the Overview level of the RBUS IO Image.
Displays the Detailed level of the RBUS IO Image.
Shows “out-of-rack” cards. Not relevant during normal

operation.
301027/C 251
Use this drop-down list box to select any other PS to be displayed.
Appears when an IO card is clicked.

Hides/shows the IO Terminal Block dialog box for the selected
IO card.
16.6.2 Detailed level

Example RBUS IO Image at Detailed level for an RCU-based
PS is shown below.
Rack positions containing PSs and power supply units are not
shown on the Detailed level.
The information provided on the Detailed level is intended
primarily for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
16.7 IO Terminal Block

The IO Terminal Block dialog box displays information about a
selected IO block and its IO points. This is intended as an aid to
fault finding in the IO system.
To display this dialog box, either:
3 Expand the appropriate driver to locate the required IO
block.
252 301027/C
4 Either click on the block icon ( ), or click on the sub-menu

symbol ( ) and select the Show IO Block command from
the sub-menu.
or:
1 Start the IO Manager (see IO Manager on page 249).
2 On the IO Configurator page, select the required PS from
the drop-down list.
3 Expand the appropriate driver to locate the required IO
block.
4 Click on the IO block name.
The content of this dialog varies according to the IO driver.
Note
For IO cards belonging to the RBUS driver, a block is the same
as an IO card, and a point is the same as an IO channel.
Station Explorer
The upper-left area displays the selected IO block, filtered from
the expandable tree structure of the Station Explorer, and displays
301027/C 253
the driver, alarm status and the block tag of the selected IO block.
For more details, see Station Explorer on page 245.
Tag
Displays the name of the selected IO block.
Description
Displays descriptive text for the selected IO block.
Task
Shows the scan rate for the selected IO block:
• Task 1 — Normal
• Task 2 — Quick
• Task 3 — Rapid
Auto
Upper-right list box
The upper-right list box displays the IO block properties
represented by parameters and values. When you point at a
parameter, a tool-tip is displayed, providing more explanatory
text.
IO Points
This area displays information about the IO points for the
selected IO block.
Direction
The direction of the data flow:
• Output data flow
• Input data flow
IO tag
The name of the IO signal.
(IO point parameter symbol)
Clicking this symbol displays the IO Point Parameters section

in the lower part of the dialog box.
Status
The status of the sensor value:
• OK
• Error
• SIM
Sensor value
The sensor value and its units.
254 301027/C
(signal conditioning elements)
Symbols representing the signal conditioning elements

used, in order of execution. See Signal Conditioning elements on
page 256 for details.
Note
When the cursor is positioned over one of the bitmaps
representing an IO signal conditioning element, the name and
parameters of the element are displayed in a tool-tip window.
Eng. value
The engineering value and its units.
(Eng. status)
The status of the engineering value:
• OK
• Error
• SIM
Connection
For signals that are to be transferred between process stations,
this field displays the name of the NetIO tag that corresponds to
this IO point.
Note
If you click a cell in the Connection column, the Connect/Disconnect
Terminal dialog box is displayed for the selected IO point. This
dialog box has no function during normal operation.
Details
Clicking the Details button displays or removes the IO Point
Parameters and Eng. Signal Conditioning sections in the lower
part of the dialog box.
16.7.1 Shortcut menu

If you right-click on any displayed IO point tag, the following
shortcut menu is displayed:
301027/C 255
Resize Columns
Resizes the columns displayed in the IO Points area to fit the
content of the columns.
16.7.2 Signal Conditioning elements

Signal conditioning elements are used in the IO points of an IO
block to parameterize the input/output process signals and to
scale the signals.
All signal conditioning elements are bidirectional, and may be
used both on input and output signals, but some elements are
meaningful on input signals only.
The symbols are displayed between the Sensor value and Eng.
value columns in the IO Points area.
The signal conditioning includes elements for:
• Scaling
• Inversion
• Filtering
• Fail-safe value
• Compensation for wire resistance.
The available signal conditioning elements are as follows:
Icon Element name Analogue Digital Input Ouput Description
Scale X X X Sensor scale maximum
Sensor scale minimum

Sensor unit
Engineering scale maximum
Engineering scale minimum
Engineering unit
Multi Scale X X X Number of points
256 301027/C
Icon Element name Analogue Digital Input Ouput Description

(For each point) Sensor point
(For each point) Engineering point
Sensor unit
Engineering unit
PT 100 X X Wire resistance
Sensor unit
Engineering unit
Engineering unit X X X Engineering scale maximum
Engineering scale minimum

Engineering unit
Fail-safe X X Fail-safe value
Freeze (check box):

Checked: Last usable value
Not checked: Fail-safe value
Filter X X Filter time (seconds)
Limit check X X X Gain
Bias
Use negative input value
Invert X X X None
Fail-safe X X Fail-safe value
Freeze (check box):

Checked: Last usable value
Not checked: Fail-safe value
Filter X X On delay (seconds)
Off delay (seconds)
16.8 IO Point Browser

The IO Point Browser allows you to search for IO points for
a selected PS, and to display information about them. This is
intended as an aid to faultfinding in the IO system.
301027/C 257
16.8.1 IO Point Browser dialog box

To display the IO Point Browser dialog box:
box.
3 Select IO Point Browser.

• The IO Point Browser dialog box is displayed.
Station
Use this drop-down list box to select either all PSs, or the PS
within which you want to browse.
Tag
Browse Criteria
Use this text box to enter the browse criteria. Wildcard characters
can be used.
Match case
Use this check box to make the Browse Criteria case sensitive.
258 301027/C
Match whole tag

Use this check box if the Browse Criteria text is the entire name
of the required IO point.
Match initial tag segment
Use this check box if the Browse Criteria text is the beginning of
the name of the required IO points.
IO Status
Use these check boxes to restrict the search to IO points which
have the specified status:
• IO OK
• IO Manual
• IO Passive
• IO Error
• IO FailSafe
• IO Error Override
Browse by IO Tag
Use this command button to search for IO points whose name
satisfies the specified Browse Criteria.
Browse by Module Tag
Details
Clicking the Details button displays or removes the IO Point
Parameters and Eng. Signal Conditioning sections in the lower
part of the dialog box.
Browse results
The upper-left area displays information about the IO points
that satisfy the search criteria. This is the same information as
displayed on the IO Terminal Block dialog (see IO Terminal
Block on page 252), with one additional column:
• PS — The name of the PS that contains the IO point.
16.8.2 Shortcut menu

If you right-click on any IO point tag displayed in the browser
window, the following shortcut menu is displayed:
301027/C 259
Resize Columns
Resizes the columns displayed in the IO Point Browser dialog box
to fit the content of the columns.
Show IO Block
Allows you to view configuration information for the selected IO
Block by displaying the corresponding IO Terminal Block dialog
box. See IO Terminal Block on page 252.
260 301027/C
16.9 Properties — DpPs Serial port

The Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog box shows the properties
and configuration of a selected serial port.
To display the Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog box:
3 Expand IO Manager, ComAs and the required serial line to
locate the required serial port (in the example below Serial
port 101).
4 Click on the sub menu icon ( )

• A shortcut menu is displayed.
5 Select Properties on this shortcut menu.
• The Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog box is displayed.
The information provided on the Properties — DpPs Serial
port dialog box is intended primarily for Kongsberg Maritime
personnel.
301027/C 261
16.9.1 SerPort page
Enable configuration
When selected, the configuration shown is enabled.
Baud rate
Shows the baud rate (110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400 baud).
Parity
Shows the parity (No, Even, Odd).
Number of data bits
Shows the number of data bits (5, 6, 7, 8 bit).
Number of stop bits
Shows the number of stop bits (1, 2 bit).
Protocol
Protocols available; Ecma24, Kos100, End of File, End of
Record, Raw, Xon/Xoff, Siemens 3946L, 3946H, 3946RL,
3946RH, Measurex, UniTelWay, SMC, Polled raw, End of
Record/Raw, Kos 150, Inter Frame Gap, Time sync.
EOR char. input
Shows the End of Record character input in hexadecimal.
EOR char. output
Shows the End of Record character output in hexadecimal.
HW handshake
Shows the Hardware handshake (No, RTS@Send,
RTS@Receive) - (RTS is short for Request To Send).
262 301027/C
HW selection
Shows the Hardware selection (Default, RS232, RS422, RS485).
Auto disable interrupts
To automatically disable interrupts, select this check box and
click the OK or Apply button.
Max. interrupt rate receive
Shows the highest recorded receive interrupt rate for this serial
port (since startup or reset).
Max. interrupt rate exception
Shows the highest recorded exception interrupt rate for this serial
16.9.2 Int status page
The Int. status page of the Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog
for the ComAs driver displays the interrupt status of a selected
serial port.
Reset disabled serial port
To reset a disabled serial port, select this check box and click
the OK or Apply button.
Reset max. interrupt rate
To reset the displayed values for Max. receive interrupt rate and
Max. exception interrupt rate, select this check box and click
the OK or Apply button.
Disabled due to high receive rate
Indicates whether the selected port is disabled due to high receive
rate (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled).
Disabled due to high exception rate
Indicates whether the selected port is disabled due to high
exception rate (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled).
301027/C 263
Receive interrupt rate

Shows the current receive interrupt rate for this serial port.
Exception interrupt rate
Shows the current exception interrupt rate for this serial port.
Max. receive interrupt rate
Shows the highest recorded receive interrupt rate for this serial
Max. exception interrupt rate
Shows the highest recorded exception interrupt rate for this serial
16.10 Resetting a disabled serial line

A serial port may be automatically disabled by the system to
protect the K-Pos DP controller computer system from high
traffic caused by an excessively high number of interrupts.
If an automatic disable of interrupt has been performed when
reading serial line data from, for example, a position-reference
system, a timeout alarm is issued. The message includes the
relevant driver tag.
This section describes how to manually reset a disabled serial
line so that the process station can continue reading input on that
serial line. This procedure can be performed without restarting
the controller computer.
1 In the Dynamic Alarm Page of the Event List window,
right-click the relevant message.
2 Select Station Explorer on this shortcut menu.
• The Station Explorer dialog box for the serial line that has
an error is displayed.
3 Click the Driver Properties hotspot (the indicator to the right

of FanbeamDrv_2 in this example).
• The Driver Properties dialog box is displayed.
264 301027/C
4 Click the Driver operation page tab.

• The Driver operation tabbed page is displayed.
5 Select the Reset disabled serial port check box.

• The serial line is reset.
301027/C 265
17 BUILT-IN TRAINER
17.1 Trainer functions ......................................................266
17.2 Using the trainer.......................................................266
17.3 Setting the start position for the next session ...........268
17.4 Leaving the trainer ...................................................268
17.1 Trainer functions

The built-in trainer provides functions for operator training based
on a simulated system. Simulations are performed at the system
console with no additional equipment required.
In order to use an Operator Station for training, it must be
connected to the MainSimulator controller process station (PS)
group (see Connecting to a controller PS group on page 116).
When this condition is met, the text SIMULATING (or other
configuration-specific text) is displayed flashing on the title bar.
If an Operator Station is not in command of a controller PS
group, you can connect it to any available group (such as
MainSimulator) at any time. However, if the Operator Station
has command of a controller PS group, this system must be in
Standby mode before you can connect the Operator Station to
a different group.
In DP systems with more than one Operator Station, the built-in
trainer can be used at one OS at the same time as the other OSs
are used for normal DP operation, without affecting the actual
operation of the vessel. In this case the OSs are connected to
different controller PS groups. Before leaving an Operator
Station after a training session, we strongly recommend that you
prepare the OS for DP operation by connecting it to the Main
controller PS or another relevant controller PS group.
17.2 Using the trainer

To use the trainer:
1 Ensure that the vessel is controlled from the bridge or from
another OS. For systems with only one OS, the system must
be in Standby mode.
2 Select System→Connect.
• The Connect dialog box is displayed.
3 Select MainSimulator on the Connect dialog box.
4 Click the OK or Apply button.
• The Operator Station is connected to the MainSimulator
controller PS group.
266 301027/C
Built-in trainer
• All other Operator Stations are still connected to the Main

(or another relevant) controller PS group(s).
• While the Operator Station is connected to the
MainSimulator controller PS group, the text
SIMULATING (or other configuration-specific text) is
displayed flashing in the title bar.
5 Take command of MainSimulator at the Operator Station
(see Command transfer on page 107).
• The TAKE button status lamp on the operator panel is lit.
6 Select System →Trainer.
• The Trainer Settings dialog box is displayed.
• The values for Start Position, Wind Speed, etc. shown in

this dialog box are the values that were in use when the
previous training session was stopped (provided that no
stop or restart of the OS has taken place in the meantime).
7 If required, enter the Start position of the vessel from where
you want to start the simulation. You can select to move to
this position whenever the system returns to Standby mode
by selecting the corresponding check box.
8 Enter the required Wind and Sea Current values to be used
during the simulation.
9 Enter the vessel Draught to be used during the simulation.
• The system is now ready for simulation.
11 Use the system as you would during normal operation.
301027/C 267
17.3 Setting the start position for the next session

When the chart background display has been configured, you
may use the planning function in the Posplot view to find the start
position you want to use for the next trainer session. When the
correct start position has been found, change to Standby mode,
launch the Trainer Settings dialog box and click the Use last chart
center button. The last chart center will then be used as the start
position in your next session.
17.4 Leaving the trainer

Before leaving an Operator Station after a training session, we
strongly recommend that you prepare the OS for DP operation by
connecting it to the Main or another relevant controller PS group.
1 Go to Standby mode.
2 Select System →Connect.
• The Connect dialog box is displayed.
3 Select Main (or another relevant controller PS group).
• The Operator Station is connected to the Main (or another
relevant) controller PS group.
• The values for Start Position, Wind Speed, etc. entered
in the Trainer Settings dialog box are saved for use as
start-up values in a future training session.
268 301027/C
DP online consequence analysis
18 DP ONLINE CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS

18.1 DP online consequence analysis ..............................269
18.2 Selecting the DP class ..............................................270
18.3 Consequence analysis status messages ....................270
18.4 Consequence analysis alarm messages ....................270
18.1 DP online consequence analysis

The DP Online Consequence Analysis function performs
analyses to determine the vessel’s ability to maintain its position
and heading after predefined worst-case single equipment
failures. The analyses are called “online” because they consider
the present environmental conditions, thruster status and power
consumption.
This function satisfies the requirements of IMO Equipment Class
2 and Equipment Class 3.
The analysis checks whether the thrusters remaining in operation
after a worst-case single failure are able to generate the same
resultant thruster force and moment as required before the failure,
and whether the remaining generators are able to produce a
sufficient amount of power. An alarm message is issued if a
failure would result in lack of thrust or power, and subsequently
drift-off.
The worst-case single failures that are simulated are predefined
according to the power and thruster configuration of the vessel.
Typically, these failures will be the loss of one complete
switchboard, one engine room, or a group of thrusters that can
be affected by a single equipment failure.
Consequence analyses are performed cyclically, every minute,
whenever the following criteria are satisfied:
• The vessel is in Auto Position mode (consequence analysis
can also be performed in other modes, if configured).
• The position setpoint status (PosMode) displayed in the Status
bar is PRESENT (for Auto Position mode).
• The heading setpoint status (HdgMode) displayed in the
Status bar is PRESENT (for Auto Position mode).
• DP Class 2 or 3 is selected.
Note
By default, the DP Online Consequence Analysis function is
switched off. Prior to engaging Class 2 or Class 3 operations,
the corresponding class of operation must be selected using the
DP Class dialog box.
301027/C 269
18.2 Selecting the DP class

DP Class 2 or 3 must be selected on the Dp Class dialog box to
activate the DP Consequence Analysis.
To display this dialog box, select AutoPos→Dp Class.
If configured, the currently selected DP Class is indicated in the

Class field of the status bar.
18.3 Consequence analysis status messages

When the DP Online Consequence Analysis function is activated,
an information message is displayed:
Consequence analysis running class 2
or
Consequence analysis running class 3
When the system mode is changed from automatic control, or if
you explicitly turn off the function using the DP Class dialog box,
the following information message is displayed:
Consequence analysis stopped
During a change of position or heading, the failure simulations
are temporarily halted. When the vessel reaches PRESENT
position and PRESENT heading, the failure simulations are
started again. No information messages are issued for this type
of temporary halt.
18.4 Consequence analysis alarm messages

If an analysis detects that a given worst-case single equipment
failure will result in insufficient thrust or power to maintain the
vessel’s position and heading, an alarm message is displayed:
Consequence analysis drift off warning
This message is followed by additional information whose
content depends on the type of failure simulated and whether
insufficient thrust or insufficient power was detected. For
example:
270 301027/C
DP online consequence analysis
power critical if bus 1 lost

thrust critical if thrusters 1-4 lost
thrust critical if port diesel lost
If the message indicates that thrust is critical, you should enable
more thrusters. If the message indicates that power is critical,
you should make more power available. Alternatively, change
to a more favourable heading.
301027/C 271
19 DISPLAY VIEWS
19.1 Deviation view .........................................................272
19.2 Diesels view .............................................................276
19.3 General view ............................................................279
19.4 Joystick view............................................................281
19.5 LTW view ................................................................285
19.6 Numeric view...........................................................291
19.7 Performance area .....................................................293
19.8 Posplot view.............................................................298
19.9 Power view...............................................................312
19.10 Power Consumption view ........................................316
19.11 Refsys view ..............................................................317
19.12 Refsys Status view ...................................................325
19.13 Rotation Centers view..............................................326
19.14 Sensors view ............................................................327
19.15 Thruster views..........................................................332
19.16 Trends view..............................................................349
19.1 Deviation view

The Deviation view shows a combination of graphical and
numerical performance data. The information is displayed using
large, clear text and graphical symbols.
The information displayed depends on the current operating
mode.
See Selecting a display view on page 48 for a description of how
to select display views.
19.1.1 Position and heading

The information shown in Figure 41 is always displayed on the
Deviation view.
272 301027/C
Display views
Figure 41 Deviation view in Joystick mode
This is the present vessel position. If

you click this value, the position setpoint
together with the text Setpoint are displayed
in another colour for a few seconds.
This is the present vessel heading. If

you click this value, the heading setpoint
together with the text Setpoint are displayed
in another colour for a few seconds.
19.1.2 Position and heading deviation

In most of the DP operating modes:
• The deviation between the present position and the position
setpoint is displayed whenever both the surge and sway axes
are under automatic position control.
• The deviation between the present heading and the heading
setpoint is displayed whenever the yaw axis is under automatic
heading control.
301027/C 273
Figure 42 Deviation view in Auto Position mode
The position deviation is shown both

graphically and numerically.
The position deviation is indicated
dynamically by a filled circle whose radius
represents the deviation from the position
setpoint. The colour of the circle changes
in relation to the warning and alarm limits
for position deviation (if active). If the
position deviation exceeds the available
display range, a plus (+) sign is displayed
in the circle.
An arrow symbol shows whether the
estimated position is moving towards
(decreasing deviation) or away from
(increasing deviation) the position setpoint.
This arrow also changes colour depending on
increasing or decreasing position deviation.
The position of the arrow symbol indicates
the bearing from the position setpoint to the
present position.
274 301027/C
Display views
When the position warning and alarm limits

are active, they are shown as solid-drawn
circles. When inactive, they are shown as
dashed circles.
When placing the cursor above the
position deviation area, the cursor changes
appearance from an arrow to a pointing
hand. Clicking the left trackball button with
the hand displayed opens the Alarm Limits
dialog box, displaying the Position page. The
warning and alarm limits for vessel position
can be activated and changed on this page.
Using the view control dialog box, you can
select either a true or a relative display.
The heading deviation is shown both
The heading deviation is indicated
dynamically by a two-directional bar which
represents the deviation from the heading
setpoint. The colour of the bar changes in
relation to the warning and alarm limits for
heading deviation (if active). If the deviation
exceeds the available display range, a plus
(+) sign is displayed in the bar.
The heading deviation is defined positive
in the starboard direction relative to the
heading setpoint.
An arrow symbol shows whether the
estimated heading is moving towards
(decreasing deviation) or away from
(increasing deviation) the heading setpoint.
This arrow also changes colour depending on
increasing or decreasing heading deviation.
When the heading warning and alarm limits
are active, they are shown as solid-drawn
lines. When inactive, they are shown as
dashed lines.
When placing the cursor above the
heading deviation area, the cursor changes
appearance from an arrow to a pointing
hand. Clicking the left trackball button
with the hand displayed opens up the Alarm
Limits dialog box, displaying the Position
page. The warning and alarm limits for
301027/C 275
vessel heading can be activated and changed

on this page.
19.1.3 View controls

To display the view control dialog box:
1 Place the cursor anywhere in the Deviation view and click
the right trackball button.
• The Performance view control dialog box is displayed.
True
True display of position deviation. The graphical display of
position deviation is displayed in a fixed orientation (north up).
Relative
Relative display of position deviation. The graphical display
of position deviation is displayed relative to the vessel heading
(head up).
19.2 Diesels view

The Diesels view provides a simplified mimic display of the
vessel’s diesel engines and fuel rack system as seen from the
K-Pos DP system.
The information presented in this view is based on the following
signals received by the K-Pos DP system:
• The power produced by each main diesel generator
• The fuel rack reading
• Diesel clutched in or out
276 301027/C
Display views
Figure 43 Diesels view (example)
Main models for fuel-rack regulation in common use are:

• Propeller with two diesels and two shaft generators (as shown
in Figure 43).
• Propeller with one diesel, no shaft generator.
• Propeller with two diesels, no shaft generator.
• Propeller with one diesel, one shaft generator.
The configuration shown in this example view consists of
starboard and port propellers, each driven by two diesel engines
with fuel rack regulation system. Each diesel engine also drives a
generator. Each diesel engine is connected to the propeller via a
clutch and gearbox.
301027/C 277
Numerical and graphical displays

(bargraphs) of the power produced by main
diesel generators are shown.
Numerical and graphical displays (bargraph)
of the fuel rack load on the diesel engines
are shown.
Symbols with text indicating main diesel
generator (MDG 2) and diesel engine
(out_stbd) are displayed.
In the bottom right corner of the figure a
diesel engine clutch is displayed.
Colour codes for the generator, engine and
clutch symbols:
• Green — Connected/running
• Grey — Disconnected/not running
These symbols indicate gear and propeller.
The text indicate the name of the propeller.
Colour codes for the gear and propeller
symbols:
• Green — Connected
• Grey — Disconnected
These are numerical and graphical displays

of the mean fuel rack load on this propeller
shaft, based on averaging all fuel racks for
all diesels connected to this propeller.
The small red dot on the left side of the
bar graph is associated with the fuel rack
limitation.
If no reduction is performed, the position
of the red dot equals the limit at which
reduction will start (the fuel-rack limit). The
fuel-rack reduction starts when the load on
one or both of the diesel engines exceeds the
fuel-rack limit. The red dot will then move
downwards to indicate the actual amount
of fuel-rack reduction to be performed, i.e.
equal to the propeller demand reduction (of
pitch and RPM).
278 301027/C
Display views
19.3 General view

The General view shows a combination of graphical and
numerical performance data.
The information displayed depends on the current operational
mode.
19.3.1 Position, heading and speed

The information shown in Figure 44 is always displayed on the
General view.
Figure 44 General view in Joystick mode
This is the present position. If you click this

value, the position setpoint together with the
text Setpoint are displayed in another colour
for a few seconds.
This is the present heading. If you click this

value, the heading setpoint together with the
text Setpoint are displayed in another colour
for a few seconds.
301027/C 279
This is the present Rate Of Turn.
This is the present true speed (relative to the

ground) both forward/aft (surge axis) and
port/starboard (sway axis).
19.3.2 Position and heading deviation

In most of the DP operating modes:
• The deviation between the present position and the position
setpoint is displayed whenever both the surge and sway axes
are under automatic position control.
• The deviation between the present heading and the heading
setpoint is displayed whenever the yaw axis is under automatic
heading control.
Figure 45 General view in Auto Position mode
280 301027/C
Display views
The position deviation is shown both

Using the view control dialog box, you can
select either a true or a relative display.
See Deviation view on page 272 for a
detailed description of this display.
The heading deviation is shown both
See Deviation view on page 272 for a
detailed description of this display.

1 Place the cursor anywhere in the General view and click the
right trackball button.
True
True display of position deviation. The graphical display of
position deviation is displayed in a fixed orientation (north up).
Relative
Relative display of position deviation. The graphical display
of position deviation is displayed relative to the vessel heading
(head up).
19.4 Joystick view

The Joystick view shows the thrust setpoint and response, and
the vessel speed in the various axes, to assist during positioning
with the joystick alone.
301027/C 281
Figure 46 Joystick view (example)
Shows the axes that are under joystick

control.
In the example view displayed, all three
axes Yaw, Surge and Sway are controlled
by the joystick.
This is a graphical display of the rotational
moment setpoint (upper) and the obtained
rotational moment (lower).
The numerical value of the obtained
rotational moment is displayed.
The values represent the demand from
the controller and the obtained moment
calculated from the thruster feedback.
282 301027/C
Display views
This is a graphical display of the surge force

setpoint (left) and the obtained surge force
(right).
The numerical value of the obtained surge
force is displayed.
The values represent the demand from the
controller and the obtained surge force
This is a graphical display of the sway force

setpoint (upper) and the obtained sway force
(lower).
The numerical value of the obtained sway
force is displayed.
This value represent the demand from the
controller and the obtained sway force
This is the estimated surge and sway speed
at the vessel’s Midships position.
The resulting force and speed vectors are

shown graphically.
The numeric values show the range of the
display for both force and speed.
301027/C 283
This is the estimated sway speed at the bow

of the vessel. This value is calculated from
the vessel dimensions and the estimated
Rate Of Turn.
This is the estimated sway speed at the stern
of the vessel. This value is calculated from
the vessel dimensions and the estimated
Rate Of Turn.
This is the estimated Rate Of Turn.
This shows the status of the speed estimates.

• OK — The system is receiving acceptable
position and heading information, and at
least one speed sensor is In Use.
• Manual — Manual speed is In Use.
• Model — No speed sensor or Manual
speed enabled, but at least one
position-reference system is accepted.
• Dropout — No speed sensors or
position-reference systems enabled.
This shows the present joystick thrust setting
as selected on the Joystick Settings dialog
box (see Joystick settings on page 79) which
can be either Full Thrust or Reduced Thrust.
The present joystick precision setting as
selected on the Joystick Settings dialog box
is shown (see Joystick settings on page 79).
The joystick precision setting can be either
High Speed Precision, General Precision or
Low Speed Precision.
This shows the axes that are currently
selected for environmental compensation
(see Joystick settings on page 79).
This shows the joystick demand as a

percentage of the maximum available
demand in surge, sway and yaw axes.
284 301027/C
Display views
A graphic display of the joystick setpoint

is shown. If this Operator Station is not
in command, the graphic display shows
both the setpoint from this Operator Station
(Local) and the setpoint from the operator
Station that is in command.
This information can be used to ensure
a bumpless transfer when you move the
command from one OS to another.
This information can also be used for
checking that the joystick is functioning.
Consider whether the joystick is functioning
by comparing the displayed joystick setpoint
to the actual joystick deflection (surge and
sway) and the degree of rotation (yaw).
19.5 LTW view

The Light-weight Taut Wire (LTW) is based on measurements
and calculations of the vessel’s position relative to a fixed point
on the sea bed.
A gimbal head on a boom over the side of the vessel is connected
by a wire to a depressor weight on the sea bed.
The vertical component of the wire length is measured when the
depressor is lowered onto the sea bed. The angles between the
wire and the vertical, both in the alongships and the athwarthships
axes (see Figure 47), are measured as the vessel moves away
from the point where the depressor weight was deployed.
The position is calculated based on this data. The actual length
of the wire is also calculated and presented in the LTW view
(see Figure 48) Corrections are applied to allow for the offset
distance between the sensor on the gimbal head and the vessel’s
rotation center.
301027/C 285
Figure 47 LTW position-reference system
Gimbal head
Wire Draught Wire angle

angle alongships
athwarthships
Wire
Wire Wire length, Water length, Wire
length vertical depth vertical length
component component
Depressor Seabed
Depressor
weight Seabed weight
CD2824
The draught is measured, and the vertical component of the wire

length is recalculated whenever the draught changes. Changes of
water depth due to turning of the tide are not taken into account.
In these circumstances the depressor weight must be lifted off the
sea bed and re-lowered to have the system record the change
of wire length.
The LTW view allows you to monitor the performance of a
Light-weight Taut Wire (LTW) position-reference system.
The position of the depressor weight is shown relative to the
position of the gimbal head (the center of the graphic display).
The maximum operational area is also shown.
286 301027/C
Display views
Figure 48 LTW view (example)
301027/C 287
These are the gimbal head alongship and

athwartship axes. The intersection of the
axes represents the gimbal head position and
is always at the center of the display.
The symbol represents the position of the

depressor weight relative to the gimbal head.
This shows the maximum operational area.
These are the display range value,

decrease/increase buttons and grid spacing
value. The range is the distance from center
to edge of plot. The button decreases
the display range. The button increases
the display range.
You can adjust the grid spacing using the
view control dialog box (see View controls on
page 289). The grid spacing is automatically
adjusted when decreasing/increasing the
display range.
288 301027/C
Display views
This shows the status of the “Mooring On”

signal from the LTW system. This signal
indicates when the depressor weight is on
the sea bed.
This shows the angle of the taut wire in the
alongship and athwartships directions as
measured at the gimbal head.
The Along angle is positive when the gimbal
head is forward of the depressor weight.
The Athw angle is positive when the gimbal
head is to starboard of the depressor weight.
This shows the position of the depressor
weight relative to the gimbal head.
The Along position is positive when the
depressor weight is forward of the gimbal
head.
The Athw position is positive when the
depressor weight is to starboard of the
gimbal head.
This shows the wire length.
Total is the wire length measured by the
gimbal head.
Vertical is the depth of the depressor weight
relative to the gimbal head, measured by the
wire length when the depressor weight was
lowered onto the sea bed.

1 Place the cursor anywhere in the LTW view and click the
301027/C 289
• The Light Taut Wire Plot view control dialog box is

displayed.
Grid
Show
To show or hide the grid.
Square
Square grid.
Circular
Circular grid.
Spacing
The spacing (distance) between grid lines or circles. You can
change the grid spacing by clicking the down arrow and selecting
a new value from the drop-down list.
The grid spacing is automatically adjusted when
decreasing/increasing the display range.
Light Taut Wire Graphics
LTW 1, LTW 2, LTW 3, LTW 4
Allows you to select the LTW system whose position information
is to be displayed in the main graphic area of the view.
Range
Allows you to specify the display range explicitly by typing in
a value in the text box.
Incr. Range
This button allows you to increase the display range in fixed
steps.
290 301027/C
Display views
Decr. Range
This button allows you to decrease the display range in fixed
steps.
19.6 Numeric view

The Numeric view shows performance data in numerical form.
Figure 49 Numeric view (example)
The position setpoint, present position and

position deviation in north (N) and east (E)
direction are shown.
These are the position deviation as range
and both true and relative bearings from the
present position to the position setpoint.
Heading setpoint, present heading and

heading deviation are shown.
These are the Rate Of Turn setpoint and
present Rate Of Turn.
301027/C 291
This displays the vessel speed setpoint,

present speed and true or relative direction
of vessel movement (as selected using the
Performance view control dialog box).
This displays the warning and alarm limits

for position and heading deviation. The
check boxes show whether the limits are
currently active.
Current force displayed as relative values

(selected using the Performance view control
dialog box).
This is the relative sea current force exerted
on the vessel in Surge and Sway directions.
Moment is the rotation moment exerted on
the vessel by the sea current.
Current force displayed as true values
(selected using the Performance view control
dialog box).
This is the sea current force exerted on the
vessel in north (N) and east (E) directions.
Moment is the rotation moment exerted on
the vessel by the sea current.

1 Place the cursor anywhere in the Numeric view and click the
True
True display of direction of vessel movement and current force
(relative to the North direction).
292 301027/C
Display views
Relative
Relative display of direction of vessel movement and current
force (relative to the vessel heading).
19.7 Performance area

The performance area shows important performance information
to allow immediate assessment of the situation. The content
of this view cannot be altered by the operator, but change
automatically according to the selected main mode.
Several parts of the performance area are click-sensitive (see
Tooltip/hotspot cursor and change of cursor image on page 46.
At the same time as the cursor image changes when it is moved
over a click-sensitive object, a hotspot cursor text in a yellow
frame (the tooltip) is displayed for a few seconds. This text
explains the use of the click-sensitive object.
Figure 50 Performance area (example with Auto Position mode selected)
This shows status information for gyrocompasses, wind

sensors, VRSs, thrusters and position-reference systems.
The Gyro, Wind and VRS indicators (orange lamp and
text) are only shown when the gyrocompasses/sensors are
disabled. The Thrusters indicator (orange lamp and the
text Thrust) is only shown when one or more of the vessels
three axis (surge sway or yaw) are under automatic control
and the thrust being provided by the propulsion system is
insufficient to maintain automatic control.
Reference Systems shows the status for each
position-reference system or transponder. The information
displayed is similar to the reference system status
information in the Refsys view (see Refsys view on
page 317). In addition, the position Offset during the last
second is displayed as a bar graph (portion of 10 m) for
each reference system.
301027/C 293
The Gyro/Wind/VRS and Reference Systems areas are

click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a pointing
hand when positioned over these areas. Clicking the left
trackball button displays the relevant display view in the
working area: the Sensors view or the RefSys Status view.
This shows the consumed power for each main bus in
graphical form as a percentage of available power.
The view is dynamically updated to always show the
current bus topology.
This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to
a pointing hand when positioned over this area. Clicking
the left trackball button displays the Power view in the
working area.
This shows numerical and graphical information relevant

for manual and automatic heading control functions.
The information changes automatically according to the
selected main mode.
In Auto Position and Joystick modes:
The vessel heading as estimated by the Vessel Model is
shown graphically against a rotating compass rose and as a
numeric value. This is indicated by the text Model being
shown. The heading setpoint is shown graphically on the
compass rose as a vertical purple line. The left and right
arrows indicate the direction in which the vessel is turning;
port (left pink arrow) or starboard (right pale green arrow).
the left trackball button opens up the Sensors dialog box.
The vessel’s Rate Of Turn (ROT) is shown numerically.
In Auto Position mode and Joystick mode with automatic
heading control:
The heading deviation is shown both graphically
and numerically. The heading deviation is indicated
dynamically by a two-directional bar which represents the
deviation from the heading setpoint. The colour of the bar
changes in relation to the warning and alarm limits for
heading deviation (if active). If the deviation exceeds the
available display range, a plus (+) sign is displayed in the
bar.
294 301027/C
Display views
An arrow symbol shows whether the estimated heading

is moving towards (decreasing deviation) or away from
(increasing deviation) the heading setpoint. This arrow
changes colour depending on increasing or decreasing
deviation.
the left trackball button opens up the Alarm Limits dialog
box.
In Joystick mode:
The turning force setpoint and the resulting vessel response
is shown by two, two-directional bars and a numeric value.
The rotation of the joystick is indicated by the upwards
pointing (purple) arrow.
The turning force setpoint is indicated by the upper (purple)
two-directional bar.
The obtained turning moment is indicated by the lower
(green) two-directional bar and the numeric value (in
percent port or starboard).
the left trackball button opens up the Joystick Settings
dialog box.
In Auto Position mode and Joystick mode with automatic
position control in both surge and sway:
The position deviation is shown both graphically and
numerically.
The position deviation is indicated dynamically by a
filled circle whose radius represents the deviation from
the position setpoint. The colour of the circle changes
in relation to the warning and alarm limits for position
deviation (if active). If the position deviation exceeds the
available display range, a plus (+) sign is displayed in the
circle.
An arrow symbol shows whether the estimated position
is moving towards (decreasing deviation) or away from
(increasing deviation) the position setpoint. This arrow
changes colour depending on increasing or decreasing
deviation.
301027/C 295

box.
In Joystick mode:
The joystick setpoint in surge/sway is shown graphically
and numerically (by a set of four pairs of bars arranged
in a cross formation).
The joystick setpoint is indicated by the purple left or upper
bar and shown as two percentage values (ahead or astern
for surge and port or starboard for sway). The response to
the joystick setpoint (feedback) is indicated by the green
right or lower bar.
The tilt of the joystick is indicated by the filled purple circle
and dashed purple coordinate lines that are positioned
relative to the center of the cross formation (zero tilt).
Note
The joystick setpoint relative to the joystick tilt depends on
the joystick thrust and the active joystick precision settings.

box.
In Joystick mode with either the surge or the sway axis
under automatic control:
The joystick setpoint and response for the axis in joystick
control is indicated as described for Joystick mode above.
Position deviation in the axis under automatic control is
indicated by a single two-directional bar which represents
the deviation from the position setpoint. The colour of the
bar changes in relation to the warning and alarm limits
for position deviation (if active). If the position deviation
exceeds the available display range, a plus (+) sign is
displayed in the bar.
box.
296 301027/C
Display views
This is the present position and the present true speed

(relative to the ground) both forward/aft (surge axis) and
port/starboard (sway axis). If you click these values,
the position setpoints together with the text Setpoint are
displayed in another colour for a few seconds.
the left trackball button displays the position and speed
setpoints in another colour for a few seconds.
This is the Force Balance area.

The direction and magnitude of the thruster turning
moment is indicated by the green, two-directional bar
located at the top of the area.
If the yaw axis is under automatic control and the thruster
force being used to maintain the vessel on the wanted
heading exceeds predefined limit values for percentage of
available thruster force, the colour of the two-directional
bar changes (typical values):
• Orange — 60% to 80%.
• Red — 80% to 100%.
The direction of the thruster force, relative to the fore/aft
and port/starboard axes of the vessel is indicated by a green
arrowhead that points out from the center of the vessel
symbol. The calculated magnitude of the thruster force
is represented by the shape and size (width) of the green
arrowhead.
If the surge and/or sway axes are under automatic control
and the thruster force being used to maintain the vessel at
the wanted position in the selected axes exceeds predefined
limit values for percentage of available thruster force, the
colour of the arrowhead and the text Force changes (typical
values):
• Orange — 60% to 80%.
• Red — 80% to 100%.
The direction the wind comes from, relative to the fore/aft
and port/starboard axes of the vessel is indicated by a
rotating purple arrowhead that points in towards the center
of the vessel symbol. The magnitude of the wind force
is represented by the shape and size (width) of the purple
arrowhead.
The identification of the wind sensor in use is shown by
the number following the purple text Wind. If all of the
wind sensors are disabled or become unserviceable the
301027/C 297
last known valid wind sensor measurement is used. The

identification number of the wind sensor in use is removed
and the word Manual (in blue) is displayed.
The direction the sea current comes from, relative to the
fore/aft and port/starboard axes of the vessel is indicated by
a rotating blue arrowhead that points in towards the center
of the vessel symbol. The magnitude of the sea current
force is represented by the shape and size (width) of the
blue arrowhead.
the left trackball button displays the thruster main (Thr
Main) view in the working area.
19.8 Posplot view

The Posplot view displays the vessel’s position relative to the
position and heading setpoints and to other displayed objects,
such as the position of transponders. The prevailing wind and
current are also displayed.
Using the Posplot view control dialog box, you can:
• Select either a true or a relative display, with either the
position setpoint or the present vessel position at the center of
the display (see Mode page on page 304).
• Display or remove various features on the view (see Show
page on page 305).
• Show or hide a chart on the Posplot view, and also show or
hide the compass rose. In addition, you can select between
showing the classical circular view or using the entire view
for chart display (see Chart page on page 306).
• Show or hide the grid, and select grid type and grid spacing
(see Grid page on page 306).
Note
Grid display is only possible when the range is 10 000 m
or less. When the range is larger than 10 000 m, the grid
disappears automatically. Maximum range is 3 000 km.
• Specify the display range, i.e. distance from center to edge of

plot (see Range page on page 307).
• Display or hide a trace line and trend symbols, and also
specify the sample rate and the extent of the trace line/trend
symbols (see Trace page on page 308).
The EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) button can be used for
measuring positions, distances and bearings on the display.
298 301027/C
Display views

Figure 51 Posplot view (example)
The example Posplot view shown in Figure 51 shows some of the

available display features. The figures with text that follow the
example describes all the standard features of the Posplot view.
Additional features which relate to specific operational modes are
described together with the appropriate operating procedure.
301027/C 299
The compass rose is marked with degrees.

The north/south and east/west geographical
axes are displayed. The red portion of the
north/south axis indicates the direction of
north.
This is the vessel symbol that indicates the
position of the vessel, relative to known
reference points and directions. The vessel’s
Midships position is marked with a small
cross. The currently-selected rotation center
is marked with a small circle. The size of
the vessel symbol is dynamically scaled
according to the selected display range. This
vessel symbol is exchanged by an unscaled
symbol at small and large range values.
Note
When changing the Posplot view to close
range or long range, the vessel symbol
changes from showing the correct form and
dimensions of the vessel into a simplified
shape with a constant size.
This is the position setpoint symbol. By

selecting and moving this symbol you can
change the position setpoint (see Marking a
new position setpoint on the Posplot view on
page 185).
When relaxed controller mode is in use
(selected from the Gain dialog box), the
radius for relaxed control is shown as a
shaded area with the position setpoint
as center. The area around this circle is
click-sensitive. You can easily adjust the
relaxed control radius by clicking in this
area to open the Gain dialog box to set a new
value. If you select to hide the setpoint from
the Show page on the Posplot view control
dialog box (see Show page on page 305), the
shaded area indicating the relaxed control
radius will also be hidden.
300 301027/C
Display views
When Green controller mode is in use

(selected from the Gain dialog box), the
outer and inner control radii are indicated on
the Posplot view, with the position setpoint
as center. The inner radius is indicated by a
green, shaded circle.
The predicted trajectory for the vessel is
displayed as a line pointing from the rotation
center.
For more information about display

presentation of controller modes, see
Display presentation of Controller Mode on
page 71.
The position carrot that regulates smooth
vessel movement is displayed as a small
asterisk. When the position setpoint is
changed, the position carrot moves towards
the new setpoint. The speed of the carrot’s
movement depends on the speed setpoint.
This is the heading setpoint symbol. By

selecting and moving this symbol you can
change the heading setpoint (see Marking a
new heading setpoint on the Posplot view on
page 195).
This is the present heading symbol.
The heading carrot that regulates smooth

vessel movement is displayed as a small
pointer. When the heading setpoint is
changed, the heading carrot moves towards
the new setpoint. The speed of the carrot’s
movement depends on the Rate Of Turn
setpoint.
301027/C 301
This shows the rotation center. When

a rotation center other than Midships is
used, the coordinates of the rotation center
relative to Midships is displayed. This area
is click-sensitive. If you click this text, the
selected (but not necessarily active) rotation
center is displayed in another colour for a
few seconds.
This displays range value and
decrease/increase buttons. The Range
value is the distance from center to edge
of plot. The button decreases the
displayed range. The button increases
the displayed range.
The Grid value is the spacing between grid
lines or circles.
The grid spacing is automatically adjusted
when decreasing/increasing the display
range.
This shows the wind arrow. The arrow
rotates around the compass rose to show the
true wind direction (filtered measurement
from the wind sensor). An arrow pointing
toward the plot indicates “comes from”
direction, and an arrow pointing outwards
from the plot indicates “goes to” direction.
The direction of the arrow depends on the
units setting for wind direction as selected
using the Display Units dialog box (see Wind,
waves and sea current direction on page 63).
This is the true wind speed and direction
(filtered measurements from the wind
sensor). An “s” in front of the “degrees”
symbol in the unit for wind direction means
“setting” (goes to). This is selected using the
Display Units dialog box (see Wind, waves
and sea current direction on page 63).
302 301027/C
Display views
This shows the true sea-current arrow. The

arrow rotates around the compass rose to
show the true sea-current direction. An
arrow pointing toward the plot indicates
“comes from” direction, and an arrow
pointing outwards from the plot indicates
“goes to” direction. The direction of the
arrow depends on the units setting for
sea current direction as selected using the
Display Units dialog box (see Wind, waves
and sea current direction on page 63).
This is the sea-current speed and true
direction. An “s” in front of the “degrees”
symbol in the unit for current direction
means “setting” (goes to) if selected using
the Display Units dialog box (see Wind,
waves and sea current direction on page 63).
This shows a transponder symbol for a
A circle around a transponder symbol
indicates that this transponder is the
Reference Origin. An empty circle indicates
that the Reference Origin transponder has
been deselected.
These are position warning and alarm limit
circles (centred on the position setpoint).
With automatic surge and sway control,
and with position limits enabled, these
circles indicate the warning and alarm limits
for position deviation. When the vessel
reference point crosses the warning limit
circle, a warning is given. When the vessel
reference point crosses the alarm limit circle,
an alarm is given. The position warning
and alarm limit circles are hidden when
the position setpoint is hidden (see Show
page on page 305).
301027/C 303
These are heading warning and alarm limit

markers (centred on the heading setpoint).
With automatic yaw control, and with
heading limits enabled, these markers
indicate the warning and alarm limits for
heading deviation. When the vessel heading
crosses the warning limit, a warning is
given. When the vessel heading crosses the
alarm limit, an alarm is given. The heading
warning and alarm limit markers are hidden
when the position setpoint is hidden (see
Show page on page 305).
This shows the EBL (Electronic Bearing
Line) button. This feature allows you to
view the coordinates of positions on the
display (see EBL function on page 309).

1 Place the cursor anywhere in the Posplot view and click the
• The Posplot view control dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the required page tab.
19.8.1.1 Mode page
Plot Orientation and Centerpoint

Relative, Vessel
Relative display centred on the vessel. The compass rose is
displayed relative to the vessel heading, while the heading of the
304 301027/C
Display views
vessel symbol is fixed. The vessel symbol is placed with the

currently-selected rotation center at the center of the display.
Relative, Position Setpoint
Relative display centred on the position setpoint. The compass
rose is displayed relative to the vessel heading, while the heading
of the vessel symbol is fixed. The position setpoint (required
position) is placed at the center of the display.
True, Vessel
True display centred on the vessel. The compass rose is displayed
in a fixed orientation (north-up), while the heading of the vessel
symbol is shown relative to the compass rose. The vessel symbol
is placed with the currently-selected rotation center at the center
of the display.
True, Position Setpoint
True display centred on the position setpoint. The compass rose
is displayed in a fixed orientation (north-up), while the heading
of the vessel symbol is shown relative to the compass rose. The
position setpoint (required position) is placed at the center of
the display.
Note
If the K-Pos DP system is equipped with the Chart Server
Application, note that it is possible to toggle off the display of the
compass rose on the Posplot view (see Chart page on page 306).
This makes it more difficult to see whether a relative or true plot
orientation is used.
19.8.1.2 Show page
Show/Hide
Display or remove various features of the Posplot view.
301027/C 305
The Setpoint, Carrot, Refsys and Wind/Current features are

described previously in this section.
Selecting Green Prediction displays the predicted trajectory for
the vessel as a line pointing from the rotation center.
19.8.1.3 Chart page
If the Chart Server Application is installed, a chart server can be

displayed as background in the Posplot view. See the separate
Chart Server Application Operator Manual.
19.8.1.4 Grid page
Show
Show or hide the grid.
Spacing
The spacing (distance) between grid lines or circles. The grid
spacing can be changed by clicking the down arrow and selecting
306 301027/C
Display views

Type
The type of grid.
Use UTM
UTM grid can be selected. The grid on the Posplot view is rotated
with an angle that corresponds with the Meridian convergence
displayed.
19.8.1.5 Range page
Distance from Center ...to Edge of Plot

Allows you to specify the display range explicitly by typing in
a value in the text box.
Increase Range
steps.
Decrease Range
steps.
301027/C 307
19.8.1.6 Trace page
Vessel Position/Heading History

Trace line
It is possible to select to show or hide a trace line of the vessel
movements (Show) and specify the sample rate (Sampling) and the
extent of the trace (Memory) to be stored. The trace line shows
the path followed by the currently-selected vessel rotation center.
Figure 52 Posplot trace line (example)
Trend symbols
It is possible to select to show or hide a series of vessel symbols
indicating vessel movement and position (Show) and specify the
308 301027/C
Display views
sample rate (Sampling) and extent of the trend symbols (Memory)

to be stored.
Figure 53 Posplot trend symbols (example)
Note
With the Posplot view at close range when the simplified symbol
is displayed, the “trended” symbols are not shown.
Clear All
Clicking this button permanently clears all the trend symbols and
the trace line both in memory and on the Posplot view.
19.8.2 EBL function

The EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) function allows you to view
the geographic coordinates of any position on the Posplot view,
the distance of this position from the present position of the
vessel, and both the true and relative bearings to the position
from the present position of the vessel.
To display the EBL:
1 Click the EBL button.
• The EBL dialog box is displayed (see Figure 54).
2 Move the trackball.
301027/C 309
• A dotted line is displayed from the present vessel position

to the position indicated with the trackball.
• The coordinates, range, and true and relative bearings of
the indicated position are displayed on the EBL dialog
box.
3 Click again to fix the indicated position.
• The EBL dialog box is continuously updated with the
relative range and bearing from the vessel to the indicated
position.
Figure 54 The EBL function
19.8.3 Panning function

You can easily change the coordinates for the center of the
Posplot view using the panning function. The position of the
cursor in the Posplot view when activating the function will
then be moved to the center of the view. This can be especially
useful, for example, when plotting waypoints for a new track
using the Waypoint dialog box (see separate Auto Track Mode
Operator Manual).
The panning function is available from the top of the shortcut
menu. The panning related commands on the shortcut menu will
change depending on whether or not panning has been selected
(see Figure 55).
310 301027/C
Display views
Figure 55 Example Posplot shortcut menu - Before (left) and

after (right) having selected the panning function
To use the panning function:

1 Place the cursor on the Posplot view at the new position
around which the view is to be centred.
2 Click the right trackball button.
• The Posplot shortcut menu is displayed (see the menu on
the left side in Figure 55).
3 Select Center Here.
• The selected position now becomes the new center of the
Posplot view and the text Panning ON is shown in red in
the upper right corner of the view.
When the panning function is on, the following commands related

to panning are available on the shortcut menu (see Figure 55):
Center Reset
Resets the center of the view to the original position, i.e. the
vessel position or position setpoint, depending on the center point
selected on the Mode page of the Posplot view control dialog box.
It also switches the panning function off.
Center Here
Selects a new position for the center of the Posplot view.
The panning function is automatically switched off if the rotation
center is changed or another center point is selected on the Mode
page of the Posplot view control dialog box.
301027/C 311
The panning function may be automatically switched on in Mixed

Joystick mode, dependent on the configuration of your vessel. If
required it can be switched off again by selecting Center Reset.
19.9 Power view

The Power view is a simplified mimic display of the vessel’s
electrical power system as seen from the K-Pos DP system.
Normally the K-Pos DP system is supplied with information
about:
• The power produced by each main generator.
• Which power bus each generator is connected to.
• How the power buses are connected.
• How the thrusters are connected to the power buses.
The thruster power consumption is either measured directly or
312 301027/C
Display views
Figure 56 Power view (example)
This is a generator symbol showing the

produced power both as a numerical value
and graphically as a percentage of the
nominal power.
The position of the generator breaker symbol
shows whether the generator is connected
to the power bus or not. In addition, the
generator breaker symbol is colour-coded.
Red indicates disconnected, green indicates
connected.
301027/C 313
This is a thruster symbol showing the

consumed power both as a numerical value
and graphically as a percentage of nominal
power consumption.
The position of the thruster switch symbol
shows whether or not the thruster is
connected to the power bus. In addition
the thruster switch symbol is colour coded.
Red indicates disconnected, green indicates
connected.
The internal names (I/O tags) of the
generator breaker, bus and thruster switches
can be displayed using the Power Plot view
control dialog box (see below).
The total nominal and consumed power from

the generators connected to each main bus
or sub-bus can be displayed using the Power
Plot view control dialog box (see below).
A trend plot is displayed. You can select the
information to be displayed using the Power
Plot view control dialog box (see below).

1 Either:
a Click the trend display of the Power view,
or
b Place the cursor anywhere in the Power view and click
314 301027/C
Display views
• The Power Plot view control dialog box is displayed.
Present
Selects whether to display the total nominal and produced power
from the generators connected to each Main Bus or each Sub Bus.
Show/Hide
If configured, selects whether or not to display the internal names
(IO Tags) of the generator breaker, bus and thruster switches.
Plot
The trend plot to be displayed.
Time span
The time span for the trend plot.
Y axis Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y-axis Range dialog box which
allows you to select automatic scaling or to manually set the
upper and lower limits for the y-axis plot scale.
Auto
Selecting this option will set the Y-axis range automatically.
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits manually.
For a detailed description of the available trend plots (see Trends
view on page 349).
301027/C 315
19.10 Power Consumption view

The Power Consumption view shows:
• The consumed power for each main bus in numerical and
graphical form as a percentage of available power.
• Which sub-buses are grouped under each main bus.
• The available power for each main bus in numerical form.
The view is dynamically updated to always show the current
bus topology.
Figure 57 Power Consumption view (example)
316 301027/C
Display views
The consumed power for each main bus in

numerical form is displayed.
The consumed power for each main bus is
shown in graphical form as a percentage of
available power for each main bus.
The sub-buses that are grouped under each
main bus are designated Main Bus A, Main
Bus B and Main Bus C.
This is the available power for each main

bus displayed in numerical form.
19.11 Refsys view

The Refsys view shows the individual and resulting performance
of the position-reference systems that are currently enabled.
The general characteristics of position-reference systems are
described in Position information on page 145.
301027/C 317
Figure 58 Refsys view (example)
These are the display range value,

decrease/increase buttons and grid spacing
value. The range is the distance from center
to edge of plot. The button decreases
the display range. The button increases
the display range.
You can adjust the grid spacing using
the Refsys view control dialog box (see
Grid page on page 324). The grid
spacing is automatically adjusted when
318 301027/C
Display views
The center of the plot is the present vessel

position. Using the Refsys view control
dialog box (see Mode page on page 323),
you can select either a true or a relative
display.
A colour-coded circle is displayed with a
radius equal to the minimum prediction
error limit and centred on the present vessel
position.
A colour-coded circle is displayed with a
radius equal to the median test acceptance
limit and centred on the median value.
When the Median test is inactive, the Median
Test Limit field will show OFF and the circle
will not be displayed. See Reference System
Settings dialog box on page 153 for detailed
information about when the median test is
active.
This shows a zoomed-in view of the center
of the plot.
For each position-reference system, the
capital letter with no circle around it
represents the last raw position measurement
for this system.
small inner circle with a capital letter inside
represents the filtered position measurement
for this system.
outer circle (dashed) represents the standard
deviation for this system.
The small crosses represent a one minute
trace of the raw data measurements from a
selected position-reference system.
An error ellipse is displayed. There is a
certain statistical confidence (95%) that the
vessel’s position is within the region that is
encircled by this ellipse (The error region
in this example has the shape of a circle,
but generally the region may have an oval
shape).
301027/C 319
This indicates the legends used for plotting.

Colour coding and capital letters help to
differentiate the various position-reference
systems.
These are numerical values for the minimum

prediction error limit and the median test
limit. The two circles to the left indicate the
colour coding used on the plot.
The Median Test field will show the text
OFF when the Median Test is set to Off on
either the Reference System Settings dialog
box (see Reference System Settings dialog
box on page 153) or the Validation page
of the Reference System dialog box (see
Validation page on page 159). The text OFF
will also be displayed when less than three
position-reference systems are operational.
By clicking on one of the reference system
names in the lower-left corner of the view,
you can plot a one minute trace of the
raw-data position measurements for the
selected system.
Each position sample is indicated with a “+”
on the plot. The name of the selected system
is shown. Click the Clear button to stop
plotting and to remove the raw-data position
samples from the plot.
This shows the status for each reference
system or transponder: either Calibrating,
Online, Relative, Offline or Lost. For
reference systems in monitoring state, the
status text is shown with Mon as prefix. If the
measurements are acceptable, Calibrating
and Online are displayed in green (if the
last sample was received) or in orange (if
the last sample was not received). If a
position-reference system has a transponder
that is defined and enabled as mobile, then
Relative is displayed instead of Online,
provided that the optional Follow Target
mode has been previously selected (i.e. at
least once).
320 301027/C
Display views
If the measurements are lost, Offline

is displayed in red, however, if the
measurements are lost during calibration,
Lost is displayed in red. When a reference
system is turned off, the weight of that
system is set to zero, and Offline is displayed
in red before the system is removed from
the Refsys view.
The position-reference system that is
providing the Reference Origin is marked
with an asterisk.
A unique capital letter and colour code is
assigned to each reference system to make
it easier to differentiate the various systems
on the plot.
Numerical values and horizontal bars show
the weighting applied to the measurements
from each reference system during the last
second. The sum of weights of reference
systems with Online status is always one
(1.0). If no new update is received from
a specific reference system during the
previous second, the weight for this system
is set to zero (and Online shown in orange).
The colour-coded horizontal bar is not
displayed for position-reference systems
that have an enabled mobile transponder, i.e.
ones with a Relative status.
In the lower right corner of the Refsys view, numerical data or
a trend plot is displayed. Using the Refsys view control dialog
box (see Mode page on page 323) you can select between various
types of numerical data and trend plots:
301027/C 321
Position
These are numerical values for the calibrated
position (for each reference system) as used
by the DP system. The data are presented
according to current display units/position
selection. Note that colour coding is used.
Transponder Coordinates
These are numerical values for the origin of
the particular reference system, for example
the position of an HPR or LBL transponder
or an Artemis Fix antenna. Note that colour
coding is used.
Raw Position
These are numerical values of raw
(uncompensated and untransformed)
position measurements (for each reference
system) as received by the DP system.
The type of reference system determines
how the position is displayed: either as
Along/Stbd, North/East, Latitude/Longitude
or as Range/Bearing position format. Note
that colour coding is used.
RefSys Raw Data SD
These are trend plots. The type of trend plot
is selected on the Mode page of the Refsys
view control dialog box. Note that colour
coding is used.
You can also select the Y-axis scale range
(either auto or manual scaling) and the time
span.

1 Either:
a Click the position/trend display of the Refsys view
(lower right).
or
b Place the cursor anywhere in the Refsys view and click
322 301027/C
Display views
• The Refsys view control dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the required page tab.
19.11.1.1 Mode page
Plot Orientation
Displays the Refsys plot relative to the North direction (True) or
the vessel heading (Relative).
Position
Transponder Coordinates
Raw Position
Select the required set of numerical data to be displayed in the
lower right corner of the Refsys view. These items are described
in detail in the previous section.
Trend Plot
Select a Trend Plot to be displayed in the lower right corner
of the Refsys view. These items are described in detail in the
previous section.
Plot
The type of trend plot to be displayed. You can select between
the following options: RefSys Bias E, RefSys Bias N, RefSys
StdDev, RefSysWeight or – none –.
Time span
Range...
301027/C 323
Auto
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits manually.
19.11.1.2 Grid page
Show
To show or hide the grid.
Spacing
The spacing (distance) between grid lines or circles. You can
change the grid spacing by clicking the down arrow and selecting
Type
The type of grid.
324 301027/C
Display views
19.11.1.3 Range page
Distance from Center ...to Edge of Plot

Allows you to specify the display range by typing in a value in
the text box.
Increase Range
steps.
Decrease Range
steps.
19.12 Refsys Status view

The Refsys Status view shows the status for each reference
system or transponder. The information displayed is similar to
the reference system status information in the Refsys view (see
Refsys view on page 317). In addition, the position Offset during
the last second is displayed as a bar graph (portion of 10 m) for
each reference system.
301027/C 325
Figure 59 Refsys Status view (example)
19.13 Rotation Centers view

The Rotation Centers view shows the position of all the rotation
centers that are available when the vessel is under automatic
control. The coordinates are relative to the Midships rotation
center.
When clicking the right trackball button in the Performance
or Working area on your Operator Station, a shortcut menu
containing the display views is displayed. The Rotation Centers
view can be found on the Utility submenu of this shortcut menu.
See Selecting a display view on page 48 for a more detailed
description of how to select display views.
326 301027/C
Display views
Figure 60 Rotation Centers view (example)
19.14 Sensors view

The Sensors view shows the performance and state of each of the
vessel’s gyrocompasses, wind sensors, VRS, water-depth sensors
and speed sensors.
A trend graph for one of the sensor readings is displayed, selected
from the Sensor Plot dialog box.
301027/C 327
Figure 61 Sensors view (example)
This shows the heading as measured by each

of the gyrocompasses. The measurement
from the gyrocompass that is currently being
used by the system is highlighted.
The deviation between the readings from
the gyrocompasses are shown graphically.
The deviations are shown relative to the
measurement from the gyrocompass that is
currently being used by the system. The
colours used for the markers correspond
to the colours used for the gyrocompass
numbers.
- - - - - - - - is displayed if a sensor is not OK.
328 301027/C
Display views
This shows the raw measurements of

the relative wind speed and direction as
measured by each of the wind sensors. For
each sensor the height above sea level is
displayed. The measurements from the wind
sensor that is currently being used by the
system are highlighted.
The deviations between the measurements
from the wind sensors are shown graphically.
The deviations are shown relative to the
measurements from the wind sensor that is
currently being used by the system. The
colours used for the markers correspond
to the colours used for the wind sensor
numbers.
The estimated true wind speed and both true
and relative (to the vessel) wind direction
are shown. The raw measurements of wind
speed and direction are filtered internally
(using a Kalman filter with both low and
high frequency parts), to estimate the most
reasonable speed and direction values to be
used by the K-Pos DP system.
The red text Manual is displayed in red if
Manual wind speed and direction is used.
The vessel pitch, roll and, if available, heave

as measured by each of the VRS sensors are
shown.
The following sign convention applies for
pitch and roll:
• Pitch — + is bow up.
• Roll — + is port up.
• Heave — + is down.
The root mean square (rms) values of the
sensors for Pitch, Roll and Heave are shown.
The measurements from the VRS that is
currently being used by the system are
highlighted.
301027/C 329
This is the water depth as measured

by each of the water-depth sensors.The
measurements from the sensors that are
currently being used by the system are
highlighted.
A trend plot is displayed. You can select the
information to be displayed using the Sensor
Plot dialog box for view control (see View
controls below).
Speed Log
The vessel alongships and athwartships
speed as measured by each of the Doppler
Log speed sensors are shown. The Doppler
Log speed is marked with G or W depending
on the type of speed output:
• G — Speed over the sea bed (ground
speed)
• W — Speed through the water
Speed GPS
The vessel speed and course as measured by
each of the GPS speed sensors are shown.
The measurements from the speed sensors
that are currently used by the system are
highlighted.

1 Either:
a Click the trend plot on the Sensor view.
or
b Place the cursor anywhere in the Sensors view and click
330 301027/C
Display views
• The Sensor Plot view control dialog box is displayed.
Range, deviation models

Allows you to select the required range for the deviation displays
for the measured Gyro heading, Wind Speed: and Wind Dir:
(direction). An example of this is shown in Figure 62, which
reflects the setting shown on the dialog box above.
Figure 62 Example - Individual setting of range for

gyrocompass heading, wind speed and wind direction deviation
displays
Trend Plot
Selection of trend plot and settings for the trend plot.
Plot
The trend plot to be displayed.
301027/C 331
Time span
Y axis Range...
Auto
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits.
view on page 349).
19.15 Thruster views

The thruster views show how the K-Pos DP system is using the
available thrusters to provide the required thrust setpoint.
The following thruster views are available:
• A main view (Thr Main) which provides an overview of all
the thrusters (see Thruster main view below).
• A subview for each thruster, showing more information than
the main thruster view (see Tunnel thruster view on page 336,
Azimuth thruster view on page 339 and Propeller/rudder
view on page 341).
• A view showing setpoint and feedback data for all the thrusters
(see Setpoint/feedback view on page 345).
• A view showing the resultant thruster forces and the “real”
location of the thrusters (see Forces view on page 346).
332 301027/C
Display views
19.15.1 Thruster main view

The thruster main view (Thr Main) shows the performance and
status of all the thrusters.
Bar graphs show the thruster force for each thruster unit. The
thruster force for each thruster unit and their resultant thruster
force are also represented by vectors.
To display the Thr Main view, press the THRUST button.
Clicking on a thruster symbol in the thruster main view displays
the subview for that thruster.
Figure 63 Thruster main view (example)
301027/C 333
Alloc Mode:
This is the currently-selected thruster
allocation mode (see Thruster Allocation
dialog box on page 204).
Alloc Control:
This is the currently-selected thruster
allocation control and free run status.
Priority shows either Hdg (heading) or Pos
(position). See Position Priority in Thruster
Allocation dialog box on page 204.
FreeRun shows either ON or OFF.
Incr.Pow (increased power) shows either
RDY in green when increased power is not
selected, or ON in red when selected, or
nothing when not ready.
The Alloc Mode area is click-sensitive. The
ordinary cursor changes to a pointing hand
when positioned over this area. Clicking the
left trackball button opens up the Thruster
Allocation dialog box.
Force
A numerical display of the resulting force
and direction, and a force vector (displayed
from the vessel’s Midships position), are
shown.
Moment
This is a numerical display of the resulting
turning moment and direction. A curved bar
graph represents these values.
Individual thrust vectors for each thruster
are shown. The thrust vectors change
colour when thrusters pass limit values
for percentage of available thrust (typical
values):
• Green — 0% to 60%
• Orange — 60% to 80%
• Red — 80% to 100%
All values are based on feedback signals
from the thrusters.
334 301027/C
Display views
When using the thruster force bias function,

the thrusters are colour-coded (coloured
circles around the thruster numbers) to
identify the thruster bias groups.
Status
The Status check boxes show the Running,
Ready and Enabled status of each thruster
unit.
Forces
These are numerical values and bar graphs
showing the thruster force for each thruster
unit. The bar graphs show the percentage
of the maximum available thrust and are
scaled individually. Each bar graph is split
in two horizontally. The upper part shows
the setpoint thruster force (Setp) and the
lower part shows the feedback thruster force
(Feedb). The numerical values are all based
on feedback signals from the thrusters.
The bar graphs change colour when thrusters
pass limit values for percentage of available
thrust (typical values):
• Green — 0% to 60%
• Orange — 60% to 80%
• Red — 80% to 100%
of pitch/rpm and power feedback for the
tunnel thruster.
301027/C 335

of thruster azimuth and pitch/rpm feedback
for each azimuth thruster.
The force direction relative to the thruster is
indicated by the highlighted arrow.
The arrows are colour-coded. A green arrow
indicates positive pitch/rpm, while a pink
arrow indicates negative pitch/rpm. The
same colours are shown both in the day and
night palettes.
The orange text FIX is displayed for
thrusters that use fixed angles.

of propeller pitch/rpm feedback.
The force direction relative to the propeller
is indicated by the highlighted arrow.
night palettes.
A rudder symbol with numerical and
graphical indication of rudder angle is
shown. Depending on the present mode, the
sector is defined by the maximum rudder
angle or maximum turn-angle for steering
rudder/azimuth thruster.
19.15.2 Tunnel thruster view

The Tunnel thruster view shows the operational state of a tunnel
thruster.
336 301027/C
Display views
Figure 64 Tunnel thruster view (example)
This shows the thruster status:

Running
The thruster is running.
Ready
The thruster is available for control by the
K-Pos DP system.
Enabled
The thruster is enabled for control by the
K-Pos DP system (see Enabling thrusters on
page 201).
of thruster pitch/rpm and power feedback.
301027/C 337
This is the numerical value and a bar graph

showing the thruster force. The numerical
value is based on feedback signal from the
thruster. The bar graph shows the percentage
of the maximum available thrust. The bar
graph is split in two horizontally. The
upper part shows the setpoint force and the
lower part shows the feedback force. The
bar graph change colour when the thruster
• Green — 0% to 60%
• Orange — 60% to 80%
• Red — 80% to 100%
This is a numerical display of the pitch,
rpm and power setpoint and feedback, and
the difference between them, shown as a
percentage of the maximum.
The graphical display indicates the
difference between the setpoint and
feedback (with zero at the center of the
scale).
Note that only power is configured in this
example.
A trend plot is displayed. You can select

the information to be displayed using the
Thruster Sub Plot view control dialog box
(see Subview controls on page 343).
By clicking on the left or right arrow (if

present) you can display the subview for the
previous or next thruster unit. By clicking
on the up arrow, you can display the thruster
main view.
338 301027/C
Display views
19.15.3 Azimuth thruster view

The Azimuth thruster view shows the operational state of an
azimuth thruster.
Figure 65 Azimuth thruster view (example)
This shows the thruster status:

Running
The thruster is running.
Ready
The thruster is available for control by the
K-Pos DP system.
Enabled
The thruster is enabled for control by the
K-Pos DP system (see Enabling thrusters on
page 201).
301027/C 339

of thruster azimuth and pitch/rpm feedback.
The force direction relative to the thruster is
indicated by the highlighted arrow.
night palettes.
These are the numerical value and bar graph

showing the thruster force. The numerical
value is based on a feedback signal from the
thruster. The bar graph shows the percentage
of the maximum available thrust. The bar
graph is split in two horizontally. The
upper part shows the setpoint force and the
lower part shows the feedback force. The
bar graph change colour when the thruster
• Green — 0% to 60%
• Orange — 60% to 80%
• Red — 80% to 100%
rpm and azimuth setpoint and feedback, and
scale).
340 301027/C
Display views
A trend plot is displayed. You can select

(see Subview controls on page 343).

present), you can display the subview for the
main view.
19.15.4 Propeller/rudder view

The Propeller/rudder thruster view shows the operational state of
a main propeller and, if applicable, its associated rudder.
Figure 66 Example Propeller/rudder view
301027/C 341
This shows the propeller and rudder status:

Running
The propeller is running.
Ready
The propeller/rudder is available for control
by the K-Pos DP system.
Enabled
The propeller/rudder is enabled for control
by the K-Pos DP system (see Enabling
thrusters on page 201).
Numerical and graphical displays of
propeller pitch/rpm feedback are shown.
Numerical and graphical displays of rudder
azimuth feedback are shown.
The force direction relative to the propeller
is indicated by the highlighted arrow.
The arrows are colour coded. A green arrow
night palette.
A rudder symbol with numerical and
graphical indication of rudder angle is
shown. Depending on the present mode, the
sector is defined by the maximum rudder
angle or maximum turn-angle for steering
rudder/azimuth thruster.
These are the numerical value and a bar
graph showing the thruster force. The
numerical value is based on feedback signal
from the thruster. The bar graph shows the
percentage of the maximum available thrust.
The bar graph is split in two horizontally.
The upper part shows the setpoint force and
the lower part shows the feedback force.
The bar graph change colour when the
thruster pass limit values for percentage of
available thrust (typical values):
• Green — 0% to 60%
• Orange — 60% to 80%
• Red — 80% to 100%
342 301027/C
Display views

rpm and azimuth setpoint and feedback, and
scale).
Note that only rpm and azimuth are
configured in this example.
A trend plot is shown. You can select

(see Subview controls below).

present) you can display the subview for the
main view.
19.15.5 Subview controls

To display the subview control dialog box:
1 Either:
a Click the trend plot on the thruster subview.
or
b Place the cursor anywhere in the thruster subview and
click the right trackball button.
301027/C 343
• The Thruster Sub Plot view control dialog box is

displayed.
Plot
The trend plot to be displayed. The following trend plots are
available:
Thr Pitch
Pitch setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr RPM
RPM setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr Azim
Azimuth setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr Load
Load setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Time span
Y axis Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y axis Range dialog box which
allows you to set the upper and lower limits for the y-axis plot
scale manually or to select automatic scaling.
Auto
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits.
344 301027/C
Display views
19.15.6 Setpoint/feedback view

The Setp/feedb view shows setpoint and feedback data for all
the thrusters.
Figure 67 Setpoint/feedback view (example)
Indicates the colour coding used on bar

graphs and numerical values for Setpoint,
Feedback and the difference (Diff) between
them.
This shows the thruster/propeller/rudder
status:
Running
This is displayed only if the running status
is available to the K-Pos DP system.
301027/C 345
Ready
Available for control by the K-Pos DP
system.
Enable
Enabled for control by the K-Pos DP system
(see Enabling thrusters on page 201).
These are numerical displays and bar graphs
of the thruster force setpoint and feedback,
and the difference between them, shown as
a percentage of maximum.
of the pitch setpoint and feedback, and
percentage of maximum.
of the rpm setpoint and feedback, and
of the force setpoint and feedback, and
of the thruster azimuth or rudder angle
setpoint and feedback, and the difference
between them (in degrees).
19.15.7 Forces view

The Forces view shows the resultant thruster forces and the
“real” location of the thrusters.
346 301027/C
Display views
Figure 68 Forces view (example)
These are the resultant thruster force and

direction, and the resultant turning moment
and direction.
301027/C 347
Forces
These are numerical values and bar graphs
showing the thruster force for each thruster
unit. The bar graphs show the percentage
of the maximum available thrust and are
scaled individually. Each bar graph is split
in two horizontally. The upper part shows
the setpoint thruster force (Setp) and the
lower part shows the feedback thruster force
(Feedb). The numerical values are all based
on feedback signals from the thrusters.
The bar graphs change colour when thrusters
• Green — 0% to 60%
• Orange — 60% to 80%
• Red — 80% to 100%
Status
The Status check boxes show the Running,
Ready and Enabled status of each thruster
unit.
Individual thrust vectors (thruster force
feedback) for each thruster are shown.
The vectors change colour according to
the change of colour on the corresponding
bar graphs (when passing limit values for
percentage of available thrust).
The resultant thruster force vector (displayed

from the vessel’s Midships position) is
displayed. A graphical indication of turning
moment is also shown. The turning moment
has a maximum sector range of ±180°.
348 301027/C
Display views
19.16 Trends view

The Trends view provides dynamic displays (trend plots) and
numerical values for trended curves showing the history over
a specified period for selected information, such as wind, sea
current, position and heading deviation, thruster forces and
power consumption.
When clicking the right trackball button in the working area on
your Operator Station, a shortcut menu containing the display
views is displayed. The Trends view can be found on the Utility
sub menu on this shortcut menu.
Using the Trend Plot view control dialog box (see View
controls on page 352) you can select the trend plots to be
displayed. Up to three different trend plots can be displayed
simultaneously.
See Selecting a display view on page 48 for a more detailed
description of how to select display views.
301027/C 349
Figure 69 Trends view (example)
The header indicates the name of the

variable type for which you have selected to
display the trend plot (see View controls on
page 352 for selection of variable).
Depending on the type of variable you
have selected, one or several different trend
curves will be displayed on the same trend
plot. Each curve will have its own specific
name shown together with a unique colour
code.
350 301027/C
Display views
This is a trend plot for the selected

variable using colour coding to identify and
differentiate the various variable curves
being plotted. The plot has Time span along
the x-axis and measured values along the
y-axis. You should note that the most recent
values are plotted to the far right, i.e. that
the curves move from right to left on the
trend plot.
Each trend plot has its own Numeric button.
Pressing this button displays a Trend
Numeric: dialog box.
The Trend Numeric: dialog box presents a range of numerical

properties for all curves on the trend plot. Values for the
following numerical properties can be calculated and displayed:
Average, Minimum, Maximum and StdDev. The values for the
numerical properties are calculated over the Time Span over
which you have selected to display the specific trend plot (see
View controls on page 352).
In addition to displaying the numerical properties for each curve,
the Trend Numeric: dialog box contains a lead text column (Item)
and a Unit column.
The width of the columns and the dialog box itself can be re-sized
in several different ways as follows:
• By placing the cursor on the delimiters of the column headers
and clicking the left trackball button. The cursor will then
change shape to a two-headed arrow. You can now drag the
cursor to change the column width.
Note
This will not re-size the total width of the dialog box itself.
301027/C 351
• By placing the cursor on top of a column or column header

and then click the right trackball button. A shortcut menu is
then displayed.
Using the commands available on this menu, you can:

• Hide the column you are pointing at (Hide Column command),
with the exception of the Item column. Using this command
you will be able to hide one or several columns, thus obtaining
a more compact dialog box showing only the numerical
properties you are interested in.
• Show all the columns on the dialog box (Show All Columns
command) using the default values for column widths.
• Adjust the width of each column according to the width of
each single column header (Width by Header command).
• Adjust the width of each column according to the width of the
contents of each single column (Width by Contents command).
• Save the column definition (i.e. the re-sized dialog box) for
later use (Save command). Next time you open the dialog box,
it will be displayed using the last-saved column definition.
Note
The Trend Numeric: dialog box will be re-sized according to
the changed column widths.

1 Either:
a Click using the left trackball button on a trend display
of the Trends view.
or
b Place the cursor anywhere in the Trends view and click
352 301027/C
Display views

• The Trend Plot view control dialog box is displayed.
Plot
The trend plots to be displayed. Clicking the down arrow on the
far right of the Plot list box opens up a list from which you can
select the variable type to be displayed.
Time span
The time span for the trend plots.
Y axis Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y axis Range dialog box which
allows you to set the upper and lower limits for the y-axis plot
scale manually or to select automatic scaling.
Auto
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower range limits manually.
view on page 349).
301027/C 353
Index
A B position presentation, 146
system datum, 165
About (dialog box) basic forces and motions, 19
current
Details, 230 blackout prevention, 221
direction display, 63
EXE/DLL, 230
current update, 79
Overview, 229
C box), CyberSea Mode (dialog box),
Acceleration/Retardation Settings (dialog
231
200 calibrating
Ack (button), 93 joystick, 78
Activate (button), 34, 197 Change Heading (button), 197 D
active and unavailable commands, Change Position (button), damping, 39
37 187, 189–190 Date And Time (dialog box),
alarm Change User (dialog box), 57 91
acknowledging, 93 changing cursor image, 46 Datum Details (dialog box),
lamps, 94 changing user, 57 150
limits chart Decrease (button), 34, 197
heading, 66 view control, 306 depth
position, 66–67 combinator control of thrusters, displayed on Sensors view,
VRS, 67 219 330
silence, 94 command Deviation view, 272
Alarm Limits (dialog box) groups, 109 position and heading deviation in Auto Position mod
Position, 65 status, 109 273
VRS, 67 transfer, 107 position and heading in Joystick mode,
alarm message, 87 Command Control (dialog box) 272
alarm states, 92 DP-OS, 110 view controls, 276
Alarm View (button), 88 Give, 112 dialog boxes, 40
Alarms (button) Overview, 110–111 Diesels view, 276
Alarm lamp, 95 Connect (dialog box), 116 display
Fault lamp, 95 connecting to a controller group, colours, 64
Power lamp, 94 116 layout, 35
Alloc Setup (button), 205 consequence analysis menu bar, 36
analysis DP, 269 message line, 37
consequence running state messages, 270 performance area, 38
DP, 269 selecting DP class, 270 printing a hardcopy, 58
Auto Position (button), 183 warning messages, 270 selection of display palette,
Auto Position mode, 182 Control Setup (button), 68 64
from Joystick mode to, 183 controller status bar, 38
Green control, 25 gain, 68 status line, 38
Automatic Thruster Start (dialog box), in operation type PM, 27 title bar, 36
203 mode units, 60
AutoPos (menu) display presentation of, working area, 38
Acceleration, 193, 200 71 display accuracy
Alarm Limits, 65 green, 68 sea current speed, 62
Dp Class, 270 high precision, 68 vessel speed, 62
Gain, 68 relaxed, 68 display units
Heading, 197 controller groups, 116 editing, 61
Position, 187, 189–190 Controller Mode resetting, 63
Position Inc, 186 Green, 68 selecting the set of display units to use,
Position R/B, 186 High Precision, 68 60
Quick Model, 74 Relaxed, 68 wind, waves and sea current direction,
Rate Of Turn, 199 controller PS 63
Rotation Center, 75 resetting, 117 Display Units (dialog box), 60
Speed, 191 selecting master, 122 display views, 46
axis control, 39 updating offline, 122 available views, 47
Controls (button), 32 control dialog boxes, 49
coordinate systems, 164 Deviation view, 272
354 301027/C
Index
Diesels view, 276 Net Status, 243 operator selected, 198

General view, 279 OS/HS, 241 rate of turn, 199
Joystick view, 281 PS, 237 stopping a change of heading,
LTW view, 285 PS Redundancy, 239 195
Numeric view, 291 equipment status, 237 system selected, 198
orientation of the operator station, Event List (dialog box), 88 Heading (dialog box)
46 Event printer, 242 Heading, 197
Posplot view, 298 Event Printer (dialog box), 96 Rate Of Turn, 199
Power Consumption view, Heading Setpoint (dialog box),
316 197
Power view, 312 F Heading Wheel, 34, 196
preselecting, 50 FMEA mode, 231 heave, 19
Refsys Status view, 325 free run limits, 67
Refsys view, 317 in Auto Track (high speed) and Autopilot modes,
Help (menu)
Rotation Centers view, 326 207 About, 229
selecting, 48 freeze test of position measurements, Messages, 97
Sensors view, 327 166 High Precision Controller Mode,
Thruster views, 332 function keys, 32 68
Azimuth thruster view, hotspot, 46
339 hotspot cursor, 47
Forces view, 346
G
Propeller/rudder view, gain, 68
341 controller, 40 I
Setpoint/feedback view, customised, 70 Inccrease (button), 34
345 high/medium/low, 70 Increase (button), 197
Thruster main view, 333 Gain (dialog box), 68 information message, 88
Tunnel thruster view, 336 General view, 279 input validation of entered values,
position
tooltip, hotspot cursor and change of cursor and heading deviation in Auto
image, 45 Position mode,
46 280 IO Manager (dialog box), 249
Trends view, 349 view controls, 281 IO Point Browser (dialog box),
zooming, 50 Give (button), 108 258
giving command, 108
divergence test of position measurements, IO system, 235
168 GPS IO Terminal Block (dialog box),
DP Class (dialog box), 270 quality filter, 163 252
DpPS, 233 Green control, 25
draught Green Controller Mode, 68
Gyro (button), 126, 129 J
sensors, 141
Driver Properties (dialog box), Gyro Deviation (dialog box), joystick, 34
261 128 calibrating, 78
dropout gyrocompasses, 126 current update, 79
heading, 131 deviation calculation, 127 electrical failure, 179
position, 174 displayed on Sensors view, environmental compensation,
328 79
faulty, 130 precision, 79
E status lamp, 129 thrust, 79
Joystick (button), 178
EBL (dialog box), 309 Joystick (menu)
EBL function, 309 H Acceleration, 193, 200
electrical failure hardcopy, 58 Alarm Limits, 65
joystick, 179 Hardcopy (button), 58 Calibrate, 78
Electronic Bearing Line, 309 hardware information, 229 Gain, 68
emergency message, 87 heading Heading, 197
Enter a New Numeric Value (dialog box),changing using the Heading dialog box, Rate Of Turn, 199
43 197 Rotation Center, 84
entering numeric values, 42 changing using the heading wheel, Settings, 80
environmental compensation, 196 Joystick Calibrate (dialog box),
79 changing using the Posplot view, 78
Equipment - System Status (dialog box ) 195 joystick control
Event Printer, 242 limits, 66 position and heading, 178
301027/C 355
rotation center, 82 mixed joystick/auto modes, 179 limits, 66

Joystick Full Thrust (button), modes speed setpoint, 190
80 Auto Position, 182 stopping a change of position,
Joystick mode, 177 button group, 31 185
with auto heading control, Joystick, 177 Position (dialog box)
179 mixed joystick/auto, 179 Abs, 189
with auto position control, Standby, 176 Inc, 187
180 mooring forces, 24 R/B, 188
with automatic stabilisation, Speed, 190
181 Position Inc (dialog box), 186
Joystick Settings (dialog box), N Position Presentation (dialog box),
79 numbers 146
Joystick Setup (button), 80 entering, 42 Position R/B (dialog box), 186
Joystick view, 281 input validation, 45 position-reference systems
Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog Use (dialog box), relative weight,
changing
43 158
K Numeric view, 291 changing test limits, 159
keypad, 32 view controls, 292 changing the reference origin,
173
controlling, 153
L O coordinate systems, 164
lamps offline controller PS divergence test, 168
dimming, 58 updating, 122 enabling, 156–157
test, 59 online system support, 224 enabling other, 172
Light Taut Wire Plot (dialog box), operator panel, 30 enabling the first, 172
290 operator station, 29 freeze test, 166
limits software median test, 169
heading, 66 restart, 104 monitoring, 156–157
pitch, roll, heave, 67 stop, 104 prediction test, 167
position, 66 operator stations, 234 properties, 161
VRS, 67 reference origin, 165, 172
Local N/E Properties (dialog box), relative weighting of, 167
150 P
standard deviation, 166
logon configuration, 106 panel, 30 status, 39
Logon Configuration (dialog box), Panel Lamp Test (dialog box), tests on, 166
106 59 variance test, 167
LTW view, 285 Panel Light Configuration (dialog box),
Posplot (dialog box)
view controls, 289 59 Chart, 306
panning function (center here), Grid, 306
310 Mode, 304
M PcAnywhere Waiting... (dialog box), Range, 307
master controller PS 226 Show, 305
selecting, 122 Performance (dialog box), Trace, 308
median test of position measurements, 276, 281, 292 Posplot view, 298
169 pitch, 19 changing heading, 195
menu bar, 36 limits, 67 changing position, 185
active and unavailable commands, pitch, roll, heave EBL function, 309
37 limits, 67 view controls, 304
menus listed, 52 position power
message line, 37, 88 changing using absolute coordinates, monitoring, 221
messages 189 Power Consumption view, 316
acknowledging, 93 changing using Power Plot (dialog box), 315
displayed explanation, 99 increments, 186–187 Power view, 312
explanations, 97 changing using view controls, 314
printing, 101 range/bearing, 186, prediction test of position measurements,
presentation, 88 188 167
printed, 96 changing using the Posplot view, Preselect (dialog box), 51
searching for, 98 185 Present Heading (button), 195
minimum power heading, 199 dropout, 174
356 301027/C
Index
Present Position (button), 185 limits, 67 Set Timezone (dialog box), 64

Print (dialog box), 244 roll, pitch, heave shell configuration, 106
Print Setup (dialog box), 101 displayed on Sensors view, showing the tooltip, 47
Print Status (dialog box), 226 329 signal conditioning, 256
printing rotation center Silence (button), 32, 60, 94
display picture, 58 automatic heading control, slow-drift test, 168
process stations, 234 75 software information, 229
resetting, 117 joystick heading control, 82 speed
PUIF Network message monitoring (dialog box),
Rotation Center (dialog box) acceleration/retardation factor,
95 automatic control, 75 192
joystick control, 84 display accuracy, 62
Rotation Centers view, 326 sensors, 138
Q rotation speed, 199 setpoint
Quick Model (dialog box), 74 changing, 190–191
quick model update, 73 Speed Setpoint (dialog box),
S 191
R satellite navigation spin box, 42
quality filter, 163 standard deviation of position measurements,
rate of turn 166
acceleration/retardation factor, sea current speed
display accuracy, 62 Standby (button), 176
200 Standby mode, 176
sensors, 143 Sensor Plot (dialog box), 331
sensors startup procedure, 104
setpoint, 199 software
RBUS IO Image, 250 draught, 141
gyro deviation, 127 restart, 106
redundancy, 234 state plane zone, 152
dual-redundant systems, 119 gyrocompass, 126
rate of turn, 143 Station Explorer (dialog box),
triple-redundant systems, 246
121 speed, 138
VRS, 136 Status (button), 109
Redundant Stations (dialog box), status bar, 38
122 wind, 131
manually enter values, 133 status line, 38
reference origin, 165 status page, printing, 226
changing, 173 Sensors (button), 32
Sensors (dialog box) Stop/Restart (dialog box), 105
Reference System (dialog box) stopping a change of heading,
Enable, 157 Draught, 141
Gyro, 126 195
Validation, 159 stopping a change of position,
Weight, 158 Rate Of Turn, 143
Speed, 139 185
Reference System Properties (dialog box), surge, 19
161 VRS, 136
Wind, 132 Surge (button), 31, 179
Quality Filter Actions, 163 sway, 19
UTM Properties, 162 Sensors (menu)
Sway (button), 31, 179
Reference System Settings (dialog box),Alarm Limits, 67 System (menu)
153 Draught, 141
Gyro, 126 Change User, 57
Refsys (dialog box) Connect, 116
Grid, 324 Gyro Deviation, 128
Rate Of Turn, 143 CyberSea, 231
Mode, 323 Equipment, 237, 239, 241–243
Range, 325 Reference System, 157–159
Reference System Properties, Event Printer, 96
Refsys Status view, 325 Print Status, 227
Refsys view, 317 161
Reference System Settings, Redundant Stations, 122
view controls, 322 Remote Diagnostics, 224
Relaxed Controller Mode, 68 153
Speed, 139 Reset Controller PS, 117
remote diagnostics, 224 Screen Capture Printer, 58
Remote Diagnostics (dialog box), VRS, 136
Wind, 132 Set Date/Time, 63
224 Set Timezone, 64
Reset Controller PS (dialog box), Sensors view, 327
view controls, 330 Stop/Restart, 105
117 Trainer, 267
Reset Display Units (dialog box), serial lines
resetting, 264 system architecture, 233
63 system messages
resetting display units, 63 Set System Date/Time (dialog box),
63 acknowledging, 93
roll, 19
301027/C 357
messages on the printer, 96 inwards, 217 Light Configuration, 58

presentation, 88 turn factor, 216 Position Presentation, 146
System Messages (dialog box) combinator control, 219 Preselect, 51
Contents, 97 control modes, 204 Reset Display Units, 63
message pane, 99 enabling, 201 Set Palette, 65
Search, 98 force bias, 209 Show ToolTip, 47
system start-up, 104 manual fix angles, 208 Use HotSpot Cursors, 47
system status, 226 rudder limits, 208 Use Preselected, 50
run-in, 220 views, 46
status, 39 Views (button), 32
T Thrusters (button), 32 VRS, 136
Take (button), 108 views, 333 faulty, 138
taking command, 108 time status lamp, 137
text box, 42 changing the system time, VRS (button), 136–137
thrust 63 VSim mode, 231
joystick, 79 changing the system time zone,
Thruster (menu) 64
title bar, 36 W
Allocation Mode, 205
Allocation Settings, 208 tooltip, 46–47 warning
Automatic Start, 203 trackball, 33 limits
Biasing, 210 trainer, 266 heading, 66
Combinator Control Settings, Trainer Settings (dialog box), pitch, roll, heave, 67
219 267 position, 66
Enable, 201 Trend Numeric: (dialog box), VRS, 67
Run-in, 220 351 warning message, 87
Thruster Allocation (dialog box), Trend Plot (dialog box), 353 explanations, 97
205 Trends view, 349 wave
Thruster Biasing (dialog) view controls, 352 direction display, 63
automatic bias, 211 wind
enter bias manually, 210 direction display, 63
U
Thruster Combinator Control Settings (dialog box), displayed on Sensors view,
219 units, 60 329
Thruster Enable (dialog box), user sensors, 131
201 chief, 57 faulty, 134
Thruster Run-in (dialog box), operator, 57 manually enter values, 133
220 system, 57 status lamp, 133
Thruster Sub Plot (dialog box), using hotspot cursors, 47 Wind (button), 132–133
344 UTM properties, 163 wind sensors
Thruster views, 332 UTM Properties (dialog box), operating without, 135
Azimuth thruster view, 339 151 WinPS, 235
Forces view, 346 working area, 38
Propeller/rudder view, 341
Setpoint/feedback view, 345 V
subview controls, 343 Y
variance test of position measurements,
Thruster main view, 333 167 Y-Axis Range (dialog box)
Tunnel thruster view, 336 vertical reference sensor, 136 Power Plot, 315
thrusters vertical vessel motions Refsys, 324
allocation, 27 displayed on Sensors view, Sensor Plot, 332
allocation modes, 204 329 Thruster Sub Plot, 344
diving, 206 vessel speed Trend Plot, 353
environ fix, 206 display accuracy, 62 yaw, 19
fix, 206 displayed on Sensors view, Yaw (button), 31, 179
heave red, 206 330
steering, 206 View (menu)
variable, 205 Display Units, 60
automatic start, 203 Num Entry Dlg, 42
biasing, 209 Panel
angle factor, 216 Lamp Test, 59
358 301027/C
Index
301027/C 359
©2006 Kongsberg Maritime
Kongsberg Maritime AS
P.O.Box 483 Telephone: +47 32 28 50 00
N-3601 Kongsberg, Telefax: +47 32 28 50 10
Norway Service: +47 815 35 355
www.kongsberg.com

Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS) Dynamic Positioning System: Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS) Dynamic Positioning System: Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Dynamic Positioning System

3.8 Controller mode and gain level selection ...............................................................68

6.2 Logon Configuration dialog box ..........................................................................106

8.2.5 Rejection of faulty wind data ..................................................................... 135

9.13.4 Prediction test........................................................................................... 167

11.7 Acceleration/Retardation Settings dialog box ......................................................192

16.2 System architecture ..............................................................................................233

18.2 Selecting the DP class ..........................................................................................270

19.15.1 Thruster main view ................................................................................... 333

RPM Revolutions Per Minute

Unavailable Describes a status indication or entry field that is shown but

1 K-POS DP SYSTEM THEORY

1.1 The K-Pos DP system

1.2 Basic forces and motions

The K-Pos DP control system calculates the forces that the

Figure 1 Forces and motions

The vessel also moves in three vertical degrees of freedom:

Figure 2 Pitch, roll and heave

Pitch Roll Heave

1.3 K-Pos DP system principles

Figure 3 K-Pos DP system block diagram

The K-Pos DP system relies on a mathematical vessel model

1.3.1 The Extended Kalman Filter

The Extended Kalman Filter uses a mathematical model of the

Figure 4 Simplified block diagram showing the extended

The Extended Kalman Filter provides the following advantages:

• In the absence of position measurements, the model provides

1.3.3 The Controller

1.3.3.2 High Precision and Relaxed Control

Figure 5 High precision and Relaxed control

(CD3320) Position deviation

1.3.3.3 Green control

• The Environment Compensator is designed to compensate for

Figure 6 Vessel under Green control in the operational area

The very smooth control actions reduce wear and tear on

Figure 7 Green control structure

1.3.5 Thruster allocation

If it is not possible to maintain both the turning moment and

2.1 Operator station

Figure 8 The K-Pos DP operator station

2.2 Operator panel

Figure 9 K-Pos DP operator panel

2.2.1 Push buttons

Figure 10 Examples of buttons: double press (TAKE button

Figure 11 Surge, sway and yaw buttons on an OS that is

Figure 12 shows the button arrangement for an OS where the

Figure 12 Sway, surge and yaw buttons on an OS that is

For more information about messages and the ALARMS button

This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode.

PAGE UP Same functions as on a standard keyboard.

2.2.5 Heading wheel

The functions that are available depend on the present mode.

2.3 Display layout

The display is divided into a number of predefined areas as

2.3.1 Title bar

2.3.2 Menu bar

Figure 13 Menu bar (example)

2.3.2.1 Active and unavailable commands

Figure 14 Commands that are present on more than one menu

2.3.3 Message line

2.3.4 Performance area

2.3.5 Working areas